Commentary on Plato, ProtagorasJames AdamAdela Marion AdamPerseus Project, Tufts UniversityGregory CranePrepared under the supervision ofBridget AlmasLisa CerratoDavid MimnoRashmi SinghalNational Endowment for the HumanitiesTrustees of Tufts UniversityMedford, MAPerseus ProjectPerseus 3.0viaf107078652.viaf001.perseus-eng1.xmlPlatoProtagorasJames AdamAdela Marion AdamCambridgeCambridge University Press1921First printing 1893
Hathi Trust
This pointer extracts chapter and section.
This pointer extracts chapter.
EnglishGreekLatinItalianFrenchGermanUpdated for P6edited markup and assigned CTS URNchanged e)ritaqe\n to e)pitaqe\n chapter 34moved more xml files around based on copyright
statusfixing citations - ad fixing bad bibl refsadded needed xml declarationfix pesky hyphenated datemost bibls markedEdited
Plato's Protagoras
Πρωταγόρας ἢ σοφισταί·
ἐνδεικτικός
. This is how the
title appears in B, except that
ἐνδεικτικός (which is absent in T) is apparently from a
later hand. B denotes the Bodleian MS. = Bekker's
U: T a
manuscript in the
library of St Mark's at Venice (append. class. 4 cod. 1) =
Bekker's
t.
The former is the best representative of the MSS. of the first
class: the
latter is supposed by Schanz to be the source of all the MSS. of
the
second class. Plato probably called the dialogue Πρωταγόρας (compare the titles
Crito , Euthyphro, etc.— the majority of the
dialogues are named after an interlocutor): the words ἢ
σοφισταί and ἐνδεικτικός
were added by Thrasylus, whose date is about the Christian era. The
Protagoras is the sole example of an ‘endeictic’ dialogue: it is
so called because it was thought to be an arraignment ( ἔνδειξις ) of the Sophists. That this is
the meaning of ἐνδεικτικός , and not
‘probative’, can be inferred from the fact that Albinus used ἐλεγκτικός in its place ( εἰσαγωγὴ εἰς τοὺς Πλάτωνος διαλόγους , ch.
v. Cobet takes the right view: see his edition of Diog. Laert. III. 51).
The arrangement of the Platonic dialogues into tetralogies is also
probably due to Thrasylus. The Protagoras is the second
dialogue of the sixth tetralogy, the others being (1)
Euthydemus, (3) Gorgias, (4) Meno.
See Grote's
Plato, 1, 158 ff.
CHAPTER I
Socrates meets a friend, who asks him to describe his interview
with Protagoras.
1. πόθεν—ὥραν
. The
opening words of Cicero's translation of the Protagoras are
preserved by Priscian (VI. 63): quid tu?
unde tandem appares, o Socrate? an id quidem dubium non est,
quin ab Alcibiade?ἢ =
Latin an? introduces a second question intended to
forestall Socrates' answer to the first: cf. Apol. 26Bπῶς με
φὴ|ς
διαφθείρειν, ὦ Μέλητε, τοὺς νεωτέρους; ἢ δῆλον δὴ ὅτι
κτλ.;
2. κυνηγεσίου—ὥραν
.
For the metaphor in κυνηγεσίου Sauppe
quotes Soph. 222Dτῇ τῶν
ἐρώντων θήρᾳ τὸν νοῦν, ὡς
ἔοικας, οὔπω προσέσχεςand Xen.
Mem. 1. 2. 24Ἀλκιβιάδης—διὰ
μὲν κάλλος—θηρώμενος κτλ. τοῦ περὶ τὴν Ἀλκιβιάδου ὥραν(= τὸν
ὡραῖον Ἀλκιβιάδην , cf. βίη
Ἡρακλείη for βίαιος Ἡρακλῆς ) is
a slight παρὰ προσδοκίαν as in the
English: ‘From hunting, no doubt—after the young and blooming Alcibiades.’
It was part of Socrates' habitual irony to pretend to be in love with young
men of ability (cf. the words of Alcibiades in Symp. 216DΣωκράτης
ἐρωτικῶς διάκειται τῶν καλῶν καὶ ἀεὶ περὶ τούτους ἐστὶ
καὶ ἐκπέπληκταιand 216E: see also below, note on 310A l. 36).
καὶ μήν μοι καί.
καὶ μήνis merely ‘well’ as in Phaedo, 84Dκαὶ
μὴν—τἀληθῆ σοι ἐρῶ. The second καί
goes with πρῴην : ‘well, it was only
the other day that I saw him, etc.’ In the next line καλὸς ἀνήρ is in the predicate: the
readings of Bekker ( ἁνήρ ) and
Athenaeus ( ὁ ἀνήρ ) are less good. ἀνὴρ μέντοι is ‘but yet a man’)( παῖς . At the age of 18 an Athenian εἰς ἄνδρας ἐνεγράφετο .
4. ὥς γ’ ἐν αὐτοῖς
ἡμῖν—ὑποπιμπλάμενος.
αὐτοῖς=
μόνοις is emphatic as in the usual αὐτοὶ
γάρ ἐσμεν and therefore precedes ἡμῖν.
ὥς γ’ ἐν αὐτοῖς
ἡμῖν εἰρῆσθαι apologises for ἀνὴρ
μέντοι : for this use of ὥς γε
cf. Euthyd. 307Aὥς γε
πρὸς
σὲ
τἀληθῆ εἰρῆσθαιand below
339Eκαὶ in καὶ πώγωνος is ‘and’ not ‘even’. ὑπο‐ in
ὑποπιμπλάμενος is diminutive, like sub- in
Latin. So in
312Aἤδη γὰρ ὑπέφαινέν τι ἡμέρας
.
6. οὐ σὺ μέντοι
. ‘In
interrogationibus haec particula’ ( μέντοι
) ‘ita cum οὐ negatione coniungitur, ut
gravissima sententiae vox intercedat, quo modo aliquis eis quae ex altero
quaerit summam veritatis ingerit speciem’ (Hoefer, de
particulis
Platonicis, p. 34). The idiom is very frequent in Plato, e.g. Rep. I. 339B, Crat. 439A, Theaet. 163E. Translate ‘You don't mean to say
that you disapprove of Homer’.
7. ὃς ἔφη χαριεστάτην ἥβην κτλ.
Homer, Il. XXIV. 348 and Od. X. 279πρῶτον
ὑπηνήτῃ τοῦπερ χαριεστάτη ἥβη. To insert
τήν (with Hirschig) before ἥβην
would make the reference to Homer less precise. The line in Homer refers to
Hermes, and Sauppe quotes Clement to show that sculptors modelled their
busts of Hermes after Alcibiades.
11. εὖ ἔμοιγε ἔδοξεν
,
sc. διακεῖσθαι . Socrates replies to his
friend's second question ( καὶ πῶς πρὸς σὲ ὁ
νεανίας διάκειται ;) first, and to his first
question ( ἦ παρ’ ἐκείνου φαίνει; ) second, in the words καὶ
οὖν καὶ ἄρτι ἀπ’ ἐκείνου ἔρχομαι , where
οὖν marks the regression to the earlier inquiry. Both B and T read ἄρχομαι by mistake for ἔρχομαι : ἔρχομαι
is found in a Vienna codex (suppl. phil. gr. 7) which Kral and Wohlrab place
along with B in the first class of MSS.
14. οὔτε
προσεῖχον—ἐπελανθανόμηντε.
τεfollowing
οὔτε throws emphasis on the second clause: e.g. Apol. 26Cπαντάπασί
με φὴ|ς οὔτε αὐτὸν νομίζειν θεοὺς τούς τε ἄλλους ταῦτα διδάσκειν.
The idiom is very common in Plato (e.g. below
347E360D
361E and corresponds to
neque—que or (more frequently) neque—et in
Latin. For the interchange of pronouns ἐκείνου—
αὐτοῦ see on 310D
19. καὶ πολύ γε
, i.e. καλλίονι ἐνέτυχον .
23. Ἀβδηρίτῃ
. Abdera, on
the coast of Thrace, was the birthplace of Democritus and of Protagoras. The
reputation of the city for heaviness and stupidity seems not to be earlier
than the age of Demosthenes: see pseudo-Dem. περὶ
τῶν πρὸς
Ἀλέξανδρον , 23 ὥσπερ ἐν
Ἀβδηρίταις ἢ Μαρωνείταις ἀλλ’ οὐκ ἐν
Ἀθηναίοις πολιτευόμενοι and Cic. ad
Atticum, VII. 7. 4.
25. υἱέος
. Schanz writes ὑέος in conformity with the general usage
of inscriptions about Plato's time, but MSS. upon the whole favour υἱέος : see the Editor's note on Crito, 45C.
26. τὸ σοφώτατον
. So
the MSS.: Schanz and others read σοφώτερον
, apparently the reading of Ficinus, who translates the word by sapientius. Socrates, however, is thinking of
Protagoras, who is not σοφός , but σοφώτατος (l. 31): the effect of the neuter τὸ σοφώτατον is to generalise the statement
into a kind of adage. σοφώτερον would
introduce a somewhat frigid comparison between Alcibiades and Protagoras in
respect of wisdom; and it should also be noted that the MSS. reading σοφώτατον was more likely to be changed to σοφώτερον by mistake than vice versa. There
may be an allusion to some proverbial form of speech resembling that in
Theognis, 255 κάλλιστον
τὸ δικαιότατον·
λῷστον δ’ ὑγιαίνειν κτλ. : cf. also the
scolion referred to in Gorg. 451E. The sentiment is an interesting
anticipation of the Stoic paradoxes as to the beauty of the wise man.
28. ἀλλ’ ἦ
expresses
surprise and interest: ‘What! have you just left etc.’ So in Gorg. 447Aἀλλ’ ἦ
τὸ
λεγόμενον κατόπινἑορτῆς
ἥκομεν;Presently μὲν
οὖν is as usual corrective: see on Apol. 26B.
31. σοφώτατος εἶναι
Πρωταγόρας
.
The interest is sustained by reserving the name of Protagoras to the
end.
35. πάνυ γε πολλὰ καὶ εἰπὼν κτλ.
Sauppe places a comma after πάνυ γε , but it suits the rapid movement
of the dialogue better to take πάνυ with πολλά .
36. τί οὖν οὐ διηγήσω
.
Literally ‘why didn't you relate’, i.e. ‘tell us at once’. So in 317Dτί οὖν—οὐ
καὶ Πρόδικον καὶ
Ἱππίαν ἐκαλέσαμεν; This construction
of τί οὐ and τί
οὖν οὐ is common in animated conversational style,
especially with the second person: e.g. Gorg. 503Bτί οὐχὶ
καὶ
ἐμοὶ αὐτὸν ἔφρασας τίς
ἐστιν;= φράσον
ὅτι τάχιστα—οὐκ ἂν φθάνοις φράζων as Thompson remarks.
τὴν ξυνουσίαν
recalls συγγεγονώς in l. 34. The continual use of
the words συνεῖναι,
συγγίγνεσθαι, πλησιάζειν, ἰέναι ἐπί, ἐρᾶν and the like to
denote the relation between learner and teacher in Plato's dialogues
depends upon the conception of the philosophical impulse as ἔρως : see Symp. 210.
37. ἐξαναστήσας τὸν παῖδα
τουτονί
.
The slave was doubtless in attendance on the Friend.
40. ἀκούητε
. From this,
as well as from ἡμεῖς and ἀκούετε , it appears that the Friend was
not the only listener.
42. διπλῆ ἂν εἴη ἡ χάρις
. The expression is almost proverbial: cf.
(with Schneidewin on Soph. Phil.
1370) Eur. Rhesus, 162-3παντὶ γὰρ προσκείμενον κέρδος πρὸς ἔργω? τὴν
χάριν τίκτει διπλῆν, and Eur.
Suppl. 333-4τῷδέ τ’
εἴρηκας καλῶς
κἀμοί· διπλοῦν δὲ χάρμα γίγνεται τόδε.
CHAPTER II
Socrates begins his story. Hippocrates called on him at an early
hour and entreated him to apply to Protagoras on his behalf.
1. ἔτι βαθέος ὄρθρου.
ὄρθρος βαθύςis the period just before
daybreak: ὄρθρος is the morning twilight, and βαθύς implies that it was more dark than light: Crito, 43A. A similar use of βαθύς is seen in the expressions βαθεῖα νύξ and βαθεῖα
ἑσπέρα .
2. Ἱπποκράτης—Φάσωνος δὲ
ἀδελφός
. Hippocrates is known only from this
dialogue. δέ without preceding μέν is regular in such twofold descriptions of
a person: Sauppe refers to Aesch.
Pers. 151μήτηρ βασιλέως,
βασίλεια δ’
ἐμήand Hdt. VII.
10πατρὶ τῷ σῷ, ἀδελφεῷ δὲ ἐμῷ Δαρείῳ,
ἠγόρευον . The use of δέ in μᾶλλον δέ =‘vel potius’ is the same.
4. ᾔει ἐπειγόμενος
. So BT: neither in the 3rd singular of
such forms nor elsewhere do Plato's MSS. always avoid hiatus. Schanz (vol.
XII, p. XV) would insert the ν
ἐφελκυστικόν in such forms before a vowel, unless a pause
follows.
7. Ἱπποκράτης, ἔφην, οὗτος
. We have followed Heindorf in printing a
full stop after οὗτος . Heindorf
(following Ficinus) correctly takes the words as an aside; Socrates
recognises Hippocrates by his voice. The neuter comparative of νέος regularly implies that the new is
worse than the old: see on Euthyphr. 2A.
8. εἰ μὴ ἀγαθά γε
. Compare Ar. Knights, 186μῶν ἐκ
καλῶν εἶ κἀγαθῶν; μὰ τοὺς θεούς, εἰ μὴ ’κ πονηρῶν γεand
Blaydes in loc. The idiom originally meant ‘unless by νεώτερα you mean
ἀγαθά ’, which would be a contradiction in terms, since νεώτερον is κακόν
. Preceded by
οὐδέν it has come to mean little more than ‘except good’.
11. πρῴην
: see 309Dτρίτην
γε ἤδη ἡμέραν .
12. ἑσπέρας γε
: χθές is unnecessary, as the Athenians
counted the interval between two sunsets as one day (Kroschel, referring to
Varro, ap. Gell. Noct. Att. III. 2. 4).
ἐπιψηλαφήσας τοῦ
σκίμποδος
. The σκίμπους was a low stool or bed. According
to a scholiast on Ar.
Clouds, 254, the word means properly a ‘lame
stool’ ( χωλὸν κραββάτιον ) and is
connected with σκιμπάζειν = χωλαίνειν.
ἐπιψηλαφῶ is followed by the accusative where it does not
(as here) contain the idea of search for, e.g. in Rep. II. 360A( ἐπιψηλαφῶντα
τὸν δακτύλιον ).
14. Οἰνόης
. Oenoe
(probably = the Wine-country) was a δῆμος
in the φυλὴ Ἱπποθοωντίς , near Eleutherae,
on the road to Thebes. The slave had endeavoured to escape across the
frontier into Boeotia. There was another δῆμος
of the same name near Marathon, belonging to the φυλὴ
Αἰαντίς .
17. ἐπειδὴ δὲ ἦλθον
.
For this sense of ἔρχομαι (‘come back’)
Heindorf quotes Lysias ὑπὲρ Μαντιθέου § 4 ἀλλ’ ἤλθομεν πρὶν τοὺς
ἀπὸ Φυλῆς εἰς τὸν Πειραιᾶ κατελθεῖν πρότερον πένθ’ ἡμέραις
.
18. ἀδελφός
. So (not ἁδελφός ) the MSS. The article is not
rarely omitted with names denoting relation, as we usually omit it with
‘father’ and ‘mother’. See Kühner's Griechische
Grammatik, 11, 522. The force of
ἔτι is ‘late though it was’. δέ
is commonly omitted after ἔπειτα and εἶτα : so below,
350Dπρῶτον
μὲν γάρ—ἔπειτα ; Symp. 211Aπρῶτον
μὲν
ἀεὶ ὄν—ἔπειτα οὐ τῇ μὲν
καλόν, τῇ δ’ αἰσχρόν.
20. πόρρω τῶν νυκτῶν
.
The plural is idiomatic: cf.
Symp. 217D διελεγόμην ἀεὶ πόρρω τῶν
νυκτῶν ; Ar. Clouds, 2ὦ Ζεῦ
βασιλεῦ τὸ χρῆμα τῶν νυκτῶν ὅσον. So μέσαι νύκτες for ‘midnight’. In quibus loquendi formulis remarks
Heindorf ‘ νύκτες horas nocturnas
denotant’.
21. ὁ ὕπνος ἀνῆκεν
is
modelled on Homer (e.g. Il. II. 71ἐμὲ
δὲ γλυκὺς ὕπνος ἀνῆκεν), but Plato gives a different turn
to ἀνῆκεν by adding ἐκ τοῦ κόπου , where ἐκ is ‘from’, not ‘after’ (as Stallbaum
thinks). Note presently that οὕτω to
introduce the apodosis after participles is especially common in Plato: cf.
below, 314C326D
23. ἀνδρείαν.
ἀνδρεῖοςoccurs in much the same sense
in Meno, 81Dοὐδὲν
κωλύει—τἄλλα πάντα αὐτὸν ἀνευρεῖν, ἐάν τις
ἀνδρεῖος ᾗ καὶ μὴ ἀποκάμνῃ ζητῶν. σοίis emphatic and
should therefore be accented, like σέ in
l. 28.
24. ἀδικεῖ.
ἀδικεῖνis often used of a past injury
because the injury is regarded as continuing till atonement is made: see on Crito, 50C.
27. ἂν αὐτῷ διδῷς ἀργύριον καὶ
πείθῃς ἐκεῖνον
. For the variation of pronouns cf. Euthyphr. 14Dἀλλά
μοι
λέξον τίς αὕτη
ἡ ὑρηπεσία ἐστί τοῖς θεοῖς; αἰτεῖν τε φὴ|ς αὐτοὺς καὶ διδόναι
ἐκείνοις; above, 309B and below, 318C The change is most frequent where
the second pronoun is different in case from the first: cf. Classen on Thuc.
I. 132. 5. Cobet ejects the words καὶ
πείθῃς ἐκεῖνον , but they are supported by the parallel
expression of 311Dἂν
μὲν ἐξικνῆται τὰ ἡμέτερα χρήματα καὶ τούτοις
πείθωμεν
αὐτόν .
28. ὦ Ζεῦ καὶ θεοί
: i.e. καὶ οἱ ἄλλοι θεοί . The exclamation is
common: see Blaydes on Ar.
Plutus, I.
30. οὔτε τῶν φίλων
.
The English idiom would lead us to expect οὔτε
τῶν τῶν φίλων : but in Greek the double article is avoided
by substituting ‘my friends’ for ‘my friends' property’. Analogous is the
usage known as comparatio compendiaria, e.g. κόμαι Χαρίτεσσιν ὁμοῖαι ( Il. XVII. 51), where ‘the Graces’ is put for
‘the Graces' hair’.
ἀλλ’ αὐτὰ ταῦτα
. See on Apol. 23B. ταῦτα
= διὰ ταῦτα is frequent in Plato and
Aristophanes.
34. ὅτε τὸ πρότερον ἐπεδήμησεν
.
Probably about 445 B.C., if the date of action of the dialogue is
433-432. (See Introduction p. xxxiii.) Protagoras went to Thurii in 443
B.C., being charged by Pericles to draw up a code of laws for the new
colony.
38. Καλλίᾳ τῷ Ἱππονίκου
. Callias, son of Hipponicus, belonged to
one of the richest families in Athens (below,
337Dαὐτῆς
τῆς πόλεως—τὸν μέγιστον καὶ ὀλβιώτατον οἶκον
τόνδε ). His devotion to the ‘Sophists’ in general is
remarked upon in Apol. 20Aἀνδρὶ ὃς
τετέλεκε χρήματα σοφισταῖς πλείω ἢ ξύμπαντες
οἱ ἄλλοι, Καλλίᾳ τῷ Ἱππονίκου(cf. Crat. 391B): but he seems to have been
particularly attached to the doctrines of Protagoras: see Theaet. 164Eοὐ γὰρ
ἐγώ, ὦ Σώκρατες, ἀλλὰ μᾶλλον Καλλίας
ὁ Ἱππονίκου τῶν ἐκείνου(i.e. Πρωταγόρου
λόγων ) ἐπίτροπος . One of his
two sons ( Apol. 20A), Protarchus, appears as an
interlocutor in the Philebus. In 393-392 Callias was
associated with Iphicrates in the command of the Athenian forces at Corinth,
and as late as 371 we find him acting as ambassador to Sparta (Xen.
Hell. VI. 4). It appears that he spent all his money and died in
actual want (Athenaeus, XII. 52).
39. μήπω, ὠγαθέ
. The
MSS. have μήπω ἀγαθέ : probably the
archetype had μήπωγαθέ , by a natural
mistake. Cobet rejects ἐκεῖσε ἴωμεν ,
reading μήπω γε , on the ground that with μήπω γε the Greek idiom does not repeat the
verb: but there is no proof that the verb could not be expressed with μήπω (without γε
).
40. δεῦρο ἐξαναστῶμεν εἰς τὴν αὐλήν
. Herwerden needlessly suggests that ἐξαναστάντες should be read, or εἰς τὴν
αὐλήν rejected: εἰς
τὴν αὐλήν goes with ἐξαναστῶμεν
: cf. ἐμὲ δὲ
δεῖ ποι ἐξαναστῆναι in Theages, 129B. δεῦρο we should translate by ‘here’: ‘let
us rise and go out into the court here’. Classic Greek does not admit of τῇδε in such a case: see Cobet's Novae
Lectiones, p. 91.
CHAPTER III
Socrates cross-examines Hippocrates as to his purpose in
putting himself under Protagoras, and elicits from him that his
object is liberal education.
1. ἀναστάντες εἰς τὴν αὐλήν
. For ἀναστάντες
after ἐξαναστῶμεν cf. below, 314C where
ἐπιστάντες is followed by στάντες , 328E
ἐπεκδιδάξει—ἐξεδίδαξεν , 361Cδιεξελθόντας—ἐξελθεῖν ; Phaedo, 104Dἐπὶ τὸ
τοιοῦτον δή, φαμέν, ἡ ἐναντία ἰδέα ἐκείνῃ τῇ
μοπφῇ, ἣ ἂν τοῦτο ἀρεπγάζηται, οὐδέροτ’ ἂν ἔλθοι—εἰπγάζετο δέ
γε ἡ περιττή; Euthyd.281C οὐκ ἐλάττω πράττων ἐλάττω ἂν
ἐξαμαρτάνοι, ἐλάττω δὲ ἁμαρτάνων ἦττον ἂν κακῶς πράττοι and Rep. I. 336E; Phaedo, 59B; Crito, 44D; Crat. 399A-B.
2.
ἀποπειρώμενος—διεσκόπουν.
ῥώμηof strength of will and resolution
(cf. ἀνδρεία above
310D as in Polit. 259C πρὸς
τὴν τῆς ψυχῆς σύνεσιν καὶ ῥώμην. γνώμης , the suggestion of
Hoenebeek, would be much less forcible and exact.
6. ὥσπερ ἂν εἰ κτλ.
ἄνgoes with
ἀπεκρίνω in l. II. The application of the similes follows in D,
and each illustration contains two subordinate protases, viz. (in B) (1) εἰ ἐπενόεις—
ἐκείνῳ , (2) εἴ τίς σε ἤρετο
, and (in C) (1) εἰ δὲ—ἐκείνοις , (2) εἴ τίς
σε ἤρετο . With this multiplication of protases Heindorf
compares Meno, 74Bμανθάνεις
γάρ
που ὅτι οὑτωσὶ ἔχει περὶ παντός·
εἴ τίς σε ἀνέποιτο τοῦτο ὃ νῦν δὴ ἐγὼ ἔλεγον, τί ἐστι σχῆμα, ὦ
Μένων; εἰ αὐτῷ εἶρες ὅτι στπογγυλότης, εἴ σοι εἶρεν ἅρεπ ἐγώ,
ρότεπον σχῆμα ἡ στπογγυλότης ἐστὶν ἢ σχῆμά τι; εἶρες δή ρου ἂν
ὅτι σχῆμά τι. The reasoning from analogy is quite in
Socrates' style: see for example Gorg. 448Bff.
7. ‘Ιπποκράτη—τὸν τῶν’
Ασκληπιαδῶν
. It is unnecessary (with Naber)
to bracket
Ἱπποκράτη . Hippocrates, the founder of medical science,
born about 460 B.C. in Cos, was at the height of his renown about the year
400. He is referred to also in Phaedrus, 270C ( εἰ μὲν οὖν Ἱπποκράτει γε τῷ τῶν
Ἀσκληπιαδῶν δεῖ τι
πείθεσθαι ) as holding the view that the human body could
not be Compare Ar.
Peace, 383εἰπέ μοι τί πάσχετ’
ὦνδρες; Pl. Euthyd. 283B εἰπέ μοι, ἔφη, ὦ Σώκρατές τε καὶ ὑμεῖς οἱ ἄλλοι
. The exhortation or command is in general primarily addressed to one man:
contrast, however, below, 330B and Lach. 186Eσὺ δ’, ὦ
Λάχης
καὶ Νικία, εἴπετον ἡμῖν ἑκάτερος.
28. ἄλλο γε
, i.e. other
than the name ‘Protagoras’. It is more in accordance with Plato's usage to
make the first question end with the first ἀκούομεν
, and regard the ὥσπερ clause as
introducing the second question τί τοιοῦτον περὶ
Πρωταγόρου
ἀκούομεν; This second question is
rejected by Cobet as spurious, but the punctuation which we have adopted
seems to remove the difficulty. The ὥσπερ
clause defines in advance the meaning of
τοιοῦτον : for this and for the asyndeton compare
Sophist. 258B-C πότερον οὖν—δεῖ
θαρροῦντα ἤδη λέγειν ὅτι τὸ μὴ ὂν
βεβαίως ἐστὶ τὴν αὑτοῦ φύσιν ἔχον; ὥσρεπ τὸ μέγα ἦν μέγα καὶ τὸ
καλὸν ἦν καλὸν καὶ τὸ μὴ μέγα μὴ μέγα καὶ τὸ μὴ καλὸν μὴ καλόν,
οὕτω δὲ καὶ τὸ μὴ ὂν κατὰ ταὐτὸν ἦν τε καὶ ἔστι μὴ ὄν, ἐνάπιθμον
τῶν
πολλῶν ὄντων εἶδος ἕν; Crat.394A B; Theaet. 172Dwith Heindorf's note. See also 330Aὥσπερ τὰ
τοῦ
προσώπου , where the same punctuation should be adopted.
In l. 31 the MSS. read ἠκούομεν by mistake
for ἀκούομεν .
31. σοφιστήν—εἶναι
.
On σοφιστής see below, note on 312Cγε
implies that Protagoras may be a sophist only in name. εἶναι is frequently used with verbs of
naming: cf. Lach. 192Aὃ ἐν
πᾶσιν ὀνομάζεις ταχυτῆτα εἶναι. Cobet's suggestion to read εἶεν,
ἔφην, ὡς for εἶναι, ἔφη. ὡς
is ingenious but needless.
36. ὑπέφαινέν τι ἡμέρας.
ὑποφαίνει ἡμέραis used, as Heindorf
says, de die illucescente. Here τι
ἡμέρας = ‘something of day’, ‘some daylight’.
37. εἰ μέν τι—ἔοικεν
.
Heindorf remarks that Stephanus' conjecture τοῦτο
ἔοικεν is needless, the vague indefinite subject being frequently
omitted. Cf. Crat. 387Dεἴπερ τι
τοῖς ἔμπροσθεν
μέλλει ὁμολογούμενον εἶναι; Phaedo, 99Eἴσως
μὲν
οὖν ὧ? εἰκάζω
τρόπον τινὰ οὐκ ἔοικεν.
39. εἰς τοὑς Ἕλληνας σαυτόν.
εἰς τοὺς Ἕλληναςgoes with παρέχων : cf. Symp. 179Bἱκανὴν
μαρτυρίαν παρέχεται—εἰς τοὺς
Ἕλληνας. Young men of fashion were fond of looking to
Greek, as opposed to Athenian, public opinion. The MSS. have αὑτόν , but the use of the third personal
reflexive pronoun for the first and second in the singular number does not
seem to be certain in Plato; and it is simplest to suppose that ς fell out after
Ἕλληνας : Schanz, VII, xii.
41. ἀλλ’ ἄρα—μὴ οὐ τοιαύτην.
οὐgoes closely with
τοιαύτην , and μή is
virtually ‘perhaps’ (originally ‘lest’ as in ὅρα
μήTheaet. 145B): ‘but perhaps after all ( ἄρα ) this is not the kind of learning
which etc.’ Cf. Euthyd. 290Eἀλλ’
ἄρα—μὴ ὁ
Κτήσιππος ἦν ὁ ταῦτ’ εἰπώνand Apol. 25Aἀλλ’
ἄρα—μὴ
οἱ ἐν
τῇ ἐκκλησία?, οἱ ἐκκλησιασταί, διαφθείρουσι τοὺς νεωτέρους
; Meno, 89C μὴ τοῦτο οὐ
καλῶς ὡμολογήσαμεν . In all of these passages it is better
to take μή in this way than as equivalent
to Latin num. From this use of
μή grew up the use of μήποτε =
‘perhaps’, frequent in Aristotle and later, e.g. Eth. Nic. X.
2. 1173 a . 22 μή ποτ’ οὐ
λέγουσιν το αἴτιον .
43. οἵαπερ ἡ παρἀ
is
the reading of T: B has οἵα περὶ . The γραμματισταί of Athens were schoolmasters,
who besides teaching reading and writing (cf. below, 326D translated ( ἑρμηνεύειν ) Homer and interpreted his γλῶτται . They were distinct from the γραμματικοί or
κριτικοί who pursued more scientific literary and grammatical
studies. The κιθαριστής and γραμματιστής between them taught μουσική , and the παιδοτρίβης
γυμναστική ; and μουσική and γυμναστική were the two parts of παιδεία or liberal education: Rep. II. 376E.
45. ἐπὶ τέχνῃ—ἀλλ’ ἐπὶ παιδείᾳ
: cf. 315Aἐπὶ
τέχνῃ
μανθάνει, ὡς σοφιστὴς ἐσόμενος . The distinction between
professional and liberal ( ὡς τὸν
ἰδιώτην καὶ
τὸν ἐλεύθερον πρέπει ) education is frequently emphasised
by Plato (see especially Laws, I. 643D): his word for the latter is
always παιδεία , cf. Gorg. 485A, Rep. VI. 492C. The ‘arts’ are throughout the
Republic looked on as βάναυσοι ,
and unfit for men whose souls are free.
CHAPTER IV
Socrates continues his cross-examination, and reduces Hippocrates to ἀπορία .
3. παρασχεῖν θεραπεῦσαι ἀνδρἱ
σοφιστῇ
. The word
παρέχω is often used of putting oneself in the hands of a doctor:
cf. Gorg. 456Bφάρμακον
πιεῖν ἢ τεμεῖν ἢ καῦσαι παρασχεῖν τῶ?
ἰατρῷ. ἀνήρis regularly used (mostly in a complimentary
sense, real or feigned) with words which denote one's profession, standing
or the like, e.g. ἀνὴρ
μάντις, ἀνὴρ
νομεύς, ἄνδρες
δικασταί ; cf. Euthyphr. 15D. For
παρασχεῖν Cobet reads παρέχειν ,
but if MSS. can be trusted, Plato used the aorist infinitive with μέλλω tolerably often: see Schanz, Preface
to Symposium, p. vii.
6. οὔτ’ εἰ ἀγαθῷ οὔτ’ εἰ κακῷ
πράγματι
. So in Gorgias 520B οὐκ ἐγχωρεῖν
μέμφεσθαι τούτῳ τῷ πράγματι (their pupils) ὃ
αὐτοὶ παιδεύουσιν . Here Socrates uses the most general
form of expression because ex hypothesi nothing is yet
known as to the sophist: cf. below, 330Cἡ
δικαιοσύνη πρᾶγμά τί ἐστιν ἢ οὐδὲν
πρᾶγμα; Cases like Crito, 53Dοὐκ οἴει
ἄσχημον ἂν φανεῖσθαι τὸ
τοῦ Σωκράτους πρᾶγμα;are somewhat
different and contain a slight admixture of contempt: see the Editor's note in loc.
7. οἶμαί γ’ εἰδέναι
.
Hippocrates οἴεται
εἰδέναι μὴ εἰδώς : he is thus, according to Socrates, in
the worst of all states: cf.
Apol. ch. VI ff. Socrates now proceeds to convict him of
ignorance.
8. ὥσπερ τοὔνομα λέγει—τῶν
σοφῶν ἐπιστήμονα
. Hippocrates derives σοφιστής from
σοφός and ( ἐπ ) ίστ ( αμαι
) ‘quasi sit ὁ τῶν σοφῶν ἴστης ’
(Heindorf, comparing the derivation of Ἥφαιστος
in Crat. 407Cfrom Φάεος
ἵστωρ ). The correct derivation is perhaps given by Suidas s.v.: σοφιστὴς καὶ ὁ
διδάσκαλος ὡς σοφίζων (cf.
σωφρονίζω =make σώφρων ), but ‐ίζω is very elastic in meaning, and σοφίζω may very well mean ‘play the σοφός ’.
12. τῶν τί σοφῶν.
τῶν πρὸς τί σοφῶνwould be more
precise, but the accusative of reference is preferred for brevity. For the
construction Kroschel compares Theages, 125C τῶν τί σοφῶν
συνουσίᾳ φὴ|ς σοφοὺς εἶναι τοὺς τυράννους , where,
however, σοφῶν is masculine.
The neuter of σοφός is not here used
ironically as in Theaet. 157Cπαρατίθημι
ἑκάστων τῶν σοφῶν ἀπογεύσασθαι.
15. ὁ δὲ σοφιστὴς τῶν τί σοφῶν ἐστιν
. Heusde suggested
ἐπιστήμων after ἐστιν , but the
sense can be supplied out of the ‐ιστής of σοφιστής , according to the derivation of
the word just given: the full sense is as it were ὁ
δὲ σοφιστὴς τῶν τί σοφῶν ἐστιν ( σοφ
) ιστής .
16. τί ἂν ἀποκρινοίμεθα αὐτῷ
. There is no need to change the verb to
ἀποκριναίμεθα , as was done by Bekker to suit ἔροιτο : cf. below, 354Aεἰ
ἐροίμεθα—φαῖεν ἄν and Phaedr. 259Aεἰ οὖν
ἴδοιεν—δικαίως ἂν καταγελῷεν.
17. ποίας ἐργασίας ἐπιστάτης
. These words are not of course part of
the imaginary questioner's interrogation, but are spoken by Socrates to help
out Hippocrates' answer. Socrates suggests that Hippocrates should say that
the sophist is ἐπιστάτης of some sort of ἐργασία , but in order that the answer
should come from Hippocrates himself, he substitutes for the desired answer:
‘(The sophist is) ἐπιστάτης —of what kind
of ἐργασία ?’ Hippocrates then replies by
explaining the
ἐργασία , viz. τὸ
ποιῆσαι δεινὸν λέγειν . The full grammatical construction
would be ποίας ἐργασίας ἐπιστάτης ( ὅτι ἐστὶν ἀποκριναίμεθα ἂν αὐτῷ ) ; If we take this view, it is not necessary to
insert ἐστίν after
ἐπιστάτης (with Hirschig).
Note that ἐπιστάτης is substituted here for ἐπιστήμων : it is clear from Crito, 47B, that Plato connected the two words—
probably because both contain the syllable ‐ιστ‐
as in ἵστωρ : he frequently plays on the
similarity of form between ἐπίσταμαι
ἐπιστήμη and ἐπιστατεῖν :
see the Editor's note on ἐπιστάτῃ καὶ
ἐπαΐοντι in the
Crito, loc. cit.
17. τί ἂν εἴποιμεν—ὦ Σώκρατες
; Hippocrates is on the verge of ἀπορία , and merely throws out his
suggestion ἐπιστάτην
τοῦ ποιῆσαι δεινὸν λέγειν for what it is worth. The words ἐπιστάτην τοῦ ποιῆσαι δεινὸν λέγειν are
strictly speaking a reply to the question of Socrates ποίας ἐργασίας ἐπιστάτης ; for τοῦ
ποιῆσαι δεινὸν λέγειν answers ποίας
ἐργασίας , and but for the intervening clause ( τί ἂν εἴποιμεν αὐτὸν εἶναι;
) the word ἐπιστάτην would have been in
the nominative.
Thus explained, the MSS. reading need not be changed. The next best view is
to read (with Schanz) τί ἂν <εἰ>
εἴποιμεν
αὐτὸν εἶναι, ὦ Σώκρατες, ἐπιστάτην τοῦ ποιῆσαι δεινὸν λέγειν;
22. ὥσπερ ὁ κιθαριστὴς κτλ.
Cf. Gorg. 449Eand 451A ff., where
much the same reasoning is employed to discover τί
ἐστι
τοῦτο τῶν ὄντων, περὶ οὗ οὗτοι οἱ λόγοι εἰσίν, οἷς ἡ ῥητορικὴ
χρῆται ( Gorg. 451D). Rhetoric and Sophistic were
regarded by Plato as sisters: cf. Gorg. 464Bff. The clause ὥσπερ ὁ κιθαριστὴς κτλ. is logically the
protasis to εἶεν· ὁ δὲ δὴ σοφιστὴς κτλ. :
see on 311E above.
24. εἶεν· ὁ δὲ δὴ σοφιστής
. For εἶεν
and δὲ
δή see on 311C above.
25. δῆλον ὅτι περὶ οὗπερ καὶ
ἐπίστασθαι
. Stahl's emendation ( ἐπίστασθαι for
ἐπίσταται ), which had occurred to us independently, seems to be
certain. Most editions read ἢ δῆλον ὅτι
περὶ οὗπερ καὶ ἐπίσταται; inserting ἤ before δῆλον
(with Heindorf) and giving the words to Socrates, but it is surely more
natural to regard them as giving Hippocrates' reply to Socrates' question,
in which case δῆλον ὅτι is right. The MS.
reading ἐπίσταται gives a non
sequitur ; for the harpist makes one δεινὸς
λέγειν περὶ οὖπερ καὶ ἐπιστήμονα i.e. περὶ
οὖπερ καὶ ἐπίστασθαι , not περὶ οὗπερ
καὶ ἐπιστήμων‐ἐστὶν i.q. ἐπίσταται
. The next sentence τί δή ἐστι τοῦτο, περὶ οὗ
αὐτός τε ἐπιστήμων ἐστὶν ὁ
σοφιστὴς καὶ
τὸν μαθητὴν ποιεῖ (sc.
ἐπίστασθαι ); in no way invalidates the reading ἐπίστασθαι : it is everywhere assumed in the Platonic writings that he who makes
others know has knowledge himself: see for example Alcib.
I, 111B οὐκ οἶσθ’ ὅτι χρὴ τοὺς
μέλλοντας
διδάσκειν ὁτιοῦν αὐτοὺς πρῶτον εἰδέναι; ἢ οὔ; πῶς γὰρ οὔ; and ibid. 113C, 118C.
27. οὐκέτι
. See below on οὐκέτι in 321D
CHAPTER V
Socrates points out that Hippocrates is running a grave risk in
submitting himself to one of the ‘Sophists’ without knowing
what ‘Sophist’ means.
2. ἢ εἰ μὲν τὸ σῶμα κτλ.
For ἤ cf. Crito, 50Eἢ πρὸς
μὲν
ἄπα σοι τὸν ρατέπα—ρπὸς δὲ τὴν ρατπίδα ἄπα καὶ τοὺς νόμους ἔσται
σοι; and for the general form of the sentence Apol. 28Eεἰ ὅτε
μέν—τότε μέν—τοῦ δὲ θεοῦ τάττοντος—ἐνταῦθα δέ, Meno, 94C-D, Gorg. 512A: see the Editor's note on Apol.
loc. cit.
4. πολλὰ ἂν περιεσκέψω
: but ἔδει
in l. 3 and παρεκάλεις in 6.
The effect is to represent the process of reflection by oneself as prior to
consultation with friends. Heindorf on Gorg. 514Dquotes a parallel from the
Theaetetus (144E): ἀτὰρ εἰ, νῷν
ἐχόντοιν ἑκατέπου λύπαν, ἔφη αὐτὰς ἡπμόσθαι ὁμοίως, ρότεπον
εὐθὺς ἂν ἐπιστεύομεν ἢ ἐπεσκεψάμεθα ἂν (i.e. should have
inquired first ) εἰ
μουσικὸς ὢν λέγοι;
8. τὴν ψυχήν
. Cf.
(with Heindorf) Rep. IX. 583Eὃ
μεταξὺ
ἄπα νῦν δὴ ἀμφοτέπων ἔφαμεν εἶναι, τὴν ἡσυχίαν, τοῦτό ροτε
ἀμφότερα ἔσται. ἐν ᾧpresently is like ἐν
τούτῳ in 310D where see
note: Heindorf cites Eur. Iph. T. 1057 καὶ τἄμ’ ἐν ὑμῖν ἐστιν ἢ
καλῶς ἔχειν ἢ μηδὲν εἶναι . For καὶ
ἐν ᾧ we should at first sight expect καὶ
ἐν αὐτῷ : for the Greek idiom is relative+anaphoric
pronoun, not relative+relative, when the two pronouns have the same
antecedent and are connected by a conjunction: e.g. Gorg. 452Dτί ἐστι
τοῦτο ὃ φὴ|ς σὺ μέγιστον ἀγαθὸν εἶναι—καὶ σὲ
δημιουργὸν εἶναι αὐτοῦ: see the Editor's note on Apol. 40A. Here, however, the fact that the
relative precedes its antecedent ( ὃ δὲ
περὶ πλείονος—περὶ δὲ τούτου ) makes the rule inoperative;
and there are other exceptions, e.g. Rep. II. 374Bκαὶ
τῶν
ἄλλων ἑνὶ
ἑκάστῳ ὡσαύτως ἓν ἀρεδίδομεν, ρπὸς ὃ ρεφύκει ἕκαστος καὶ ἐφ’ ᾧ
ἔμελλε τῶν ἄλλων σχολὴν ἄγων διὰ βίου αὐτὸ ἐπγαζόμενος—καλῶς
ἀπεργάζεσθαι, and Theaet. 192Bκαὶ ὃ
οἶδεν καὶ ὃ αἰσθάνεται(where, however, Bonitz rejects the
second ὅ , perhaps rightly).
12. τῷ ἀφικομένῳ τούτῳ ξένῳ
. Heindorf's suggestion τῷ
ἀφικομένῳ τούτῳ τῷ ξένῳ would convey a somewhat different meaning,
viz. ‘this arrival, the foreigner’. The presence of
ἀφικομένῳ renders the article after τούτῳ
unnecessary: cf. below, 337Eτὸ
ἀκριβὲς
τοῦτο εἶδος . There is some contempt in τούτῳ = isti (see note
on Apol. 45A), and much scorn in τὴν σὴν ψυχήν , repeated slowly at the end
of the clause.
13. ὄρθριος
: the MSS.
have ὄρθριον by mistake. The adjectival
construction of this word is found in Laws, XII. 961B δεῖν δὲ ὄρθριον εἶναι τὸν σύλλογον .
18. γιγνώσκεις
. The
present is regularly used of being acquainted with a person, e.g. Phaedo, 60AΞανθίππην,
γιγνώσκεις γάρ; Theaet. 144Cἀλλὰ
σκόπει εἰ γιγνώσκεις αὐτόν. γιγνώσκω. In Plato the perfect
is generally used of knowing things : e.g. Apol. 23Bὅστις—ἔγνωκεν
ὅτι κτλ., Euthyphr. 2Cτοσοῦτον
πρᾶγμα ἐγνωκέναι.
οὔτε διείλεξαι οὐδεπώποτε
, sc. αὐτῷ : cf. on
313A l. 8 above.
20. ᾧ μέλλεις σαυτὸν ἐπιτρέπειν
is wrongly rejected by Cobet. The words are
to be taken closely with τὸν δὲ σοφιστὴν ὅ
τί ποτ’ ἔστιν φαίνει ἀγνοῶν : that Hippocrates should
entrust himself to that of which he knows nothing is the climax of Socrates'
rebuke.
21. ἔοικεν
: sc. εἶναι , i.e. be true (not ἐμὲ ἀγνοεῖν , which is doubtful Greek for ἔοικα ἀγνοεῖν ). The subject is simply
‘it’, as in Rep. I. 333C, where
ἔοικεν is similarly for ἔοικεν
εἶναι .
23. τυγχάνει ὢν—ψυχὴ
τρέφεται.
τυγχάνει ὤνis virtually equivalent to
‘really is’: cf. Gorg. 468Dοἰόμενος
ἄμεινον εἶναι
αὐτῷ, τυγχάνει δὲ ὂν κάκιον, and note on Euthyphr. 4E. The
ἔμπορος is a travelling merchant who trades on a larger scale than
the retail dealer or κάπηλος : see Rep. II. 371Dἢ οὐ
καπήλους
καλοῦμεν τοὺς ρπὸς ὠνήν τε καὶ ρπᾶσιν διακονοῦντας ἱδπυμένους ἐν
ἀγορᾷ, τοὺς δὲ πλανήτας ἐπὶ τὰς πόλεις ἐμπόρους
;The same account of the Sophist as ἔμπορός
τις περὶ τὰ τῆς ψυχῆς μαθήματα ( Soph. 231E) is given in Soph. 223C-224E.
24. φαίνεται γὰρ ἔμοιγε τοιοῦτός
τις
. We follow Schleiermacher in giving these
words to Socrates. Turner judiciously points out that γε in ἔμοιγε
is only appropriate if Socrates speaks the words, and that Hippocrates could
hardly assent till he knew what τροφὴ
ψυχῆς meant.
26. ὅπως γε μὴ—ἐπαινῶν ἃ πωλεῖ
ἐξαπατήσει.
πωλεῖνis ‘to have on sale’: ‘to sell’
is ἀποδίδοσθαι . Cobet, Novae
Lectiones, p. 159. For ἐξαπατήσει the
MSS. have ἐξαπατήσῃ , but the 1st aor.
conj. is very doubtful in Plato after ὅπως
μή (see on the whole question Kühner's Griechische
Grammatik, II, 899), and final ‐ῃ
and ‐ει are frequently confused in the
MSS.
28. ὁ ἔμπορός τε καὶ κάπηλος.
ἔμπορός τε καὶ κάπηλοςtogether make a
plural, and according to strict logic would require a plural article; but ὁ is written by attraction instead of the
grammatically impossible οἱ . Cf. Symp. 186Cὁ
διαγιγνώσκων
—τὸν καλόν τε καὶ αἰσχρὸν ἔρωτα; below, 355Eτά
ὀνόματα—τὸ
ἡδύ τε καὶ ἀνιαρόν .
40. τυγχάνεις ἐπιστήμων.
τυγχάνειςhas sunk to a mere copula. It
is not necessary to insert ὤν after ἐπιστήμων , although it is only in a few
cases that τυγχάνω (in this sense) occurs
in Plato's MSS. without the participle expressed, viz.
Phaedr. 263C μέγιστον τῶν ἀγαθῶν
τυγχάνει ; Gorg. 502Bεἰ δέ τι
τυγχάνει
ἀηδὲς καὶ ὠφέλιμον; Rep. II. 369Bτυγχάνει
ἡμῶν ἕκαστος οὐκ
αὐτάρκης ἀλλὰ πολλῶν ἐνδεής; Alc. I, 129A ῥᾴδιον τυγχάνει τὸ
γνῶναι ἑαυτόν ; ibid. 133A ἐκεῖνο ᾧ τοῦτο τυγχάνει ὅμοιον . In these
cases (as here in the Protagoras ) it is easy to suppose that
the participle has fallen out from ‘lipography’: but in Hipp.
Maior (perhaps pseudo-Platonic),
300A and in Laws, XI. 918C, and Timaeus,
61C, the participle cannot be so easily supplied: and that the construction
without the participle was used in everyday speech appears from Ar. Eccl. 1141καὶ τῶν θεατῶν εἴ τις
εὔνους τυγχάνει. See Rutherford's New
Phrynichus, p. 342.
43. περὶ τοῖς φιλτάτοις.
τὰ φίλταταis used here of the soul's
health as in Gorg. 513Aσὺν τοῖς
φιλτάτοις ἡ αἵρεσις ἡμῖν ἔσται
ταύτης τῆς δυνάμεως τῆς ἐν τῇ πόλει.
47. παρὰ τοῦ καπήλου καὶ ἐμπόρου
: so B. The
κάπηλος is put in the foreground as the most usual seller
of σιτία and ποτά
: the article is expressed only once, because the
κάπηλος and
ἔμπορος both belong to the same genus ‘merchants’: cf. Hdt. IV.
71τὸν οἰνοχόον καὶ μάγειρον καὶ
ἱπποκόμον καὶ διήκονον καὶ
ἀγγελιηφόρον κτλ. There is no sufficient ground for
bracketing the words παρὰ τοῦ
καπήλου καὶ ἐμπόρου as is done by Schanz, nor for reading παρά του (with T) and omitting καπήλου καὶ
ἐμπόρου , as Hermann did.
ἐν ἄλλοις ἀγγείοις
: i.e. other than our own
bodies. Cf. 311Eτί ὄνομα ἄλλο γε λεγόμενον περὶ Πρωταγόρου
ἀκούομεν; It need not be implied that
the body is itself an ἀγγεῖον (viz. of
soul), though the notion is not unplatonic, and kindred expressions are
found in later philosophy, e.g. Marcus Aurel. X. 38 τὸ
περικείμενον ἀγγειῶδες καὶ τὰ ὀργάνια ταῦτα τὰ περιπεπλασμένα
(said of the body).
54. ἐν αὐτῇ τῇ ψυχῇ λαβόντα καὶ
μαθόντα.
λαμβάνειν ἐν(not
εἰς ) as in Rep. VII. 517Aεἴ
πως
ἐν ταῖς χερσὶ δύναιντο
λαβεῖν; Soph. 243Cταὐτὸν
τοῦτο
πάθος εἰληφότες ἐν τῇ ψυχῇ. For καὶ
μαθόντα , which is explanatory of ἐν
αὐτῇ τῇ ψυχῇ λαβόντα , see note on κυβεύῃς
τε καὶ κινδυνεύῃς .
57. νέοι ὥστε τοσοῦτον
. Heindorf quotes Eur. Andr.
80 γέρων
ἐκεῖνος ὥστε σ’ ὠφελεῖν παρών , and points out that
whereas νεώτεροι ἢ ὥστε would deny
altogether ἡ τοῦ διελέσθαι δύναμις , the
words νέοι ὥστε are less strong; nobis nonnisi iuvenilis
quaedam facultas suppetit ad tantam rem diiudicandam . The
best MSS. of Plato read ταὐτόν, τοιοῦτον,
τοσοῦτον , etc., in the great majority of cases rather
than ταὐτό , etc. Schanz (Preface to
Laws, p. vi) thinks it probable that Plato always used the forms in ‐ν . In inscriptions of Plato's time τὸ αὐτό and τὸ
αὐτόν occur side by side, but apparently only τοιοῦτον, τοσοῦτον . See Meisterhans, Grammatik
der Griechischen Inschriften2 , p. 122.
61. Ἱππίας
. Hippias of
Elis was one of the most accomplished and—if we may trust the Platonic
writings—ostentatious of the Sophists. According to the Hippias
Maior (285B ff.) he claimed to be at home in all the
learning of the day—in Astronomy, Geometry, Arithmetic, Philology, Music,
Mythology, History and Archaeology. See Zeller's Philosophie der
Griechen, I 4 , 956 ff.
62. οἶμαι δὲ καὶ Πρόδικον τὸν Κεῖον
. Contrast Crat. 402Bοἶμαι δὲ
καὶ
Ἡσίοδος. Either construction is admissible. Prodicus of
Ceos is repeatedly mentioned in the Platonic writings. A fellow-citizen of
the poet Simonides (below,
339E , he professed like Gorgias and Hippias to educate young
men ( Apol. 19E, Theages,
127E, Rep. X. 600C) and received very large sums in
return for his instruction together with the gratitude of his pupils. On one
occasion, when in charge of a political mission from Ceos, he is said to
have won great reputation in the βουλή at
Athens for his conduct of public business, and to have given at the same
time private lectures, which were popular and well paid ( Hipp.
Maior, 282C). He laid great stress on the importance of
using words in their correct sense ( ὀρθότης
ὀνομάτων ): see below, 337A358A and Euthyd. 277E, Charm. 163D,
Lach. 197D; cf. also Phaedr. 267B; but this was only taught (we are
told) in his 50-drachma lecture; the impecunious Socrates had only paid one
drachma and was not quite master of this subject ( Crat. 384B). Socrates is fond of professing
himself a pupil of Prodicus, e.g. below, 341AMeno, 96D, Charm. 163D.
Prodicus wrote eulogies of Heracles and others ( Symp. 177B): the substance, if not the actual
words, of his Apologue of Heracles at the cross-roads is given by Xenophon,
Mem. II. 1. 21. A scholiast on Rep. X. 600Csays the Athenians put him to
death by hemlock for corrupting the youth, but there is no other authority
for this unlikely story. Cf. Zeller, I 4 , 952 ff.
CHAPTER VI
Socrates and Hippocrates proceed together to Callias' house.
1. δόξαν ἡμῖν ταῦτα
. This
idiom seems not to occur elsewhere in Plato. We can hardly supply ποιεῖν : rather δόξαν
ταῦτα is like δόξαντα ταῦτα , an
accusative absolute, the singular verb being kept as in ἔδοξε
ταῦτα . See Goodwin's Moods
and
Tenses (1889), p. 339, § 854.
2. προθύρῳ
. The rooms of a
Greek house opened on the cloisters surrounding the
αὐλή or court: from the
αὐλή a passage ( θυρωρεῖον ,
so called because the porter's lodge was situated in it) led into the πρόθυρον or space in front of the main door ( αὔλειος
θύρα or αὐλεία without θύρα ). Blümner, Griechische
Privatalterthümer, pp. 147 ff.
ἐπιστάντες διελεγόμεθα
. The situation recalls Symp. 175Aff., where Socrates, on his way to
Agathon's house, is discovered standing wrapt in thought in front of a
neighbouring house.
4. οὕτως ἐσίοιμεν.
οὕτωςwith the apodosis after participles
is extremely common in Plato: see above on 310D
5. στάντες
. For the dropping of
the preposition after ἐπιστάντες
see on 311A The Bodleian has ἐστάντες , but T
στάντες : Schanz reads ἐπιστάντες ,
Cobet ἑστῶτες . Tr. ‘we came to a stand and
conversed’.
6. δοκεῖ οὖν μοι
. Cf. Phaedo, 108Dὁ βίος μοι
δοκεῖ ὁ ἐμὸς—
τῷ μήκει τοῦ λόγου οὐκ ἐξαρκεῖ: the construction is fairly
common in Plato: see on Crito, 43D. To have a eunuch for porter was rare,
and a mark of wealth: they were supposed to be more trustworthy than others and
fetched a higher price in the East ( Hdt.
VIII. 105 ).
7. κινδυνεύει—ἄχθεσθαι
. Present, because the dialogue is
narrated just after it took place (see 309B
, and as Protagoras is still with Callias, the stream of visitors probably
continues. It is not quite clear why the number of the
sophists should have made the porter annoyed with the
visitors, unless the visitors themselves were sophists. Probably
therefore τοῖς
φοιτῶσιν means τοῖς
φοιτῶσιν σοφισταῖς : in the porter's judgement the house
was already too full of sophists. φοιτᾶν
implies frequent visitation: cf. Lach. 181Cχρῆν μὲν
οὖν
καὶ πρότερόν σε φοιτᾶν
αὐτὸν παρ’ ἡμᾶς καὶ οἰκείους ἡγεῖσθαι.
9. ἐκρούσαμεν τὴν θύραν
. There was a metal knocker ( ῥόπτρον, κόραξ,
ἐπίσπαστρον ) on the αὔλειος
θύρα . Blümner, Gr.
Privatalt. p. 149.
10. οὐ σχολὴ αὐτῷ
. For αὐτῷ ‘the master’ cf. below, 315BRep. I. 327Bἠρόμην
ὅπου αὐτὸς εἴη, and the Pythagorean αὐτὸς
ἔφαipse dixit .
11. ἀμφοῖν τοῖν χεροῖν
. So B: T has
ταῖν for τοῖν . Cobet
has shown that the dual feminine of the article is the same as the dual
masculine: Variae
Lectiones, p. 70.
13. ἐκρούομεν
, but ἐκρούσαμεν in l. 9. Socrates pretends to be
somewhat staggered by the rebuff.
ἐγκεκλῃμένης
. So Bekker for ἐγκεκλειμένης of B: the Attic form is κλῄω not κλείω
: Cobet, Var. Lect. p. 159.
18. ἅνθρωπος
. According
to Ast, the Greeks sometimes used ἀνήρ and ἄνθρωπος without the article of a definite
person sed
ita ut vel contemptionem vel reprehensionem aliquam simul
indicarent . But in the cases quoted in support of this
usage where the word is in an oblique case, the meaning is quite
general like the English ‘a man’, e.g. Rep. X. 596Cδεινόν
τινα
λέγεις καὶ θαυμαστὸν ἄνδρα; Phaedo, 98Bὁρῶ
ἄνδρα
τῷ μὲν νῷ
οὐδὲν χρώμενον; Soph. Phil. 1228 ἀπάταισιν αἰσχραῖς ἄνδρα καὶ
δόλοις ἑλών ; Theaet. 155Dἐάν
σοι
ἀνδρός, μᾶλλον δὲ ἀνδρῶν
ὀνομαστῶντῆς διανοίας τὴν ἀλήθειαν—συνεξερευνήσωμαι: it is
therefore safer to suppose (with Schanz and most Platonic scholars) that
where ἀνήρ and
ἄνθρωπος of the MSS. can only be translated by ‘the man’, the
rough breathing should be restored: e.g. below,
315E and Phaedr. 267A, 268C; Rep. I. 331E.
20. προστῴῳ
. The αὐλή was surrounded by cloisters. This προστῷον is doubtless that on which the
passage from the πρόθυρον opened.
23. Πάραλος—Ἀντίμοιρος
. The mother of Xanthippus and Paralus
had once been the wife of Hipponicus, to whom she bare Callias: Plut.
Pericl. XXIV. 9. In 320A as well
as in Meno, 94BPlato remarks that Pericles was
unable to teach the art of statesmanship to either of his two sons: cf. Alc.
I, 118E τὼ—
Περικλέους υἱέε ἠλιθίω ἐγενέσθην . They both died of the
plague. One of the most interesting fragments of Protagoras describes the
fortitude of Pericles when his sons died: see Appendix 11, p. 221, Frag. 3.
Charmides, son of the elder Glaucon, was Plato's maternal uncle: the
dialogue Charmides is named after him. He was φιλόσοφός τε καὶ πάνυ ποιητικός (
Charm. 155A), and as remarkable for
σωφροσύνη as for personal beauty (
ibid. 157D). He was afterwards one of the Ten, and fell along
with Critias at the battle of Munychia in 404 B.C. (Xen. Hell.
II. 4. 19). Of Philippides and his father Philomelus and Antimoerus of Mende
(on the west coast of the peninsula Pallene) nothing further is known.
28. τούτων—ἐφαίνοντο
. B and T omit
οἵ , which was inserted by Stephanus: Heindorf prefers to
insert ὧν after
λεγομένων . The MSS. reading could only be defended if ἐφαίνοντο could be regarded as
parenthetical = ὡς
ἐφαίνοντο , like δοκεῖ μοι
= ὡς δοκεῖ μοι (see on 314C above), but there seems to be no
authority for such a use of φαίνομαι . It
is hardly to be supposed that in
ἐπακούοντες and ἐπήκοοι
(in B below) there is an allusion to an outer circle of Protagorean
students, deemed unworthy of the subtlest teaching of the master, in spite
of Theaet. 152C, where Socrates is hardly
serious.
30. ἐξ ἑκάστων τῶν πόλεων
. The plural is used as in Theaet. 157Cπαρατίθημι
ἑκάστων τῶν σοφῶν ἀπογεύσασθαιand Rep. X. 601Aχρώματ’
ἄττα ἑκάστων τῶν τεχνῶν.
33. χορῷ
. The tragic chorus
consisted of 15 χορευταί , arranged in 3
rows ( στοῖχοι ) of 5 each, the leader ( κορυφαῖος ) being in the middle of the
first. So here Protagoras occupies the middle of a row of 7. With the
metaphor cf. Theaet. 173Bτοὺς—
τοῦ ἡμετέρου χοροῦand ibid. C λέγωμεν δὴ—περὶ τῶν κορυφαίων ; Phaedr. 246Eff.
34. ηὐλαβοῦντο
. The
MSS. have εὐλαβοῦντο , but in the classic
period εὐ‐ (and
εἰ‐ ) were always augmented in the past tenses, while after 300
B.C. ηὐ‐ does not appear on inscriptions.
See Meisterhans, Gr. der Att. Inschr.2
, p. 136.
CHAPTER VII
The scene in the house of Callias is further described.
1. τὸν δὲ μετ’ εἰσενόησα, ἔφη Ὅμηρος
. Homer, Od.
XI. 601τὸν δὲ μετ’ εἰσενόησα βίην Ἡρακληείην.
The reference is not to be pressed beyond the words quoted: for there is no
special likeness between Homer's Heracles ( δεινὸν
παπταίνων, αἰεὶ
βαλέοντι ἐοικώς 608) and Plato's Hippias, whose situation as
here described is more like that of Minos in Homer, ibid.
569 ff. χρύσεον σκῆπτρον ἔχοντα θεμιστεύοντα
νέκυσσιν, ἥμενον· οἱ δέ
μιν ἀμφὶ δίκας εἴποντο ἄνακτα ἥμενοι ἑσταότες τε κατ’ εὐπυρυλὲς
Ἄιδος δῶ . With ἔφη Ὅμηρος
(‘as Homer said’) cf. Meno, 76Dσύνες ὅ τοι
λέγω,
ἔφη Πίνδαρος.
3. ἐν θρόνῳ—ἐπὶ βάθρων
.
Hippias is depicted as a schoolmaster among his pupils.
Ἐρυξίμαχός τε—Ἄνδρων ὁ
Ἀνδροτίωνος
. Eryximachus and
his father Acumenus were doctors. The former delivers one of the
speeches in the Symposium, defining his art as ἐπιστήμη τῶν τοῦ σώματος ἐρωτικῶν πρὸς πλησμονὴν
καὶ
κένωσιν ( Symp. 186C). Phaedrus, son of Pythocles, of
the deme of Μυρρινοῦς in the tribe Πανδιονίς , also appears in the
Symposium, and gives his name to the dialogue
Phaedrus. Andron, son of Androtion (so T here, and both B
and T in Gorg. 487C—the Ἀριστίωνος of B is therefore a mistake), is
in the Gorgias described as one of those who shared the
view of Callicles, that too much φιλοσοφία
ruined men. His son is believed to have been the orator Androtion.
6. περὶ φύσεως
. The
primary substance which early Greek philosophy sought to discover was called
by them φύσις : see Aristotle, Met.
IV. 4, p. 1014 b . 32 ff. τοῦτον
γὰρ τὸν τρόπον καὶ
τῶν φύσει ὄντων τὰ στοιχεῖά φασιν εἶναι φύσιν, οἱ μὲν ρῦπ, οἱ δὲ
γῆν,
οἱ δ’ ἀέπα, οἱ δ’ ὕδωπ, οἱ δ’ ἄλλο τι τοιοῦτον λέγοντες, οἱ δ’
ἔνια
τούτων, οἱ δὲ πάντα ταῦτα . Thus (among others)
Heraclitus, Anaxagoras, and Empedocles called their books περὶ
φύσεως , i.e. on the substance which gives birth ( φύει ) to all else. By Plato's time the
word had acquired a wider meaning equivalent to ‘de rerum natura’, our
‘Nature’, and it is in this sense that the word is here used.
7. ἀστρονομικὰ ἄττα
. Schanz brackets
ἀστρονομικά , but the word is meant to be taken rather with μετεώρων than with
φύσεως . On Hippias' skill in astronomy cf. Hipp.
Minor,
367Eἦς (sc. ἀστρονομικῆς ) αὖ
σὺ τέχνης ἔτι μᾶλλον ἐπιστήμων οἴει εἶναι ἢ
τῶν ἔμπροσθεν .
10. Τάνταλόν γε
. Od. XI. 582καὶ μὴν
Τάνταλον εἰσεῖδον
κρατέρ’ ἄλγε’ ἔχοντα. Prodicus is compared to Tantalus
because of his physical wretchedness: see Crat. 395Eκαὶ
ἀτεχνῶς
ἔοικεν
ὥσρεπ ἂν εἴ τις βουλόμενος ταλάντατον ὀνομάσαι, ἀροκπυρτόμενος
ὀνομάσειε καὶ εἴροι ἀντ’ ἐκείνου Τάνταλον· τοιοῦτόν τι καὶ τούτῳ τὸ
ὄνομα ἔοικεν ἐκπορίσαι ἡ τύχη τῆς φήμης.
ἐπιδημεῖ γὰρ ἄρα
. Heindorf's correction ἐπιδημεῖ for
ἐπεδήμει seems to be necessary, as Prodicus is still in
Athens. Just so the presential tenses are used in 314Dκινδυνεύει
δὲ—
ἄχθεσθαι and below, l. 14 κατάλυσιν
πεποίηκεν . If the clause is taken as a parenthetical clause
of explanation, there is nothing harsh in the construction: ἦν δὲ ἐν οἰκήματί τινι naturally enough
follows on εἰσεῖδον . For γὰρ ἄρα (a somewhat rare combination)
Heindorf quotes Rep. IV. 438Aπάντες
γὰρ ἄρα τῶν ἀγαθῶν
ἐπιθυμοῦσιν, Symp. 205Bἀφελόντες
γὰρ ἄρα(so T: B has only γάρ
) τοῦ ἔρωτός τι εἶδος ὀνομάζομεν , Laws, III. 698Dσυνάψαντες
γὰρ ἄρα τὰς χεῖρας σαγηνεύσαιεν πᾶσαν τὴν Ἐρετρικήν. γὰρ ἄραalways
introduces something supposed to be known to the person addressed: see 314Bοἶμαι
δὲ καὶ
Πρόδικον τὸν Κεῖον .
17. Παυσανιας
is known
from the Symposium 180C ff. The deme
Κεραμῆς was in the tribe Acamantis. ὡς μὲν
ἐγᾦμαι is to be taken closely with καλόν
τε κἀγαθὸν τὴν φύσιν .
20. τὴν δ’ οὖν ἰδέαν πάνυ καλός
. Cf. Symp. 174Aταῦτα δὴ
ἐκαλλωπισάμην ἵνα καλὸς παρὰ καλὸν(i.e.
Ἀγάθωνα ) ἴω . There is no
ground for reading καλόν for καλός with Stephanus: cf. Lach. 180Eτὰ γὰρ
μειράκια τάδε—διαλενόμενοι.
21. Ἀγάθωνα
. It is at the
poet Agathon's house that the scene of the Symposium is laid.
From his speech in that dialogue 194D ff. we should infer that he had
studied under Prodicus to some purpose. Born about 447 B.C., Agathon was
first successful on the tragic stage at an early age: cf. Symp. 175Eἡ δὲ σὴ
(sc. Ἀγάθωνος σοφία ) λαμπρά τε καὶ πολλὴν ἐπίδοσιν ἔχουσα, ἥ γε παρὰ
σοῦ νέου ὄντος οὕτω σφόδπα ἐξέλαμψε καὶ ἐκφανὴς ἐγένετο ρπώην ἐν
μάρτυσι τῶν Ἑλλήνων πλέον ἢ τρισμυρίοις . He visited the court of
Archelaus about 407 B.C. and died probably about 400. That he was held in
esteem by the Athenians appears from Ar.
Frogs, 83 ff. Ἀγάθων δὲ ποῦ ’σθ’;
ὅπου ’στ’; ἀπολιπών μ’
οἴχεται
ἀγαθὸς
ποιητὴς καὶ ποθεινὸς τοῖς φίλοις . For παιδικὰ Παυσανίου cf. Symp.
193B.
22. τοῦτ’ ἦν τὸ μειράκιον
. So BT: the idiom is like our ‘There was
this young man’. The nearest parallels seem to be Phaedo, 59Bἦν δὲ
καὶ
Κτήσιππος ὁ Παιανιεύςand Rep. X. 615Dἦσαν
δὲ
καὶ ἰδιῶταί τινες. τοῦτό τε δή(Ast), τοῦτό
τ’ οὖν (Heindorf), τοῦτ’ ἔνδον
ἦν (Schirlitz), have been suggested, while Kroschel
rejects the words, but the text is probably sound.
23. τὼ Ἀδειμάντω
.
Adimantus son of Cepis is not elsewhere named. The son of Leucolophidas was
afterwards στρατηγός under Alcibiades,
whose policy he supported (Xen. Hell. I. 4. 21): he was taken
prisoner at the battle of Aegospotami, but spared by the Spartans. He was
afterwards put on his trial by Conon on the charge, not improbably a true
one, of having betrayed the Athenian fleet at this battle: see Kock on Ar. Frogs, 1512.
26. πάσσοφος—ἁνήρ—καὶ
θεῖος
. For
ἁνήρ BT read ἀνήρ , but
see on 314E above.
πάσσοφος is often ironical: e.g. Euthyd. 271C ὃ δὲ σὺ ἐρωτᾷς τὴν σοφίαν αὐτοῖν, θαυμασία, ὦ
Κρίτων·
πάσσοφοι ἀτεχνῶς τώ γε, οὐδ’ ᾔδη πρὸ τοῦ ὅ τι εἶεν οἱ
παγκρατιασταί . For the meaning of
θεῖος cf. Meno, 99C
οὐκοῦν—ἄξιοντούτους
θείους καλεῖν τοὺς ἄνδρας,
οἵτινες νοῦν μὴ ἔχοντες πολλὰ
καὶ μεγάλα κατορθοῦσιν ὧν πράττουσιν καὶ λέγουσι; θεῖος(in
the form σεῖος ) was the favourite Spartan
word of praise and was much affected by the Socratic circle in Athens.
CHAPTER VIII
After Hippocrates has been introduced to Protagoras, the latter
enlarges upon the antiquity of his profession. At the suggestion
of Socrates a circle is formed to hear the Sophists discourse.
3. Κριτίας
the foremost
of the Thirty so-called tyrants was related to Plato on the mother's side,
Perictione Plato's mother being granddaughter of the elder Critias, who was
father of Callaeschrus. He is one of the dramatis personae
in the Charmides and Timaeus, and the dialogue
Critias is named after him. A scholiast on the Timaeus,
20A (quoted by Stallbaum) describes him as γενναίας
καὶ
ἁδρᾶς φύσεως, ἥπτετο δὲ καὶ
φιλοσόφων συνουσιῶν, καὶ ἐκαλεῖτο ἰδιώτης μὲν ἐν φιλοσόφοις,
φιλόσοφος δὲ ἐν ἰδιώταις . For the fragments of his poems see
Bergk's Poetae Lyrici Graeci4 , II, 279
ff.
4. ἔτι σμίκρ’
ἄττα—διαθεασάμενοι.
σμίκρ’ ἄτταis the plural of σμικρόν τι , and as ἔτι
σμικρόν τι διατρίψαντες would mean ‘after a little further delay’,
so ἔτι σμίκρ’ ἄττα διατρίψαντες means
‘after some little further delays’. The reference in
ἔτι is to
314Cταῦτα in καὶ ταῦτα refers to the causes of the
delays, which were, as usual, some topics of discourse: its antecedent is
involved in
διατρίψαντες .
6. πρὸς σέ τοι ἤλθομεν
. Here, as in
314E both B and T have τι
for τοι : but τι
is impossible here, and this use of τοι is
very frequent in address: Heindorf refers ( inter
alia ) to Ar. Plut.
1100σέ τοι σέ τοι λέγω, Καρίων, ἀνάμεινον
.
15. οἴεταί οἱ μάλιστ’ ἂν
γενέσθαι
. B and T read
μάλιστα without ἄν : see on Crito, 51E. It is more likely that ἄν should have dropped out after μάλιστα here than that Plato's usage should
have varied with οἴομαι and the aorist
infinitive referring to the future: cf. below, 353Bᾗ οἶμαι
ἂν
ἔγωγε κάλλιστα φανερὸν
γενέσθαι , where ἄν is
in all the MSS.
17. μόνος οἴει δεῖν—πρὸς μόνους.
οἴει δεῖνis virtually like one verb, ἀξιοῖς or the like: it therefore takes the
nom. (not the acc.) with inf.; cf. Demosth. Fals. Leg. 235 εὐθὺς ἡγούμην ἐν
τούτοις—αὐτὸς περιεῖναι δεῖν αὐτῶν καὶ μεγαλοψυχότερος φαίνεσθαι
, quoted by Stallbaum on Crito, 50E. Note that Protagoras here uses the
more precise μόνος πρὸς μόνους , but above
only μόνῳ (316 B)—unless (with Cobet and
Schanz) we there insert μόνοι before μόνῳ .
19. ξένον γὰρ ἄνδρα καὶ ἰόντα κτλ.
For καὶ ἰόντα
T reads in the margin κατιόντα : Liebhold
suggests καταλύοντα. ἰόντα , however, is
parallel to ξένον and to
πείθοντα , ‘a man who is a stranger and goes—and tries to
persuade etc.’ The whole passage recalls Apol. 19E-20A
τούτων (viz. Gorgias, Prodicus, Hippias) γὰρ
ἕκαστος—οἷός τ’ ἐστὶν ἰὼν εἰς ἑκάστην τῶν πόλεων
τοὺς νέους οἷς ἔξεστι τῶν ἑαυτῶν ρολιτῶν ρποῖκα ξυνεῖναι ᾧ ἂν
βούλωνται—τούτους ρείθουσι τὰς ἐκείνων ξυνουσίας ἀρολιρόντας
σφίσιν ξυνεῖναι χρήματα διδόντας καὶ χάριν προσειδέναι .
Notice throughout the longwinded character of Protagoras' speeches: cf.
Philostrat. Vit. Soph. I. 494 (quoted by Kroschel on 320C , γνοὺς
δὲ
τὸν Πρωταγόραν ὁ Πλάτων σεμνῶς μὲν ἑρμηνεύοντα, ὑπτιάζοντα δὲ τῇ
σεμνότητι καί που καὶ μακρολογώτερον τοῦ συμμέτρου, τὴν
ἰδέαν αὐτοῦ μύθῳ μακρῷ ἐχαρακτήρισεν .
29. τὸ ἐπαχθὲς αὐτῆς.
ἐπαχθέςlike
φορτικόν means what hearers will resent (think a burden or ἄχθος ) as in bad taste because
presumptuous: cf. Demosth. de Pace, 4 τὸ λέγειν περὶ
ὧν αὐτὸς εἶρέ τις καὶ ρεπὶ αὑτοῦ—οὕτως ἡγοῦμαι φοπτικὸν καὶ
ἐπαχθὲς ὥστε κτλ.
30. τοὺς μὲν ποίησιν.
σοφόςand its derivatives are often
used especially in early writers in connection with poetry, e.g Theognis,
19-20 Κύρνε σοφιζομένῳ μὲν ἐμοὶ
σφρηγὶς
ἐπικείσθω
τοῖσδ’ ἔπεσιν , Pindar, Isthm. 4. 29-30 μελέταν δὲ σοφισταῖς Διὸς
ἕκατι πρόσβαλον σεβιζόμενοι .
34. Ἴκκος—Ἡρόδικος
.
Iccus is mentioned in Laws, VIII. 839E ff. as a model of
temperance. According to Pausanias, he won in the pentathlon at the Olympic
Games and afterwards set up as a trainer ( γυμναστής
). Herodicus of Selymbria in Thrace combined the professions of the γυμναστής and
ἰατρός ( μίξας
γυμναστικὴν ἰατρικῇ ). He is described in Rep. III. 406Aas the inventor of the παιδαγωγικὴ τῶν νοσημάτων ἰατρική —by means
of which he tortured first himself (by prolonging his own dying) and
afterwards others: δυσθανατῶν—ὑπὸ σοφίας εἰς
γῆρας
ἀφίκετο ( ibid. B).
ὁ νῦν ἔτι ὤν—σοφιστής
. Heindorf reads ἧττον in place of
ἥττων , but νῦν
ἔτι
ὤν is ‘still living’ and οὐδενὸς
ἥττων
σοφιστής is a descriptive qualification.
37. Ἀγαθοκλῆς—Πυθοκλείδης
. Agathocles is mentioned in Lach. 180Das teacher of Damon: according to
the Alc. I, 118C Pythoclides also taught Pericles. A
scholiast on the Alc. I ( loc. cit. )
remarks: Πυθοκλείδης μουσικὸς ἦν τῆς σεμνῆς
μουσικῆς
διδάσκαλος, καὶ Πυθαγόρειος, οὗ μαθητὴς Ἀγαθοκλῆς, οὗ Λαμπροκλῆς
( Λάμπρος , van Prinsterer), οὗ Δάμων . With the sentiment compare the
imitation in Plut. Pericl. 4. 2 ὁ
δὲ Δάμων ἔοικεν
ἄκπος ὢν σοφιστὴς καταδύεσθαι μὲν εἰς τὸ τῆς μουσικῆς ὄνομα ρπὸς
τοὺς πολλοὺς ἐπικρυπτόμενος τὴν δεινότητα .
41. κατὰ τοῦτο εἶναι.
εἶναιis redundant as in Isaeus, περὶ
τοῦ Μενεκλέους κλήρου , 32 ἡμεῖς
ὠμόσαμεν εὖ ποιεῖν ἀλλήλους—
κατὰ δύναμιν εἶναι, καὶ λόγῳ καὶ ἔργῳ , and in the common ἑκὼν
εἶναι : but no other instance of the precise phrase κατὰ τοῦτο
εἶναι is quoted.
45. οἵ γε πολλοὶ—οὐδὲν
αἰσθάνονται
. Cf. Gorg. 474Aτοὺς δὲ
πολλοὺς ἐῶ χαίρειν, καὶ ἕνα ἐπιψηφίζειν ἐπίσταμαι, τοῖς δὲ
πολλοῖς οὐδὲ διαλέγομαι. For ὡς
ἔπος εἰπεῖν (to be taken with οὐδὲν
) see on Apol. 17A. The phrase is used to qualify the
comprehension of a word or phrase, generally
οὐδείς or πάντες .
47. τὸ οὖν—ἐπιχειρήματος
. B and T read
τὸν for τό , by a natural error.
Heindorf compares Theaet. 144Aτὸ γὰρ
εὐμαθῆ
ὄντα—ρπᾷον αὖ εἶναι διαφεπόντως—ἐγὼ μὲν οὔτ’ ἂν ᾠόμην
γενέσθαι κτλ.and Rep. I. 331Bτὸ γὰρ
μηδὲ ἄκοντά τινα ἐξαπατῆσαι—μέγα μέρος εἰς τοῦτο ἡ τῶν χρημάτων
κτῆσις
συμβάλλεται. Here καὶ τοῦ
ἐπιχειρήματος is a virtual repetition of
ἀποδιδράσκοντα : cf. τὸν ταῦτα πράττοντα
above in 316C The sentence reminds one of
the practice observed in Spartan education—to punish the youths not for
stealing but for failing to escape with their booty: Xen. Rep.
Laced. 2. 8 εἴποι δ’ ἂν οὖν τις· τί
δῆτα,
εἴρεπ τὸ κλέρτειν ἀγαθὸν ἐνόμιζε, ρολλὰς ρληγὰς ἐρέβαλε τῷ
ἁλισκομένῳ; ὅτι, φημὶ ἐγώ, καὶ τἄλλα, ὅσα ἄνθπωροι διδάσκουσι,
κολάζουσι τὸν μὴ καλῶς ὑπηρετοῦντα : cf. Rep. I. 361Aτὸν
ἁλισκόμενον δὲ φαῦλον ἡγητέον.
52. τούτων τὴν ἐναντίαν ἅπασαν ὁδόν
. ‘h. e. τὴν ὁδὸν
ἣ
ἅπασά ἐστιν ἐναντία τούτων . pro
τούτων eadem comparatione quae vocatur compendiaria dici potuit τούτοις . Andocid. or. I. 4 ἐγὼ
πολὺ τὴν ἐναντίαν τούτοις γνώμην ἔχω ’ (Kroschel). For ἅπασαν with an adjective compare (with
Kroschel) Xen. Anab. I. 5. I ἧν ἡ
γῆ πεδίον ἅπαν ὁμαλὲς ὥσπερ θάλαττα and the common phrase πᾶν τοὐναντίον .
54. σοφιστὴς εἶναι καὶ
παιδεύειν ἀνθρώπους
. The σοφιστὴς
σοφίζει , i.e. παιδεύει : see
note on 312C above. Theaet.
167C (where Socrates is speaking for Protagoras) ὁ
σοφιστὴς
τοὺς ραιδευομένους οὕτω δυνάμενος ραιδαγωγεῖν σοφός τε καὶ ἄξιος
πολλῶν χρημάτων τοῖς παιδευθεῖσιν .
57. σὺν θεῷ εἰπεῖν
.
‘Crebra modestiae formula, bene explicat Steph., quod
ita dico, ut in eo opem divinam agnoscam ’. Heindorf on Theaet. 151Bκαὶ
σὺν
θεῷ εἰπεῖν, πάνυ ἱκανῶς
τοπάζω οἶς ἂν συγγενόμενοι ὄναιντο.
59. πολλά γε ἔτη ἤδη εἰμὶ ἐν τῇ
τέχνῃ
. Meno, 91Eοἶμαι
γὰρ αὐτὸν(i.e. Πρωταγόραν
) ἀποθανεῖν ἐγγὺς καὶ ἑβδομήκοντα ἔτη
γεγονότα, τετταράκοντα δὲ ἐν τῇ τέχνῃ ὄντα . The phrases εἶναι ἐν
τῇ τέχνῃ, ἐν φιλοσοφίᾳ and the like are common.
60. οὐδενὸς ὅτου οὐ
.
For the asyndeton Heindorf compares Hom.
Od. XIV. 96ἧ γάρ οἱ
ζωή γ’ ἦν
ἄσπετος· οὔ τινι τόσση
ἀνδρῶν ἡρώων. The nearest parallel to πάντων (which Cobet rejects)
after οὐδενὸς ὅτου οὐ seems to be in Dem. adv. Lept. § 3 οὐ γὰρ
ἔστιν ἐφ’ ὅτου τοῦτο οὐ πεπόνθατε τῶν πάντων (quoted by
Heindorf).
62. ἁπάντων
goes with τῶν ἔνδον ὄντων . It seems better to take περὶ τούτων with
βούλεσθε than with τὸν
λόγον ποιεῖσθαι : otherwise it is hardly possible to
separate τούτων from ἁπάντων .
65. ἐνδείξασθαι καὶ
καλλωπίσασθαι—ὅτι ἐρασταί.
ὅτιdepends rather on ἐνδείξασθαι than on
καλλωπίσασθαι : cf. below,
327Aἐδίδασκε καὶ ἐπέπληττε τὸν μὴ
καλῶς
αὐλοῦντα , and ibid. B τῶν δικαίων
καὶ τῶν νομίμων οὐδεὶς φθονεῖ οὐδ’ ἀποκρύπτεται ὥσπερ
τῶν ἅλλων τεχνημάτων , Phaedo, 94Dτὰ μὲν
ἀπειλοῦσα, τὰ δὲ
νουθετοῦσα ταῖς ἐπιθυμίαις. See also notes on 327A and
335E below.
66. εἶμεν
. BT read εἴημεν , but in Plato's time the short form
of the optative plural is regular: see on Apol. 22E.
τί οὖν—οὐ—ἐκαλέσαμεν
. See above on 310A and for
ἐπακούσωσιν note on 315A
70. καθεζόμενοι
. So
T: B has καθιζόμενοι , but presently in 317E both MSS. read συνεκαθεζόμεθα .
72. καὶ αὐτοὶ ἀντιλαβόμενοι
. This passage is difficult and
different views are possible as to the construction and meaning. The MSS.
read καὶ
αὐτοί τε . If the MSS. reading is retained, τε must be regarded as answering to δέ in ἐν δὲ
τούτῳ (cf. Euthyphr. 3E), and καὶ αὐτοί = etiam ipsi,
i.e. even without waiting for servants—a harsh explanation both for καί and αὐτοί
. If
τε is left out (with most of the editors, following
Heindorf), καὶ αὐτοί means ‘ourselves
also’ as opposed to Callias and Alcibiades in ἐν
δὲ τούτῳ Καλλίας
τε καὶ Ἀλκιβιάδης . There is still a slight difficulty in
contrasting αὐτοί with these two, because
they also would seem to be included in
αὐτοί ( πάντες ἡμεῖς—καὶ αὐτοί
), but such slight inaccuracies of expression are common in actual dialogue,
which Plato's style is intended to imitate.
75. Καλλίας
. Hermann read Κριτίας in order to escape the slight
difficulty remarked on in the preceding note: ‘sed hospitis erat
Prodicum ut accederet invitare’
(Kroschel).
76. ἀναστήσαντες
:
but ἄγοντε just before. Euthyd. 273Boffers an exact parallel (if we
follow the reading of the Bodleian MS.): ἰδόντες δὲ αὐτὸν ὅ τε Διονυσόδωρος καὶ ὁ
Εὐθύδημος
πρῶτον
μὲν ἐριστάντε διελεγέσθην ἀλλήλοιν, ἄλλην καὶ ἄλλην ἀροβλέροντες
εἰς ἡμᾶς : cf. ibid. 273A εἰσελθόντες—περιεπατείτην and D ἐγελασάτην γοῦν ἄμφω βλέψαντες εἰς ἀλλήλους
. The dual in Plato as in Greek generally is apt to sink into the plural.
CHAPTER IX
Protagoras explains his profession. It is to teach civil virtue and
make men good citizens.
6. γάρ
used like Latin enim to introduce a speech (introductory γάρ ): see on Apol. 20E.
12. ἐν τῇ ὑστεραίᾳ ταὐτὰ ταῦτα
: sc. ἔσται σοι. ἐν
(bracketed by Schanz after Hirschig) before τῇ
ὑστεραίᾳ means ‘during’: cf. (with Kroschel) Thuc. I. 44. 1 τῇ μὲν προτέρᾳ οὐχ
ἧσσον—ἀπεδέξαντο τοὺς λόγους, ἐν δὲ τῇ ὑστεραίᾳ μετέγνωσαν κτλ.
and add below 321Cἡ
εἱμαρμένη ἡμέρα παρῆν, ἐν ᾗ ἔδει καὶ
ἄνθρωπον ἐξιέναι ἐκ γῆς .
17. ὃ μὴ τυγχάνεις ἐπιστάμενος.
τυγχάνοις(suggested by Bekker) would
be the usual periodic structure: but the indicative is looser and more
direct: Kroschel compares Gorg. 464Dεἰ
δέοι—διαγωνίζεσθαι—πότερος ἐπαίει. Notice the usual Socratic
implication that virtue is knowledge.
18. ἀλλὰ μὴ οὕτως
. Cf. Meno, 74Dἀλλὰ μή
μοι
οὕτωςand below 331C So μὴ γάρ, μὴ σύ γε, μή τοί γε and the like
are often used without a verb expressed. ὥσπερ
ἄν belongs to εἴποι ἄν
in ll. 26 and 30: it is answered by οὕτω δή
in l. 31. αὐτίκα here does not mean ‘for
example’ but goes with μάλα (which
intensifies it): ‘as if Hippocrates were to change his desire on the spot
and conceive a desire ( ἐπιθυμήσειεν ) for
etc.’ αὐτίκα μάλα is idiomatic, cf. Gorg. 469Dαὐτίκα
μάλα
δεῖν τεθνάναι, Crat. 384Bαὐτίκα
μάλα
εἰδέναι.
20. νῦν νεωστί
: nunc nuper as in Meno, 90A. The more general word is followed
by the more specific exactly as in Theaet. 161Cβατράχου
γυρίνου, where γυρῖνος according
to a scholiast is τὸ ἐκ τοῦ βατράχου
παιδίον .
21. Ζευξίππου
. An
obscure sculptor (not painter) of this name is mentioned in Corp
Inscr. Gr. No. 1229 (quoted by Overbeck, Die Antiken
Schriftquellen zur Geschichte der bildenden Künste bei den Griechen,
p. 300). The Zeuxippus here mentioned is supposed to be the same as the
famous painter Zeuxis of Heraclea (the Greek colony in Italy, most probably)
who is mentioned by Plato in Gorg. 453C, and several times by Xenophon (
Mem. I. 4. 3, Oecon. 10. 1, Symp. 4.
63 τὸν Ἡρακλεώτην
ξένον ): see Overbeck, pp. 311 ff. Zeuxis began to rise
into fame probably about 424 B.C.: he would therefore be still a young man
about the date when this dialogue is supposed to take place: see
Introduction, p. xxxiii. Brunn would read
Ζεύξιδος for Ζευξίππου
here, but according to Fick (quoted by Sauppe)
Ζεῦξις is nothing but a familiar diminutive of
Ζεύξιππος : for other similar examples see Fick, Die
Griechischen Personennamen, pp. xxviii ff.
‐ιππος in proper names was aristocratic ( Ar. Clouds, 62 ff.) and
could upon occasion be omitted or added without prejudice to personal
identity: cf. Clouds, 929οὐχὶ
διδάξεις τοῦτον Κρόνος ὤνwith ibid. 1071 σὺ δ’ εἶ κρόνιππος , where ‐ιππος adds mock dignity to κρόνος .
27. Ὀρθαγόρᾳ τῷ Θηβαίῳ
.
Orthagoras is said by Athenaeus (IV. 184E) on the authority of
Aristoxenus to have taught Epaminondas how to play the flute.
29. αὐτόν
but ἐκείνου in 28 and
ἐκείνω? in 30: see on 310Dεἰς ὅ τι βελτίων is here used rather than ὅ τι or τί
βελτίων (as in l. 25) to prepare for εἰς
αὔλησιν , where the preposition could hardly be dispensed
with.
31. οὕτω δή
. Heindorf
would write οὕτω δέ , which is frequent
after ὥσπερ , e.g. 328A see his note on Phaedo, 72C.
32. Πρωταγόρᾳ
συγγενόμενος
: ‘gravius hoc quam σοὶ
συγγενόμενος ’ (Kroschel). See also note on 335A
41. λωβῶνται
is here
rather κακῶς ποιεῖν than κακὸν ποιεῖν , although (like κακουργεῖν, λυμαίνομαι and the like) it
unites both meanings: cf. Rep. I. 335 B ff., and see on Euthyphr. 3Aκακουργεῖν
τὴν πόλιν. With the words of Protagoras compare those of Anytus in Meno, 91CἩράκλεις,
εὐφήμει, ὦ Σώκρατες, μηδένα τῶν
συγγενῶν, μήτε οἰκείων μήτε φίλων, μήτε ἀστὸν μήτε ξένον,
τοιαύτη
μανία λάβοι, ὥστε ραπὰ τούτους ἐλθόντα λωβηθῆναι, ἐρεὶ οὗτοί γε
φανερά ἐστι λώβη τε καὶ διεφθορὰ τῶν συγγιγνομένων.
τὰς γὰρ τέχνας—ἐμβάλλουσιν εἰς
τέχνας.
τέχναιis used of Arithmetic, Geometry,
Solid Geometry and Harmonics in Rep. VII. 532C: elsewhere in Plato αἱ τέχναι generally means the mechanical
arts, e.g. Rep. VI. 495Dand VII. 522B. Here τέχναι can only mean the subjects taught in
schools ( γραμματική,
λογιστική, κιθαριστική ), as Sauppe remarks, but there
seems to be no precise parallel to such a use of the word.
52. ἄνδρας ἀγαθοὺς πολίτας
forms a single expression: ‘good citizens’
are the
ἔργον of πολιτικὴ τέχνη
. So Ar. Knights, 1304ἅνδρα μοχθηρὸν πολίτην.
53. ἐπάγγελμα ὃ
ἐπαγγέλλομαι.
ἐπαγγέλλομαιand its derivatives are
often used of sophistic ‘professions’.
CHAPTER X
Socrates professes to disbelieve that ἀρετή can
be communicated by teaching. His arguments are twofold: (1) while in matters
connected with the arts of building, ship-carpentry, and the like, the Athenians
will listen only to the professional man, in politics they give ear to any and
every one: (2) Athenian statesmen have not been able to communicate their
political virtue to their sons.
2. εἴπερ κέκτησαι.
Cobet's
rule ( Mnemos. XI, 168) ‘ubi praecedit vocalis, semper (Plato) κέκτημαι ponit, ubi consonans, promiscue κεκτῆσθαι et ἐκτῆσθαι
’ represents the usage of the best MSS., but Schanz now writes ἐκτῆσθαι universally after consonants. See also
Mnem. VIII, 336. ἐκτῆσθαι is in
reality an old Ionic form: it is used by Aeschylus, Prom. 795 κοινὸν
ὄμμ’
ἐκτημέναι .
4. οὐκ ἔχω ὅπως ἀπιστῶ
.
The MSS. reading ὅπως
ἄν
ἀπιστῶ was corrected by Heindorf, ὅπως
ἄν with the subjunctive being only used in final clauses. The
subjunctive is deliberative: cf. Euthyphr. 11Bοὐκ
ἔχω
ἔγωγε ὅπως σοι εἴπω ὃ νοῶ.
5. οὐ διδακτὸν—μηδὲ,
οὐnegatives
διδακτόν only, μηδέ the whole of
its clause: a similar case is Eur. Andr. 586 δρᾶν εὖ,
κακῶς δ’ οὔ, μηδ’ ἀποκτείνειν βίᾳ. μή after verbs of
thinking and saying is tolerably common in Plato. See on Euthyphr. 6Bὁμολογοῦμεν
περὶ αὐτῶν μηδὲν εἰδέναι.
7. ὥσπερ καὶ οἱ ἄλλοι Ἕλληνες
, sc. φασί
. Cf. 337D where Hippias calls Athens τῆς Ἑλλάδος αὐτὸ τὸ πρυτανεῖον τῆς σοφίας :
a somewhat less favourable judgement is given in Laws, I. 641Eτὴν
πόλιν
ἅπαντες ἡμῶν Ἕλληνες ὑπολαμβάνουσιν ὡς φιλόλογός τέ
ἐστι καὶ ρολύλογος, Λακεδαίμονα δὲ καὶ Κπήτην, τὴν μὲν
βπαχύλογον,
τὴν δὲ πολύνοιαν μᾶλλον ἢ πολυλογίαν ἀσκοῦσαν.
10. μεταπεμπομένους
is probably middle: Plato does not seem to
use
μεταπέμπειv in the sense of ‘send for’ (like Thucydides,
e.g. I. 112. 3 Ἀμυρταίου
μεταπέμποντος τοῦ ἐν τοῖς
ἕλεσι
βασιλέως : VI. 52. 1 et al. ). The
subject is τοὺς πολίτας to be supplied
from τὴν πόλιν . Cf. Gorg. 455Bff. ὅταν
περὶ ἰατρῶν
αἱπέσεως ᾖ τῇ ρόλει σύλλογος ἢ ρεπὶ ναυρηγῶν ἢ ρεπὶ ἄλλου τινὸς
δημιουπγικοῦ ἔθνους, ἄλλο τι ἢ τότε ὁ π(ητοπικὸς οὐ συμβουλεύσει;
δῆλον γὰρ ὅτι ἐν ἑκάστῃ αἱρέσει τὸν τεχνικώτατον δεῖ αἱρεῖσθαι
and Alc. I, 107A-C. Kroschel well remarks that the words περὶ τῶν
οἰκοδομημάτων (which Hirschig wrongly rejects) are added
to show that it is only about the actual buildings that the builders are
consulted, ‘non de necessitate, utilitate, magnitudine’, as to which the
orators advise: cf. Gorg. 455D.
19. οἱ τοξόται
. The τοξόται (bowmen) or
Σκύθαι (so called from their nationality) or Πευσίνιοι (from one
Πευσίς who according to the schol. on
Ar. Ach. 54had the chief hand in establishing them)
were the police. ἕλκω was regularly used
of removing an offending orator: e.g. Ar.
Knights, 665κᾆθ’
εἷλκον αὐτὸν οἱ πρυτάνεις χοἰ τοξόται.
19. ἐξαίρωνται
. So T
(B has ἐξέρωνται ): the present is perhaps
due to tense-assimilation to
κελευόντων . The active αἴρειν
is used in the same connection by Ar.
Eccl. 261ἡμεῖς δέ γ’
ἢν αἴρωσ’(sc. οἱ τοξόται
), ἐᾶν κελεύσομεν , but no exact parallel
for the use of the middle has yet been found—the nearest seems to be Eur. I.
T. 1201 οὐ γάρ ποτ’
ἄν νιν ἠράμην βάθρων
ἄπο : cf. Ar. Ach. 1140 τὴν ἀσπίδ’ αἴρου καὶ βάδιζ’ ὦ παῖ λαβών ; ibid. 953.
21. περὶ τῶν τῆς πόλεως
διοικήσεως
. So B and T, but in both the copyist had
doubts as to the text. It is usual to drop either
τῶν or
διοικήσεως : Kroschel transposes
τῶν and περί . Sauppe retains
the MSS. reading, making περὶ govern διοικήσεως —but this is very harsh. τὰ τῆς πόλεως διοικήσεως is a periphrasis
for ἡ πόλεως διοίκησις (for the omission
of the article with πόλεως cf.
Polit. 296E τοῦτον δεῖ καὶ
περὶ ταῦτα τὸν ὄρον
εἶναι τόν γε ἀληθινώτατον ὀπθῆς ρόλεως διοικήσεως, ὃν ὁ σοφὸς
καὶ
ἀγαθὸς ἀνὴρ διοικήσει τὸ τῶν ἀρχομένων ), ‘the city's
administration’ being contrasted with τῶν ἐν
τέχνῃ διοίκησις . The whole phrase περὶ
τῶν τῆς πόλεως διοικήσεως corresponds to 318Eκαὶ
ρεπὶ τῶν τῆς ρόλεως, ὅρως τὰ τῆς ρόλεως δυνατώτατος ἂν εἴη καὶ
πράττειν καὶ λέγειν .
23. ἀνιστάμενος
. The
audience sat in the assembly: cf. Rep. VI. 492B ὅταν, εἶπον, ξυγκαθεζόμενοι ἁθρόοι πολλοὶ εἰς
ἐκκλησίας—
ψέγωσι κτλ.
27. μαθών
. Heindorf quotes
many cases of the transition from plural to singular in Plato (e.g. below, 324B : the change is justified here
because in each case the reproach would be addressed to a single person.
29. μὴ τοίνυν ὅτι—ἀλλὰ ἰδίᾳ
. See on Apol. 40Dοἶμαι ἂν
μὴ
ὅτι ἰδιώτην τινά, ἀλλὰ τὸν μέγαν βασιλέα κτλ.
31. οὐχ οιοί τε ἄλλοις
παραδιδόναι
. Plato comments on the inability of
statesmen to teach their sons political sagacity in Meno, 93Bff., citing Themistocles, Aristides,
Pericles and Thucydides as cases in point. Cf. Alc. I, 118E
ff.
33. ἃ μὲν διδασκάλων εἴχετο
. The phrase is used by Plato in the other
passages where he deals with this topic: cf, below, 324DMeno, 93Dand 94A.
36. νέμονται ὥσπερ ἄφετοι.
νέμεσθαιis properly ‘to graze’, and ἄφετος is said de
grege
numini alicui consecrato (Heindorf): cf. Critias,
119D ἀφέτων ὄντων ταύρων ἐν τῷ τοῦ Ποσειδῶνος
ἱερῷ . The same expression occurs in Rep. VI. 498Cὅταν
δὲ
λήγη?
μὲν ἡ π(ώμη, ρολιτικῶν δὲ καὶ στπατειῶν ἐκτὸς γίγνηται, τότε ἤδη
ἀφέτους νέμεσθαι καὶ μηδὲν ἄλλο πράττειν. Here the object of νέμεσθαι is virtually the clause ἐάν που—τῇ ἀρετῇ ‘going to and fro by
themselves they graze like creatures set apart upon whatever excellence
etc.’: cf. (for the use of ἐάν ) Rep. VII. 528Aφθονοῖς
μὴν οὐδ’ ἂν ἄλλῳ εἴ τίς τι δύναιτο ἀπ’ αὐτῶν ὄνασθαι.
ἐάν που αὐτόματοι περιτύχωσιν τῇ
ἀρετῇ.
αὐτομάτω?(used as in Theaet. 180C, Polit. 271D ὃ δ’ ἤρου περὶ τοῦ πάντα
αὐτόματα γίγνεσθαι τοῖς ἀνθρώποις ) agreeing with ἀρετῇ would make the expression more
pointed, and avoid the slight contradiction involved in the expression αὐτόματοι περιτύχωσιν (since one cannot
spontaneously fall in with a thing), but αὐτόματοι is not to be pressed, and should
be understood as equivalent to ἀπὸ τοῦ αὐτομάτου
(cf. 323C .
37. Κλεινίαν
. The author
of the First Alcibiades makes Alcibiades himself speak of his
younger brother as μαινόμενος
ἄνθρωπος (118E).
39. μὴ διαφθαρῇ δή.
δήadds a touch of irony to spare the
feelings of Alcibiades.
41. καταθέμενος ἐν
Ἀρίφρονος
. According to Plutarch (
Alcib. ch. 1) Ariphron shared with Pericles the guardianship of
Alcibiades. Ariphron was Pericles' brother.
42. ἀπέδωκε τούτῳ
,
i.e. Pericles to Alcibiades. Pericles is humorously represented as restoring
his ward in despair to the very man who was suspected of
corrupting him: and Alcibiades is again appeased.
45. οὔτε τῶν ἀλλοτρίων
. See Gorg. 515Cff., where it is argued that
Pericles, Cimon and Miltiades made none of their fellow-citizens better.
48. κάμπτομαι
.
Stallbaum quotes Thuc. III. 58. I καίτοι
ἀξιοῦμέν γε—καμφθῆναι ὑμᾶς καὶ μεταγνῶναι .
49. πολλῶν μὲν—τὰ δὲ αὐτὸν
ἐξηυρηκέναι
. It is implied that Protagoras'
originality is not equal to his industry. The MSS. have ἐξευρηκέναι , but in the perfect as in past
tenses generally initial ευ became ηυ : see on 315B
above.
52. ἀλλ’ ἐπίδειξον
.
See below on
ἐπιδειξάμενος in 328D
54. ἢ λόγῳ διεξελθών
.
So BT: Cobet requires ἢ λόγῳ
διεξέλθω , but λόγῳ διεξελθών
contrasts with μῦθον λέγων , not with ἐπιδείξω , which belongs to both
participial clauses. For the aorist participle (where we should expect the
present) cf., with Sauppe, Theaet. 167Dἀμφισβήτει
λόγῳ ἀντιδιεξελθών.
CHAPTER XI
Protagoras' reply falls into three sections, viz. (1)
320C323C (2)
323C324D (3)
324E328D cf. Introduction, pp. x-xi. In
the first he is concerned to justify the Athenians for allowing everyone to
address them on political questions: this he does in the first instance by
relating a myth of prehistoric man.
It is probable that this myth comes from Protagoras' treatise περὶ τῆς ἐν ἀρχῇ καταστάσεως , mentioned in Diog.
Laert. IX. 55. It does not resemble the other myths of Plato in point of style,
and if not actually written by Protagoras, it is at least carefully modelled on
his way of writing: cf. the similar imitations of the style of Agathon in Symp. 194Dff. and of Prodicus below, 337 A ff. See
Introduction, p. xix. That the ‘Sophists’ taught by means of parables we can see
from Prodicus' Apologue of Heracles in Xen.
Mem. II. 1. 21 ff.
The other passages in Plato treating of the primitive constitution of man are
Polit. 269C ff., Tim. 42Eff. and Symp. 189Cff. In Rep. III. 414Cff. there are also some points of
resemblance to the present story.
1. ἦν γάρ ποτε χρόνος.
γάρintroduces the story: see on Apol. 20EΧαιρεφῶντα
γὰρ
ἴστε που. ἦν χρόνοςwas usual in beginning a tale: the editors
quote Theocr. 8. 1 ἦν χρόνος ἁνίκ’
ἐγών κτλ.
θνητὰ δὲ γένη οὐκ ἦν
. In the Timaeus,
42E ff., the creation of men takes place after that of gods. The lower
animals in the Timaeus arise from the degeneration of the
souls of men in later births, every soul being first born as man: cf. Tim. 41Ewith 90E ff. Here the lower animals
are created simultaneously with man, for θνητὰ
γένη is of course not limited to the human race.
2. Χρόνος ἦλθεν εἱμαρμένος
γενέσεως
. The omission of the article, as well as
the whole turn of expression ( ἦλθεν αὐτοῖς
χρόνος ), is somewhat poetic.
3. θεοὶ γῆς ἔνδον
: so
in Tim. 42Eit is the created gods, not the δημιουργός , who make men. There, however,
it is not said that human creatures were made within the earth: but compare
the γενναῖον ψεῦδος of Rep. III. 414Cἦσαν
δὲ(i.e. the citizens of Plato's state) τότε
τῇ ἀληθείᾳ
ὑπὸ γῆς ἐντὸς πλαττόμενοι . The widespread tradition of
autochthonous races among the Greeks no doubt helped to produce such
anthropological theories, with which compare Empedocles (
ap. Ritter and Preller, Hist.
Philos.7 p. 143), οὐλοφυεῖς
μὲν πρῶτα τύποι χθονὸς ἐξανέτελλον ; Symp. 191Cἐγέννων
καὶ
ἔτικτον(sc. primitive men) οὐκ εἰς ἀλλήλους ἀλλ’ εἰς γῆν ὥσπερ οἱ τέττιγες;
and Polit. 272A ἐκ γῆς
γὰρ ἀνεβιώσκοντο πάντες . It is to be noticed that Plato
regularly uses ἐντός (not ἔνδον ) as a preposition: ἔνδον (so used) is the more poetic word.
ἐκ γῆς—κεράννυται
. Cf. Tim. 42E(of the creation of man) μιμούμενοι (i.e. the created gods) τὸν σφέτερον δημιουργόν, πυρὸς
καὶ γῆς ὕδατός τε καὶ ἀέπος ἀρὸ τοῦ κόσμου δανειζόμενοι μόπια
ὡς ἀποδοθησόμενα πάλιν εἰς ταὐτὸν τὰ λαμβανόμενα ξυνεκόλλων
. For ‘air and water’ is substituted here τῶν
ὅσα πυρὶ καὶ γῇ
κεράννυται . Fire is the rarest and earth the densest of
the four elements: Protagoras' theory is that air and water are produced
by mixing these in different proportions, for
κεράννυται cannot mean merely that the elements interchange.
Cf. the theory attributed by Aristotle to Parmenides:
Met. I. 5. 986 b . 33 δύο
τὰς αἰτίας καὶ δύο τὰς ἀρχὰς πάλιν τίθησι, θερμὸν καὶ ψυχρόν,
οἷονπῦρ καὶ γῆν
λέγων . It is noteworthy that Plato himself regards all
four elements as differentiated, although imperfectly, before the
creation of the κόσμος by the
δημιουργός : cf. Tim. 53Aff. The chiasmus in γῆς καὶ πυρός followed by πυρὶ καὶ γῇ is part of Protagoras' art.
6. Προμηθεῖ καὶ Ἐπιμηθεῖ
. In Gorg. 523DPrometheus again appears as the
servant of Zeus, commissioned to put a stop to man's foreknowledge of his
day of death: in Polit. 274C he is mentioned as the giver of
fire to mortals. The Hesiodic and Aeschylean form of the legend, in which
Prometheus steals the fire, does not appear in Plato,
except at 321D nor is there any hint in
his works of the story in Hesiod about the gift of Pandora —the source of
human ills—to Epimetheus ( Works and
Days, 50 ff.), though it is worth noting that Plato like
Hesiod makes the creation of woman posterior to that of man ( Tim. 42B).
8. παραιτεῖται—αὐτὸς
νεῖμαι.
The object clause, as usual with
verbs like
παραιτεῖσθαι ( deprecari ), depends
on the positive part of the verb (here
αἰτεῖσθαι ): see on Apol. 31B. αὐτός
is ‘by himself’, without Prometheus' aid. We follow Cron and Turner in
retaining the MSS. νείμαντος δέ μου as
against Bekker's δ’ ἐμοῦ : the antithesis,
as Cron remarks, is between the actions— νείμαντος
and
ἐπίσκεψαι . The point to be noticed is that Afterthought
invites Forethought to exchange offices with him: it is Afterthought whose
duty it is to inspect ( ἐπισκέψασθαι : cf. Gorg. 526Cὁ δὲ
Μίνως
ἐπισκοπῶν κάθηται).
10. τὰ δ’ ἀσθενέστερα—τὰ δέ
.
B and T have τοὺς δ’
ἀσθενεστέρους—τοὺς δέ , a natural mistake, which can
hardly be due to Plato.
12. ἐμηχανᾶτο δύναμιν εἰς
σωτηρίαν
. Plato's own style rarely falls into
verse: cf. Rep. X. 621Bεἰς
τὴν
γένεσιν ᾄττοντας
ὥσπερ ἀστέρας. The whole passage is full of rare and often
poetic rhythms, words, constructions, and turns of expression: e.g. ἄοπλον φύσιν, σμικρότητι ἤμπισχεν, πτηνὸν
φυγήν, τῷδε
αὐτῷ (for αὐτῷ τούτῳ ), ἀϊστωθείη, ἀλληλοφθοριῶν διαφυγὰς ἐπήρκεσε,
εὐμαρίαν (as against εὐμάρειαν
), and many more: note also the effort after balance and variety in ἱκανοῖς μὲν ἀμῦναι χειμῶνα , δυνατοῖς δὲ καὶ καύματα ( 321A , τοῖς
μὲν
ἐκ γῆς—ἄλλοις δὲ—τοῖς
δὲ—ἔστι δ’ οἷς . ‘Summum opinor’, says Heindorf, ‘in his
imitantis philosophi appareret artificium, si quid de propria Protagorae
dictione superesset’. See Introduction, p. xix.
13. σμικρότητι ἤμπισχεν
. The usual construction would require σμικρότητα : the change is perhaps due to
the desire for balance with ἃ δὲ
ηὖξε μεγέθει , but the same construction occurs below in
l. 19 with
ἀμφιεννύς .
17. μή τι γένος ἀϊστωθείη
. Aesch. Prom. 232 ἀϊστώσας
γένος ; ibid. 668 κεραυνὸν ὃς πᾶν ἐξαϊστώσοι γένος . Note the
emphasis with which Protagoras asserts the permanence of the
genus : cf. below,
321Bσωτηρίαν τῷ γένει πορίζων
.
19. εὐμαρίαν
. So Schanz
with BT: the editors generally read
εὐμάρειαν . The older form is intentionally used here: see
above on l. 12.
23. ὑποδῶν
is Cobet's
correction for ὑπὸ ποδῶν of B and T. See
below on 321Cγυμνόν
τε καὶ ἀνυπόδητον κτλ.
24. τὰ δὲ δέρμασιν στερεοῖς καὶ
ἀναίμοις
. After τὰ δέ
the MSS. read θριξὶν καί . The words seem
to have been wrongly introduced from l. 20. This (the suggestion of Ast,
adopted by Schanz and others) seems better than to read for θριξὶν
καί the words ὄνυξιν καί
.
30. οὐ πάνυ τι
= non satis : cf. note on Euthyphr. 2Bοὐδ’
αὐτὸς πάνυ τι γιγνώσκω. οὐ πάνυis the English ‘not quite’,
sometimes equivalent to ‘not at all’ by meiosis : the
addition of τι makes the phrase a little
less emphatic. πάνυ οὐ is quite a
different phrase and means ‘altogether not’.
31. καταναλώσας τὰς
δυνάμεις
. After τὰς
δυνάμεις , the words εἰς τὰ ἄλογα
are found in T, but not in B.
35. ἐμμελῶς πάντων ἔχοντα
: like ἱκανῶς
τοῦ βάθους ἔχοντα in Theaet. 194Dand the genitive after καλῶς ἔχειν and the like.
36. γυμνόν τε καὶ ἀνυπόδητονκαὶ
ἄστρωτονκαὶ ἄοπλον
. Cf. the description of Ἔρως in Symp. 203C: ἀνυπόδητος
καὶ
ἄοικος, χαμαιπετὴς ἀεὶ ὢν καὶ ἄστρωτος. ἀνυπόδητον
contrasts with ὑποδῶν in 321B (l. 23), and justifies Cobet's
emendation for ὑπὸποδῶν . Aristotle ( περὶ
ζῴων μορίων , IV. 10, p. 687 a . 23) alludes
to this passage of the Protagoras : ἀλλ’
οἱ λέγοντες ὡς συνέστηκεν οὐ
καλῶς ὁ ἄνθρωπος, ἀλλὰ χείριστα τῶν ζῴων ( ἀνυπόδητόν τε γὰρ αὐτὸν
εἶναί φασι καὶ γυμνὸν καὶ οὐκ ἔχοντα ὄπλον πρὸς τὴν ἀλκήν
), οὐκ ὀρθῶς
λέγουσιν .
37. ἐν ᾖ
. See above on ἐν τῇ ὑστεραίᾳ (
318A . All the θνητὰ
γένη then according to Protagoras issued forth on the same
day. Plato thought otherwise: see on
320D l. 1.
38. ἐχόμενος
: so T: ‘ σχόμενος B, sed in marg. vitii nota’
(Schanz). σχόμενος is occasionally found
in this passive sense, especially in compounds (Sauppe quotes Soph. 250D
συνεσχόμεθαand Isocr. XIX. II φθόῃ
σχόμενον ), but the present participle is at least equally well
attested here and suits the meaning better: cf. (with Kroschel) Laws, VI. 780Bὑπὸ
πολλῆς ἀπορίας
ἐχομένοις.
40. τὴν ἔντεχνον σοφίαν σὺν πυρί
. Aesch. Prom. 252-4 πρὸς τοῖσδε
μέντοι πῦρ ἐγώ σφιν ὤπασα. καὶ νῦν φλογωπὸν πῦρ
ἔχουσ’ ἐφήμεροι, ἀφ’ οὗ γε πολλὰς ἐκμαθήσονται τέχνας
—which is the usual form of the story. In Polit. 274C Plato
attributes fire to Prometheus, and the arts to Hephaestus and Athena. σύν denotes a much closer connection than μετά : it is seldom used by Plato except in
a few adverbial phrases, or in religious uses (like ξύν
τισι Χάρισι καὶ ΜούσαιςLaws, III. 682A), or in semi-poetic passages
like the present: see on οὐδενὶ ξὺν νῷ in Crito, 48C.
44. ἔσχεν
is ‘obtained’: see
on ἔσχετε in Apol. 19A. ἦν γὰρ
παρὰ τῷ Διί reminds one of Sophocles' Δίκη
ξύνεδρος Ζηνός , O.C. 1382.
46. οὐκέτι
means that
Prometheus had to draw the line there; he had been able to steal the fire,
but farther he could not go—no doubt because time pressed. The same
idiomatic use of οὐκέτι )( ἤδη occurs above in 312Eμὰ Δί’,
ἔφη,
οὐκέτι ἔχω σοι
λέγειν : it is extremely common in Plato and in Greek
generally: see note on Euthyphr. 3Eand Cope on Arist.
Rhet. A, 1. 1354 b . 7 referred to
there.
47. Διὸς φυλακαί
are
no doubt Κράτος and Βία , as in the Prometheus.
Cf. Hesiod, Theog. 385 ff. (quoted by Heindorf) καὶ Κράτος ἠδὲ Βίην ἀριδείκετα γείνατο τέκνα
(sc. Στύξ ) τῶν
οὐκ ἔστ’ἀπάνευθε
Διὸς
δόμος οὐδέ τις ἕδρη οὐδ’ ὁδὸς ὅππῃ μὴ κείνοις θεὸς
ἡγεμονεύει· ἀλλ’ αἰεὶ πὰρ Ζηνὶ βαρυκτύπῳ ἑδριόωνται .
εἰς δὲ τὸ τῆς Ἀθηνᾶς κτλ.
Protagoras reverts to the story of
the theft. Similarly in 346D below
Socrates reverts to a part of the poem which he has quoted some time
before in 345C
49. ἔμπυρον τέχνην
is τέχνη which works by πῦρ , as ἔντεχνος
σοφία in line 40 is σοφία
working by τέχνη .
52. τοῦ βίου—δῑ Ἐπιμηθέα.
βίουis ‘means of living’ as in l. 43.
The words δῑ Ἐπιμηθέα mean ‘thanks to
Epimetheus’: cf. Ar. Clouds,
12-14ἀλλ’ οὐ δύναμαι δείλαιος εὕδειν
δακνόμενος
ὑπὸ τῆς δαπάνης καὶ τῆς φάτνης καὶ τῶν χρεῶν, διὰ τουτονὶ τὸν
υἱόν, and in Rep. I. 354Aοὐ
μέντοι
καλῶς γε εἱστίαμαι, δῑ ἐμαυτόν,
ἀλλ’ οὐ διὰ σέ. The words are rejected by Schanz (after
Sauppe), but without reason: the jingle ( Προ‐μηθέα
δὲ δῑ Ἐπι‐μηθέα ) is quite in Protagoras' style.
53. ᾗπερ λέγεται
.
Aeschylus relates the punishment but not the trial: cf. Prom.
7-9 τὸ σὸν γὰρ ἄνθος, παντέχνου πυρὸς σέλας,
θνητοῖσι κλέψας ὤπασεν· τοιᾶσδέτοι ἁμαρτίας σφε δεῖθεοῖς δοῦναι
δίκην .
CHAPTER XII
The myth is continued ( 322A322D and used to justify the Athenians for
listening to promiscuous political advisers, since according to it all men are
endowed with πολιτικὴ ἀρετή —as indeed all men
believe, otherwise they would not (as they do) regard as insane the man who does
not at least pretend to possess justice and πολιτικὴ
ἀρετή generally.
1. θείας μετέσχε μοίρας·
μοῖραis ‘dispensation’, and refers to the ἔντεχνος σοφία , which is θεία because derived from Hephaestus and
Athena.
2. [ διὰ τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ συγγένειαν
].These words are open to objection on two grounds. The singular τοῦ θεοῦ is inaccurate— no single god has been
mentioned as akin to man: nor can τοῦ
θεοῦ well be taken as God in the monotheistic sense, or as generic
for τῶν θεῶν —both usages are alien to the
whole tone of the myth. These difficulties might perhaps be got over by reading τοῦ θείου = τῶν θεῶν
, but another difficulty remains. The reference in τὴν
συγγένειαν can only be to 320Dτυποῦσιν αὐτὰ
θεοί , the creatures being regarded as children of their creators
as in Tim. 42Eνοήσαντες οἱ
παῖδες(the created gods) τὴν τοῦ
πατρὸς διάταξιν , but there it is not only man but all θνητὰ γένη that are in this sense ‘akin to
gods’—why then should not the lower animals also have built themselves fanes? As
the phrase is at best a bad case of loose thinking and inaccurate writing in an
otherwise careful and elaborate piece of composition, I have followed Kral and
Schanz in rejecting the whole phrase. The words were perhaps an (inaccurate)
gloss on θείας in θείας
μοίρας . For the sentiment which they express see the Editor's
Introduction to the
Euthyphro, p. xvi.
μόνον
: man alone θείας
μετέσχε μοίρας : see note in
loc. Cobet's μόνος would be more
grammatical, but the attraction of ζῴων is
too strong.
12. ἧς μέρος πολεμική.
πολεμικήis recognised as a part of πολιτική in Rep. II. 373Dff.
13. σῴζεσθαι κτίζοντες πόλεις
. The insufficiency of the individual for
his own wants is assigned as the cause of city life in Rep. II. 369Bγίγνεται
τοίνυν—πόλις, ὡς ἐγᾦμαι, ἐπειδὴ
τυγχάνει ἡμῶν ἕκαστος οὐκ αὐτάπκης ἀλλὰ ρολλῶν ἐνδεής· ἢ τίν’
οἴει
ἀρχὴν ἄλλην πόλιν οἰκίζειν; οὐδεμίαν, ἦ δ’ ὄς.
17. αἰδῶ τε καὶ δίκην
.
The editors cite Hesiod ( Works
and
Days, 192) δίκη δ’ ἐν χερσὶ καὶ
αἰδὼς
οὐκ ἔσται (of the γένος
σιδήρεον , where man is corrupt).
αἰδώς is a part of δέος (
Euthyphr. 12C): it keeps men together by making them fear the
censure of their fellows ( Laws, I. 647A-B); cf. Hom. Il. XV. 561ff. ὦ φίλοι,
ἀνέρες ἔστε, καὶ αἰδῶ θέσθ’ ἐνὶ θυμῷ, ἀλλήλους τ’ αἰδεῖσθε κατὰκρατερὰς ὑσμίνας. αἰδομένων δ’
ἀνδρῶν πλέονες σόοι ἠὲ πέφανται·
φευγόντων δ’ οὔτ’ ἂρ κλέος ὄρνυται οὔτε τις ἀλκή. δίκη is
here the abstract principle ‘law’ like Latin ius : for
the original meaning of the word see Verrall on Eur. Med.
411.
18. πόλεων
κόσμοι—συναγωγοί
.
The phraseology no less than the rhythm is highly poetical.
19. τίνα οὖν τρόπον
.
For οὖν retained in the indirect the
editors cite Symp. 219Dὥστε
οὔθ’
ὅπως οὖν ὀργιζοίμην εἶχον οὔθ’
ὅπῃ προσαγαγοίμην αὐτὸν ηὐπόρουν. Cobet's δῶ for δοίη
is attractive but unnecessary.
20. πότερον ὡς κτλ.
‘Eleganter
omissum
ἔφη , ut obliqua oratio statim in rectam transeat’
Heindorf, quoting ( inter alia ) Xen. Cyrop.
I. 4. 28 ἐνταῦθα δὴ
τὸν Κῦρον γελάσαι τε ἐκ τῶν
ρπόσθεν δακπύων καὶ εἰρεῖν αὐτῷ ἀριόντα θαππεῖν ὅτι ραπέσται
αὖθις
ὀλίγου χρόνου· ὥστε ὁρᾶν σοι ἐξέσται κἂν βούλῃ ἀσκαρδαμυκτεί
. Sauppe quotes an exact parallel in 338B
below εἶπον οὖν ἐγὼ ὅτι αἰσχρὸν
εἴη βραβευτὴν ἑλέσθαι τῶν λόγων. ειτε γὰρ χείρων ἔσται κτλ.
22. εις ἔχων
ἰατρικὴν—ἰδιώταις
. This division of labour takes place
as soon as men begin to unite in cities: cf. Rep. II. 369E ff.
28. κτείνειν ὡς νόσον πόλεως.
κτείνεινis poetical for the ἀποκτείνειν of prose.
30. Ἀθηναῖοι
: without
the article as in 319B and 324C
33. οὐκ ἀνέχονται, ὡς σὺ φῄς
: 319Cοὐδέν
τι μᾶλλον ἀποδέχονται . The antithesis between οὐκ ἀνέχονται ὡς σὺ φῄς and εἰκότως ὡς ἐγώ φημι is a poor one, since οὐκ ἀνέχονται has to be repeated with εἰκότως . We should expect some word like ἀλόγως before ὡς σὺ
φῄς , or perhaps οὐκ εἰκότως has
dropped out after φῄς .
35. ἣν δεῖ διὰ
δικαιοσύνης—ἰέναι
. The antecedent to ἥν is συμβουλήν
not
ἀρετῆς : cf. Laws, I. 632C(quoted by Heindorf) κατιδὼν δὲ ὁ θεὶς τοὺς νόμους ἅπασιν τούτοις
φύλακας
ἐπιστήσει,
τοὺς μὲν (sc. φύλακας ) διὰ φρονήσεως, τοὺς δὲ δῑ ἀληθοῦς δόξης
ἰόντας . The phrase διὰ
δικαιοσύνης ἰέναι is equivalent to δικαίαν
εἶναι as διὰ φιλίας ἰέναι to φίλον εἶναι .
36. ἅπαντος
. Schanz reads παντός on account of παντί following: but Plato frequently
interchanges ἅπας and πᾶς ; see on Euthyphr. 9E. It is natural that the more
emphatic form ἅπαντος should come first.
38. ἢ μὴ εἶναι πόλεις.
ἤ= alioquin is
regular with δεῖ,
προσήκει , and the like, in the preceding clause: cf.
below 323c ἢ
μὴ εἶναι ἐν ἀνθρώποις and
325A
αὕτη—τούτου αἰτία
: asyndeton as in 318Aτοσοῦτος
ὅ γε
ἡμέτερος λόγος .
39. ὡς τῷ ὄντι ἡγοῦνται
. The presence of τῷ
ὄντι , as Sauppe remarks, shows that
ὡς depends on τεκμήριον
in l. 42: cf. below, 324Cὡς μὲν οὖν
εἰκότως ἀποδέχονται—ἀποδέδεικταί σοι .
52. προσποιούμενον
δικαιοσύνην
: elsewhere in Plato προσποιεῖσθαι takes the infinitive. Thuc.
1. 137. 7 has ἣν ψευδῶς
προσεποιήσατο .
ὡς ἀναγκαῖον·
ὄνneed not be added, as Heindorf
shows: cf. Rep. V. 449Cὡς ἄρα
περὶ γυναικῶν τε καὶ παίδων παντὶ δῆλον
ὅτι κοινὰ τὰ φίλων ἔσται.
CHAPTER XIII
Protagoras now passes to the second part of his reply ( 323C 24D), in which he seeks to prove by two
arguments that men believe that virtue can be taught: (1) as we hold men
responsible for ἀδικία , it is clear that we
conceive of it as capable of being acquired (
323C324A ; (2) punishment is in
point of fact intended to teach well-doing ( 324A324D .
4. οὐ φύσει ἡγοῦνται εἶναι—ἀλλὰ
διδακτόν
. Sauppe (on 322C
remarks that the giving of δίκη and αἰδώς to all is inconsistent with the theory
that πολιτικὴ
ἀρετή can be acquired by teaching. What Protagoras no doubt
means is that while all men have a part in
δικαιοσύνη ( 323A , because
they possess δίκη and
αἰδώς , they may be improved by teaching; but it must be allowed that
his words are hardly consistent with themselves. See
Introduction, pp. xvii-xviii.
14. τὰ καλὰ καὶ τἀναντία τοὐτοις
. This, the MSS. reading, retained by Heindorf,
and recently by Kral, is, we think, right. παῦτα
in l. 12 does not have its antecedent in the previous sentence, but is
explained by τὰ καλὰ καὶ τἀναντία
τούτοις . Protagoras in fact divides ‘goods’ into two
classes, viz. (1) goods φύσει , (2) goods ἐξ ἐπιμελείας καὶ ἀσκήσεως καὶ
διδαχῆς , and calls the former
καλά , the implied examples being personal beauty, stature and
health. Schanz's rejection of τὰ
καλά is therefore needless.
The editors mostly read τὰ κακά , but (in
spite of Ficinus' haec
mala eorumque contraria ) this would seem to be precluded by the μέν and δέ in ταῦτα μὲν γάρ and ὅσα
δὲ—ἀγαθά : the contrast requires that one class of goods shall be
set over against another, and is much weakened if we put ‘evils’ in the
foreground by reading τὰ κακά . Further,
ταῦτα is too remote to be easily taken with τὰ κακά in the sense of ‘these evils’, whereas
if we take the pronoun merely as anticipating τὰ
κακά , then the statement becomes too wide: for not all κακά , not all ἀγαθά
( τἀναντία
τούτοις , on this view), come to men
φύσει , as indeed the next clause states.
19. συλλήβδην πᾶν τὸ
ἐναντίον—ἀρετῆς
. We have here the first hint of
the unity of the different vices and (by implication) virtues: cf. below, 329C
22. εἰ γὰρ ἐθέλεις—διδάξει
. Cf. below,
342D
23. αὐτό σε διδάξει
:
‘fact will show you,: Theaet. 200Eὁ τὸν
ποταμὸν καθηγούμενος—ἔφη ἄρα δείξειν αὐτό; the idiom is a frequent
one.
25. οὐδεὶς γάρ κολάζει κτλ.
Plato's own theory of punishment so far agrees
with this, but goes deeper: see Gorg. 525Aff. προσήκει
δὲ παντὶ τῷ ἐν τιμωρίᾳ ὄντι, ὑπ’ ἄλλου ὀρθῶς τιμωρουμένῳ, ἢ
βελτίονι γίγνεσθαι καὶ ὀνίνασθαι ἢ ραπαδείγματι τοῖς ἄλλοις
γίγνεσθαι,
ἵνα ἄλλοι ὁρῶντες πάσχοντα ἃ ἂν πάσχῃ φοβούμενοι βελτίους
γίγνωνται . Vice (being ignorance) is disease of soul, as
νόσος is of body: it is the business of the judge to cure
the one as of the physician to cure the other: cf. Rep. IX. 591A-B and Gorg. 478D
σωφρονίζειγάρ που
καὶ
δικαιοτέρους ποιεῖ καὶ
ἰατρικὴ γίγνεται πονηρίας ἡ δίκη: hence (
ibid. 480B ff.) the sinner should go before the judge as readily as the
patient to a doctor, and should even accuse his friends. In the ideal city
the judges are to put to death incurable sinners just as the doctors will
allow incurable patients to die: Rep. III. 409Eff. τῶν
πολιτῶν σοι τοὺς μὲν εὐφυεῖς τὰ σώματα καὶ
τὰς ψυχὰς θεπαρεύσουσι, τοὺς δὲ μή, ὅσοι μὲν κατὰ σῶμα τοιοῦτοι,
ἀροθνῄσκειν ἐάσουσι, τοὺς δὲ κατὰ τὴν ψυχὴν κακοφυεῖς καὶ
ἀνιάτους αὐτοὶ ἀποκτενοῦσιν . The same holds good of
punishment after death: for Ardiaeus and the others in Rep. X. 616A, whose punishment is everlasting
( οὐχ ἥκει—οὐδ’ ἂν ἥξει δεῦρο ), are
incurable— ἀτεχνῶς παραδείγματα
ἀνηρτημένους
ἐκεῖ ἐν ᾅδου
ἐν τῷ δεσμωτηπίῳ, τοῖς ἀεὶ τῶν ἀδίκων ἀφικνουμένοις θεάματα καὶ
νουθετήματα —the majority are punished to purge them of the guilt
contracted upon earth and teach them to choose more wisely their lot of life
next time. The remedial view of punishment is embedded in the genius of the
Greek language, as is shown by the punitive sense of σωφρονίζειν,
δικαιοῦν, εὐθύνειν . The older and sterner view ( δράσαντι παθεῖν ) appears more rarely in
Plato's time.
27. ἠδίκησεν
. See above
on 319D
28. τιμωρεῖται
. The
editors quote Ar. Rhet. A, 10. 1369
b . 12 διαφέρει δὲ τιμωρία καὶ κόλασις·
ἡ
μὲν γὰρ κόλασις τοῦ πάσχοντος
ἕνεκά ἐστιν, ἡ δὲ τιμωρία τοῦ ποιοῦντος, ἵνα ἀποπληρωθῇ .
The distinction is not invariably observed in Plato, although he generally
uses τιμωρεῖσθαι in passages where the
gravity of the sin is more insisted upon.
29. οὐ τοῦ παρεληλυθότος—ἀγένητον θείη
. Turner (on 324B
quotes Laws, XI. 934Aοὐχ
ἕνεκα τοῦ κακουργῆσαι διδοὺς
τὴν δίκην, οὐ γὰρ τὸ γεγονὸς ἀγένητον ἔσται ποτέ κτλ.The
phrase οὐ γὰρ ἂν τό γε πραχθὲν ἀγένητον θείη
represents a common proverbial saying: cf. Simonides, Frag. 69 τὸ γὰρ γεγενημένον
οὐκέτ’ ἄρεκτον ἔσται (Sauppe) with Bergk's note, and the
impressive application of the saying in Aesch. Ag. 1019-21 τὸ δ’
ἐρὶ γᾶν ἅραξ ρεσὸν θανάσιμον ρποράποιθ’ ἀνδπὸς μέλαν αἷμα τίς ἂν
πάλιν ἀγκαλέσαιτ’ ἐπαείδων ;
36. κολάζονται
: the
middle (in the present) is rare: Heindorf quotes Ar. Wasps, 405νῦν ἐκεῖνο νῦν ἐκεῖνο τοὐξύθυμον
ᾧ κολαζόμεσθα κέντρον ἐντέτατ’ ὀξύ.
CHAPTER XIV
Here begins the third part of Protagoras' reply:
324E328D In this chapter he begins
to show that virtue is in point of fact taught to all by showing that it would
be absurd to suppose that it is not.
1. λοιπὴ ἀπορία
.
For the omission of the article before a relative clause (Heindorf suggested
the insertion of ἡ after λοιπή ) Sauppe quotes Rep. III. 413Eφύλαξ
αὑτοῦ ὢν ἀγαθὸς καὶ
μουσικῆς ἧς ἐμάνθανεν. The
ἀπορία was raised by Socrates in
319D ff.
3. διδάσκουσιν
.
Contrast below 325Bτὰ
μὲν ἄλλα διδάσκονται τοὺς υἱεῖς and ibid.τοὺς υἱεῖς
διδάσκονται , said of the parents as
διδάσκουσιν (in the usual sense of
διδάσκονται ) is said here and in Meno, 94B. Similarly in Prot.320Aἐπαίδευε
is used where we should expect ἐπαιδεύετο
: cf. ἐπαιδεύσατο in Meno, 93D.
12. δικαιοσύνη—τὸ ὅσιον
εἶναι
. Thus for the first time Protagoras
definitely speaks of the virtues in language implying their unity: cf. 323E
14. ἀνδρὸς ἀρετήν·
ἀνδρόςis somewhat loftier and more
impressive than ἀνθρώπου (cf. Rep. VIII. 565Eβίον
ἀνδρὸς ἀφανίζων). For the sentiment cf. Rep. VI. 501Bξυμμιγνύντες
τε καὶ κεραννύντες ἐκ τῶν ἐπιτηδευμάτων τὸ ἀνδρείκελον, ἀπ’ ἐκείνου
τεκμαιρόμενοι, ὃ δὴ καὶ Ὅμηρος ἐκάλεσεν ἐν τοῖς ἀνθρώποις ἐγγιγνόμενον
θεοειδές τε καὶ θεοείκελον.
15. μετὰ τοὐτου
: not μεθ’ οὗ , see on
313Aκαὶ ἐν ᾧ . For the use of μετά cf.
Phaed. 69A ff. ( μὴ ) ᾖ ἐκεῖνο μόνον τὸ νόμισμαὀρθόν, ἀνθ’ οὗ δεῖ ἅπαντα ταῦτα καταλλάττεσθαι,
φρόνησις, καὶ τούτου
μὲν καὶ μετὰ τούτου ( ὠνούμενά
τε
καὶ πιπρασκόμενα ) τῷ ὄντι ᾖ
καὶ
ἀνδρεία κτλ.
18. καὶ παῖδα καὶ ἄνδρα καὶ γυναῖκα
: nearly equivalent to ‘not only child but
etc.’:
παῖδα is put first as the natural object of κολάζειν —‘et nos ergo manum ferulae
subduximus’ (Juv. 1. 15).
20. ὑπακούῃ
is more than
obey: the word means ‘to hear and answer’ (cf. Crito, 43A): tr. ‘respond’, sc. by becoming
better (as explained in l. 19).
21. ὡς ἀνίατον
ὄντα—ἀποκτείνειν
: Rep. III. 410Aτοὺς—
κατὰ τὴν ψυχὴν κακοφυεῖς καὶ ἀνιάτους αὐτοὶ ἀποκτενοῦσι. In the
next line αὐτοῦ in αὐτοῦ
πεφυκότος is still this ‘one thing’, viz. ἀνδρὸς
ἀρετή .
24. ὡς θαυμάσιοι γίγνονται
. The MSS. have ὡς
θαυμασίως
γίγνονται , which could only mean ‘in what a strange way
are produced’—a meaning irrelevant here. The point is that it is θαυμαστόν if ‘good men’—virtue having been
proved to be teachable—teach their sons everything except virtue. θαυμάσιοι (with Kroschel and other editors)
seems the simplest of the many emendations proposed: cf. Euthyd. 305Bθαυμάσιοί
εἰσιν
οἱ τοιοῦτοι ἄνδρες. The mistake may have arisen from the
influence of the common θαυμασίως ὡς .
Next best is Hirschig's θαυμασίως γίγνονται
ἀγαθοὶ οἱ ἀγαθοὶ (cf. 328Eοὐκ εἶναι ἀνθρωπίνην ἐπιμέλειαν ᾖ ἀγαθοὶ οἱ
ἀγαθοὶ
γίγνονται ) or θαυμασίως
γίγνονται οἱ ἀγαθοὶ ἀγαθοί : cf. Meno, 89Bοἱ ἀγαθοὶ
ἀγαθοὶ
γίγνονταιand Heindorf's emendation on 326C below. As to γίγνονται ‘Saepius a Platone id quod
argumentatione colligitur, γίγνεσθαι
dicitur, ut p. 355Aφημὶ
ὑμῖν τούτου οὕτως ἔχοντος
γελοῖον τὸν λόγον γίγνεσθαι ὅταν λέγητε κτλ. , Euthyd. p.
298E οὐκοῦν ὁ κύων πατὴρ ὢν σός ἐστιν, ὥστε
σὸς
πατὴρ γίγνεται ὁ κύων ’ (Kroschel). The same use of γίγνεσθαι is common in Aristotle.
27. τὰ μὲν ἄλλα ἄρα
. For
the form of the sentence and for ἄρα here
and in l. 33 cf. note on Crito, 50Eἢ πρὸς
μὲν
ἄρα.
28. διδάσκονται
(but
not of course ἄρα ) is interrogative: so οὐ διδάσκονται in l. 33.
29. ἐφ’ ᾦ.
This, and not ἐφ’ ὦν (as asserted by Schanz), is after
all the reading of B: see Adamson in Cl. Rev. VII, 445. In
itself, ἐφ’ ὧν (so T) is not indefensible: ἐφ’ ὧν (i.e. ἐπὶ
τούτων ἃ ) κτλ.
would mean ‘in the case of subjects which if they have not learnt’ ( μὴ
μαθοῦσι ), the latent ἅ
depending on μαθοῦσι . This use of ἐπὶ with the genitive is common in Plato,
e.g. Rep. VII. 524Eὥσπερ
ἐπὶ τοῦ δακτύλου ἐλέγομεν. But ἐφ’
ᾧ (which Heindorf had already conjectured) is simpler and better.
For the misplacement of τε in ἥ τε ζημία see note on 316D above.
32. ὡς ἔπος εἰπεῖν
is to
be taken with ξυλλήβδην , which goes with
the verbal noun ἀνατροπαί : ‘almost
wholesale subversion of their house’.
ξυλλήβδην means ‘not κατὰ σμικρόν
, but so as to embrace everything’: cf. Rep. 1. 344A B τυραννὶς
ἣ οὐ κατὰ
σμικρὸν τἀλλότρια καὶ λάθρᾳ καὶ βίᾳ ἀφαιρεῖται—ἀλλὰ ξυλλήβδην
, and Theognis, 147 ἐν δὲ δικαιοσύνῃ συλλήβδην
πᾶσ’ ἀρετὴ ’νι . For ὡς ἔπος
εἰπεῖν see on 317A
34. οἴεσθαί γε χρή
: a
way of answering one's own question: Crito, 53D, 54B.
CHAPTER XV
In this chapter Protagoras shows that the whole scheme of Athenian education is
intended to teach ἀρετή .
1. μέχρι οὗπερ ἂν ζῶσι
, i.e. οί παιδευόμενοι : in
326D ff. it is shown that education does not end when school is left, but
goes on through life.
2. ἐπειδὰν θᾶττον
seems
not to occur elsewhere in the Platonic writings: in Alcib. I,
105A is ἐὰν θᾶττον. τάχιστα is more usual
after such conjunctions. Kroschel quotes an imitation of this passage from De
Rep. Laced. 2. 1 ἐπειδὰν τάχιστα οἱ παῖδες
αὐτοῖς τὰ λεγόμενα ξυνιῶσιν, εὐθὺς μὲν ἐρ’ αὐτοῖς ραιδαγωγοὺς
θεράποντας ἐφιστᾶσιν, εὐθὺς δὲ πέμπουσιν εἰς διδασκάλων μαθησομένους
καὶ
γράμματα καὶ μουσικὴν καὶ τὰ ἐν παλαίστρᾳ .
5. ὅπως βέλτιστος
:
so BT: there is no reason for inserting ὡς
after ὅπως with Kroschel and Turner: βέλτιστος does not mean better than all
others, but very good.
παρ’ ἕκαστον κτλ.
‘Est
eo ipso tempore quo quidque vel fit vel dicitur’ (Heindorf).
7. τὸ μὲν δίκαιον κτλ.
Sauppe
well quotes Ter. Ad. 417-18 where a father νουθετεῖ his son ‘Hoc facito—Hoc fugito—Hoc
laudi est—Hoc vitio datur’. Cf. Hor.
Sat. I. 4. 105 ff.
9. τὰ μὲν ποίει, τὰ δὲ μὴ ποίει·
τὰ μὲνis not δίκαιον,
καλόν,
ὅσιον , but quite general: ‘this do, that do not’. The τάδε μὲν—
τάδε δέ of T is unnecessary; cf. τὸ
μὲν—τὸ δέ in l. 7. The symmetry of the sentence is worth noting ( a, b, b, a ): first τὸ
μὲν—τὸ δέ , next τόδε μὲν—τόδε
δέ twice, last τὰ μὲν—τὰ δέ
, the end recalling the beginning. Cf. note on καὶ
κακὸν
καὶ αἰσχρόν in Crito, 49B.
ἐὰν μὲν ἑκὼν πείθηται
: without apodosis: see
Goodwin, Moods and Tenses (1889), p. 179. This idiom
occurs more than once in Homer: it is perhaps a remnant of the days when
the conditional particles introduced a main sentence: certainly the
Greeks were not conscious of any such ellipse as εὖ
ἕξει .
10. ὥσπερ ξύλον
διαστρεφόμενον.
ξύλονis ‘a piece of wood’, not
necessarily a dead log, as appears from Hdt. III. 47εἰρίοισι ἀπὸ ξύλου (of the cotton tree) and
other exx. in L. and S. The growing child is compared to a tree growing up
and becoming crooked (note the present
διαστρεφόμενον—καμπτόμενον ). Plato frequently applies the
metaphors ‘crooked’, ‘warped’ and the like to victims of vice and vicious
education: cf. Gorg. 525Aπάντα
σκολιὰ
ὑπὸ ψεύδους καὶ ἀλαζονείας; Theaet. 173A σμικροὶ δὲ καὶ οὐκ ὀρθοὶ τὰς ψυχάς .
11. εὐθύνουσιν—πληγαῖς
. Cf. Arist. Ἀθην.
πολιτ . ch. 8 τοὺς ἁμαρτάνοντας
ηὔθυνεν κυρία οὖσα τοῦ ζημιοῦν καὶ
κολάζειν (of the Areopagitic council). For εὐθύνειν (here passing into the meaning of
‘chastise’) see note on 324Aοὐδεὶς γὰρ κολάζει . To illustrate πληγαῖς Sauppe quotes the well-known line
of Menander ὁ μὴ δαρεὶς ἄνθρωπος οὐ
παιδεύεται .
12. εἰς διδασκάλων πέμποντες
. It appears from
326C that there was no regular age for going to school; the parents
decided in each case. Plato ordains ( Laws, VII. 809E) that children shall learn γράμματα (i.e. reading and writing, ibid. 810B) from 10 to 13, and the lyre from 13 to
16.
πολὺ μᾶλλον—εὐκοσμίας
. Protagoras'
description of the aim of Athenian education agrees with the account of
the Δίκαιος λόγος in the Clouds, 961 ff.
17. ἐπὶ τῶν βάθρων
:
i.e. as they sit on the benches: cf. above 315C
παρατιθέασιν represents the works of the poets as
intellectual food: cf. Theaet. 157Cπαρατίθημι
ἑκάστων τῶν
σοφῶν ἀπογεύσασθαι.
18. ποιητῶν ἀγαθῶν
:
Homer especially, and also Hesiod, Theognis, Phocylides. Cf. Laws, VII. 810E, from which passage it also
appears that extracts were frequently made for committing to memory ( ἐκμανθάνειν ).
19. ἀναγκάζουσιν·
μετὰ λύπης γὰρ ἡ μάθησιςArist.
Pol. VIII. 1339 a . 28 (quoted by Sauppe). So
Niceratus in Xenophon, Symp. III. 5 says that his father ἠνάγκασέ με πάντα τὰ Ὁμήρον
ἔπη μαθεῖν .
20. διέξοδοι
means
finished narratives or descriptions (cf. λόγῳ
διεξελθών and διεξιέναι in 320C . It is to be noted that so far we
have not got beyond ποίησις ψιλή (i.e.
unaccompanied by music): lyric poetry begins to be studied when the lyre has
been learnt (l. 25).
23. ἕτερα τοιαῦτα
:
for the phrase see on Apol. 26A. The accusative (internal) depends
on ἐπιμελοῦνται as in 325Cἐπιμελοῦνται
πᾶσαν ἐπιμέλειαν and Laws, VII. 812Eἀλλὰ
ταῦτα
μὲν ὁ παιδευτὴς ἐπιμελείσθω: the whole phrase is
equivalent to ἑτέραν τοιαύτην σωφροσύνης τε
ἐπιμέλειαν ποιοῦνται . Verbs taking the external object in the
genitive or dative are not precluded from taking the internal object in the
accusative.
26. εἰς τὰ κιθαρίσματα
ἐντείνοντες.
ἐντείνειν εἰςis to stretch into, i.e.
to ‘put into’: whence ἐντείνειν ἐς κύκλον
χωρίον
τρίγωνον ‘to describe a triangle in a circle’ ( Meno, 87A); περὶ
γάπ τοι τῶν ροιημάτων ὦν ρεροίηκας ἐντείνας τοὺς τοῦ Αἰσώρου
λόγους of adapting to metre ( Phaed. 60D);
and here of accompanying poems on the lyre: the boys learn the poems and
tunes (made by the poet) together, while the Citharist plays the lyre. Plato
in the Laws, VII. 812Dff. requires the κιθαρίσματα to be identical with the tune
to which the poem is sung: δεῖ—τοῖς
φθόγγοις τῆς λύπας ρποσχπῆσθαι—τόν τε κιθαπιστὴν καὶ τὸν
ραιδευόμενον, ἀροδιδόντας ρπόσχοπδα τὰ φθέγματα τοῖς φθέγμασι· τὴν δ’
ἑτεποφωνίαν καὶ ροικιλίαν τῆς λύπας, ἄλλα μὲν μέλη τῶν χοπδῶν
ἱεισῶν, ἄλλα δὲ τοῦ τὴν μελω?δίαν ξυνθέντος ροιητοῦ—ράντα τὰ
τοιαῦτα
μὴ προσφέρειν κτλ.
27. ῥυθμούς τε καὶ ἁρμονίας.
ῥυθμοίtimes or rhythms (cf. Rep. III. 399Eff.),
ἁρμονίαι scales ( ibid.398D ff.).
ῥυθμός and ἁρμονία
between them make up μουσική in the
narrower sense: see Symp. 187Aff., where music is defined as περὶ ἁρμονίαν καὶ
ῥυθμὸν ἐρωτικῶν ἐπιστήμη—περὶ ἁρμονίαν since it reconciles ὀξύ and βαρύ, περὶ
ῥυθμόν since it reconciles
ταχύ and βραδύ .
29. εὐρυθμότεροι
καὶ εὐαρμοστότεροι
. See Rep. III.
400C ff., where, after it is shown that τὸ
εὔρυθμον and τὸ
εὐάρμοστον imply εὐλογία
, Plato continues (400D) εὐλογία ἄρα
καὶ εὐαπμοστία καὶ εὐσχημοσύνη καὶ εὐπυθμία εὐηθείᾳ ἀκολουθεῖ,
οὐχ
ἣν ἄνοιαν οὖσαν ὑροκοπιζόμενοι καλοῦμεν ὡς εὐήθειαν, ἀλλὰ τὴν ὡς
ἀληθῶς εὖ τε καὶ καλῶς τὸ ἦθος κατεσκευασμένην διάνοιαν .
33. εἰς παιδοτρίβου
: Protagoras passes to γυμναστική , the second great division of
Greek education: Rep. II. 376E.
34. ὑπηρετῶσι τῇ διανοίᾳ
. Plato asserts that the true object of γυμναστική is not to cultivate the body,
but to educate the soul to the proper mean between hardness and softness: Rep. III. 410Cff. On the soul as the mistress
of the body see Phaedo, ch. 43.
37. μάλιστα οἱ μάλιστα
δυνάμενοι
. The first
μάλιστα is due to Heindorf: it is necessary to the meaning. Most
of the editors insert the word μάλιστα not
after
ποιοῦσιν but after δυνάμενοι
, explaining its loss by the presence of μάλιστα
following: but it comes (we think) more naturally after ποιοῦσιν .
41. ἐκ διδασκάλων ἀπαλλαγῶσιν·
ἐκis rejected by Cobet (cf. Gorg. 514Cἐπειδὴ
τῶν
διδασκάλων ἀπηλλάγημεν): but the phrase is just as
stereotyped as εἰς διδασκάλων , to which
(in l. 39) it forms an appropriate contrast—in neither of the two cases were
the Greeks (in all probability) conscious in common parlance of an ellipse.
Sauppe quotes a fragment of Ar. Banqueters, 42 οὐκ εὐθὺς ἀπεδίδρασκες ἐκ διδασκάλου ;
Plutus, 84 ἐκ Πατροκλέους
ἔρχομαι , and other parallels.
42. ἀναγκάζει μανθάνειν
:
hardly to be taken literally, but only in the sense that ignorance
was
no excuse for breaking the laws.
43. κατὰ τούτους ζῆν
.
After ζῆν occur in the MSS. the words κατὰ παράδειγμα . ‘Facile succurrat cuivis κατὰ τούτους
ζῆν καθάπερ παράδειγμα —quamquam talia notanda potius quam
statim corrigenda’ says Heindorf. Most recent editors bracket or reject the
words, which are open to objection on several grounds, that the laws are not
an example but a rule of life, and Plato does not use παράδειγμα precisely in this way, as well
as from the harsh omission of
ὡς . The suggestion of Sauppe that the words are a gloss
on κατὰ τούτους by a scribe referring to
the illustration which follows—‘as for example’— has much probability.
44. γραμματισται
:
see on γραμματιστοῦ , 312B
45. ὑπογράψαντες γραμμὰς
τῇ γραφίδι
should be understood of tracing (by
dots or otherwise) the outlines of the lines (
γραμμαί ) which form letters. These outlines would be filled up by
the pupil: see Blümner, Griechische
Privataltherthümer, p. 315. The usual view (since Heindorf)
has been to regard the γραμμαί as
horizontal lines ruled for guidance; ‘ut pueri in schola directe s. ad
lineam scribere iubentur, ita in vita quae agunt ad legis normam iis
dirigenda sunt’ (Kroschel). Such a view is, however, inconsistent with the
meaning of ὑπογράφειν and of ὑφήγησις , and (in view of Plato's
statements as to the nature of Law) renders the simile inexact. ὑπογράφειν in Plato regularly refers to an
outline drawing (as ὑποτυποῦσθαι to
moulding in outline Tim. 76E) and is opposed to ἀπεργάσασθαι and (in Aristotle) to ἀναγράφειν , e.g. Rep. VIII. 548C-D οὐκοῦν—
αὕτη μὲν ἡ ρολιτεία οὕτω γεγονυῖα καὶ τοιαύτη ἄν τις εἴη, ὡς λόγῳ
σχῆμα ρολιτείας ὑρογπάψαντα μὴ ἀκπιβῶς ἀρεπγάσασθαι διὰ τὸ
ἐξαπκεῖν μὲν ἰδεῖν καὶ ἐκ τῆς ὑρογπαφῆς τόν τε δικαιότατον καὶ τὸν
ἀδικώτατον , and Theaet. 172E, where a litigant's ἀντωμοσία is called
ὑπογραφή —a sort of outline drawing ὧν
ἐκτὸς οὐ ῥητέον , but which his speech must simply ἀπεργάσασθαι. ὑφηγεῖσθαι is similarly used,
only with the added idea of guiding: e.g. Rep. III. 403D-E οὐκοῦν εἰ τὴν διάνοιαν ἱκανῶς
θεραπεύσαντες παραδοῖμεν αὐτῇ τὰ περὶ τὸ σῶμα ἀκριβολογεῖσθαι, ἡμεῖς
δὲ
ὅσον τοὺς
τύπους ὑφηγησαίμεθα—ὀρθῶς ἃν ποιοῖμεν;
and Laws, X. 890Cδεῖ
ταῦτα οὕτω πράττειν διανοουμένους ὅπῃπερ ἂν ὁ νομοθέτης ὑφηγήσηται
γράφων. The point of the simile is this. As the child draws his
pen between the outlines of the lines forming letters (making
e.g. into ), so we must keep our actions between certain outlines, which are
the laws. Plato invariably regards νόμοι
as only
τύποι , within which our actions should fall: cf. Rep. II. 383Cπαντάπασιν—ἔγωγε
τοὺς τύπους τούτους
συγχωρῶ, καὶ ὡς νόμοις ἂν χρώ?μην(whence νόμους ὑπογράφειν here and in Laws, V. 734E): see also Polit.
294A ff. τὸ δ’ ἄριστον
οὐ τοὺς νόμους ἐστὶν ἰσχύειν, ἀλλ’ ἄνδπα τὸν μετὰ φπονήσεως
βασιλικὸν—ὅτι νόμος οὐκ ἄν ροτε δύναιτο τό τε ἄπιστον καὶ τὸ
δικαιότατον ἀκπιβῶς ρᾶσιν ἅμα ρεπιλαβὼν τὸ βέλτιστον ἐριτάττειν.
αἱ γὰπ ἀνομοιότητες τῶν τε ἀνθπώρων καὶ τῶν ρπάξεων—οὐδὲν
ἐῶσιν ἁρλοῦν ἐν οὐδενὶ ρεπὶ ἁράντων καὶ ἐρὶ ράντα τὸν χπόνον
ἀποφαίνεσθαι τέχνην οὐδ’ ἡντινοῦν —for which reason in the
Republic (VI. 497D) there must always be a power above the laws. The
explanation which we have given does not disagree with the account of Seneca
in his Epistles, XV. 2. 51 ‘Pueri ad praescriptum discunt.
Digiti illorum tenentur et aliena manu per literarum
simulacra ducuntur’: it is supported by Quintilian, I. 1. 27 ‘cum vero
iam ductus sequi coeperit, non inutile erit eas (sc. literas) tabellae quam
optime insculpi, ut per
illos velut
sulcos ducatur stilus’. It is probable that both these authors
had the present passage in view.
It should be noted that γράφειν νόμους was
a regular phrase: cf. the image in Rep. VI. 501A.
48. ὣς δὲ καὶ.
ὥςfor
οὕτως is rare in Attic prose: Heindorf quotes ( inter alia ) Rep. VII. 530Dκινδυνεύει
ὡς πρὸς ἀστρονομίαν
ὄμματα πέπηγεν, ὣς πρὸς ἐναρμόνιον φορὰν ὦτα παγῆναι. For δέ see above on
318C
53. εὐθῦναι
regularly
denotes the ‘putting straight’ or examination of a magistrate when his
office expired. It is not clear whether Protagoras' philological zeal does
not cause him to stretch a point in giving to the word a wider
signification: but see on εὐθύνουσιν in 325D
CHAPTER XVI
Protagoras at last comes to the difficulty raised by Socrates in 319E Virtue having been proved to be teachable,
it is only from a lack of natural aptitude that good men's sons sometimes turn out badly: compared with men who have never been taught virtue,
even they are good. Protagoras concludes with a manifest bid for pupils.
3. ἔμπροσθεν
: viz. at 324E
5. οὐδένα δεῖ ἰδιωτεύειν
: equivalent to πάντας
δεῖ εἶναι
δημιουργούς : no one must be a layman in ἀρετή .
10. ἐδίδασκε καὶ ἐπέπληττε
τὸν μὴ καλῶς αὐλοῦντα
. As ἐδίδασκε
is the important word, ἐπέπληττε has no
effect on the construction, but is in effect enclitic: see on 317Cἐνδείξασθαι
καὶ καλλωπίσασθαι .
17. εἰ οὖν οὕτω.
οὖνmarks the reversion to the original
protasis, viz. εἰ μὴ οἶόν τ’ ὴν—καὶ
τοῦτο κτλ. , from λυσιτελεῖ
to νόμιμα being parenthetical: it
therefore seems better to print a colon rather than a full stop after νόμιμα .
22. ἐλλόγιμος ηὐξήθη
. Proleptic adjectives with αὐξάνω are common: Heindorf cites ( inter alia ) Rep. VIII. 565Cτοῦτον
τρέφειν τε καὶ αὔξειν μέγαν.
25. ἀλλ’ οὖν αὐληταί γ’ ἄν·
ἄνfor γοῦν
was Shilleto's conjecture, which can hardly fail to be right. ἀλλ’ οὖν—γε is an emphatic ‘but at all
events’; cf. Gorg. 496D μανθάνω· ἀλλ’
οὖν τό γε πεινῆν αὐτὸ ἀνιαρόν .
27. οὕτως οἴου καὶ νῦν
.
Sauppe's ᾤου κἂν
νῦν seems to be quite needless: the conclusion is
naturally put as a command— ‘so in the present case, you are to think’.
28. τῶν ἐν νόμοις καὶ ἀνθρώποις
. So BT.
ἀνθρώποις in this emphatic sense is a little awkward with ἀνθρώπους two lines below and ἀνθρώποις said seven lines below of savages
(though the word is qualified in both cases), but the text is probably
right: cf.
323Cἀναγκαῖον οὐδένα ὅντιν’ οὐχὶ
ἁμῶς γέ
πως μετέχειν
αὐτῆς (sc. τῆς δικαιοσύνης
), ἢ μὴ εἶναι ἐν ἀνθρώποις . Of the
suggested emendations the most reasonable is perhaps Sauppe's ἐν νόμοις καὶ ἐννόμοις ἀνθρώποις —which he
has now given up in favour of the MSS. reading.
29. αὐτόν
is not emphatic:
to be δίκαιος is to be a δημιουργὸς
δικαιοσύνης , cf. 326Eτῆς ἀρετῆς—οὐδένα δεῖ ἰδιωτεύειν .
31. μήτε—μήτε—μήτε—μηδέ.
μηδέintroduces the climax: see note on οὔτε—οὐδέ γε in Apol. 19Dand Cope on Ar. Rhet.
A, 4. 4. Presently ἀλλ’ εἶεν is used
rather than ἀλλ’ εἰσί (in spite of ἐστίν in l. 31) because the hypothetical
nature of the case is becoming more prominent. For the passage of a relative
clause into a main clause ( οἵ is not to
be repeated after ἀλλά ) see on 313A
33. ἀλλ’ εἶεν ἄγριοί τινες
. It appears not only from Athenaeus (v. 218D),
but from Suidas and others, that the play in question was called
Ἄγριοι . The few fragments of it which remain (see Kock's Comicorum
Atticorum Fragmenta, I, 146-50) give us no indication of the plot or
treatment. The probability is that the
Ἄγριοι formed the chorus (cf. the names Νεφέλαι,
Βάτραχοι etc.), ‘ad quos’—as we should infer from the
words of Plato— ‘Athenienses quidam, pauci sine dubio, vitae civilis in sua
urbe pertaesi ( μισάνθρωποι ) sicut
Pithetaerus et Euelpides, accedebant imprudenter sperantes se inter homines
immanes meliorem iustioremque quam in civitate sua vitam inventuros esse’
(Kock). Plato was perhaps thinking of the same play again in Rep. VI. 496Dὥσπερ
εἰς
θηρία ἄνθρωπος ἐμπεσών, οὔτε
ξυναδικεῖν ἐθέλων οὔτε ἱκανὸς ὢν εἶς πᾶσιν ἀγρίοις ἀντέχειν
.
οἷοί περ οὓς πέρυσιν
: so BT, and there is no
sufficient reason for altering the text to οἵους
πέρυσιν (with Sauppe, after Athenaeus V. 218D) or οἵους περ πέρυσιν with Schanz. Plato does
not always avail himself of the liberty of attraction: a parallel is
quoted from Crat. 432Eἵνα
κομιδῇ ᾖ
τοιοῦτον οἷόν περ οὗ ὄνομά
ἐστιν.
34. πέρυσιν
. Athenaeus,
V. 218D ἐδιδάχθησαν δὲ οἱ Ἄγριοι
ἐπ’ Ἀριστίωνος ἄρχοντος , i.e. Ol. 89 4 = 421/420 B.C. For
the bearing of the date of the Ἄγριοι on
the question when the dialogue of the Protagoras is assumed
to have taken place see Introduction, p. xxxiii.
Φερεκράτης
. The fragments of
Pherecrates—a poet of the old comedy who gained his first victory in 438
B.C.—are given in Kock's Comicorum Atticorum
Fragmenta, I, 145-209.
ἐδίδαξεν ἐπὶ Ληναίῳ
. The Λήναιον (also called λίμναι and τέμενος
τοῦ Διονύσου ) was an enclosure sacred to Dionysus on the
south-east slope of the Acropolis. Cf. Photius s.v. Λήναιον : περίβολος
μέγας Ἀθήνησιν, ἐν ᾧ τοὺς ἀγῶνας ἦγον, πρὸ τοῦ τὸθέατρον οἰκοδομηθῆναι,
ὀνομάζοντες ἐπὶ Ληναίῳ . The phrase ‘at Lenaeum’ seems to
have survived even after all plays were given in the Dionysiac theatre,
as by this time they were, and to have been understood as equivalent to
‘at the Lenaean festival’ (cf. Ar.
Ach. 504οὑπὶ Ληναίῳ τ’ ἀγών),
for which the expressions ἐν
Ληναίοις and ( ἐδιδάχθη
) εἰς Λήναια are more usual in the didascaliae (see Müller's
Bühnenalterthümer, p. 316, n. 3). The Lenaea took place in
the month Gamelion.
36. ὥσπερ οἱ ἐν ἐκείνῳ τῷ χορῷ
, sc. γενόμενοι.
γίγνεσθαι
ἐν is ‘to come to be in or among’, ‘to fall among’. ἐν τῷ
προθύρῳ ἐγενόμεθα of 314C
is the same idiom.
μισάνθρωποι
. So the MSS. The various
suggested emendations (
ἡμιάνθρωποι Heinrich,
μιξάνθρωποι Jacobs, μεσάνθρωποι
Lehrs) proceed on the supposition that the word is an epithet of the ἄγριοι , which is most improbable: ‘alii
sunt ἄγριοι , alii μισάνθρωποι , neque in illa sermonis
iunctura’ (sc. if we regard the ὥσπερ
clause as explaining τοῖς τοιούτοις )
‘scribendum ὥσπερ sed οἷοί περ fuit’ (Heindorf).
37. Εὐρυβάτῳ καὶ Φρυνώνδᾳ
. Two proverbial scoundrels of real
life: see Suidas s.vv. Εὐρύβατος πονηρός, ἀπὸ
τοῦ
ρεμφθέντος ὑρὸ Κποίσου ἐρὶ ξενολογίαν μετὰ χπημάτων, ὥς φησιν
Ἔφοπος, εἶτα μεταβαλομένου ρπὸς Κῦπον· ἦν δὲ Ἐφέσιος κτλ.
Φπυνώνδας τῶν ἐρὶ ρονηπίᾳ διαβεβοημένων, ὃς ξένος ὢν κατὰ τὰ
Ρελοροννησιακὰ διέτπιβεν Ἀθήνησιν·—ἐκ τούτου τοὺς ρονηποὺς
Φρυνώνδας καλοῦσι . They are frequently mentioned in Greek
literature: see Blaydes on Ar.
Thesm. 861. Blaydes remarks that
‐ώνδας is a Boeotian termination: cf. Ἐπαμεινώνδας,
Χαρώνδας and the like.
40. οὐδείς σοι φαίνεται εἶναι.
εἶναιis Heindorf's emendation for ἐ=θ’ of the Bodleian. For the asyndeton
with ὥσπερ see above on 311E
41. τίς διδάσκαλος τοῦ
ἑλληνίζειν
. The same illustration occurs in Alc.
I. 111A.
46. τούτους ἔτι τίς ἂν
διδάξειεν
repeats τίς
ἂν—διδάξειεν
τοὺς τῶν χειροτεχνῶν υἱεῖς : and οὐ
ῥᾴδιον οἶμαι εἶναι—τούτων
διδάσκαλον φανῆναι is a variety on οὐδ’
ἂν εἷς φανείη , which the οὐδέ
γ’ ἄν of l. 42 might lead us to expect would be repeated— but the sentence is a slight anacoluthon. This is better
than to take ἄν of οὐδέ
γ’ ἄν in l. 42 with
εἶναι of l. 47 .
49. οὕτω δὲ ἀρετῆς
.
On οὕτω δέ see above, note on 318C
50. κἂν εἰ
: this idiom is
somewhat rare in Plato, e.g. Meno, 72C κἂν εἰ πολλαὶ καὶ παντοδαπαί εἰσιν, ἕν γέ τι
εἶδος
ἄπασαι
ἔχουσιν : it is extremely common in Aristotle. The ἄν shows that the idiom must have arisen
from cases where the apodosis contained a verb with which ἄν could go, e.g. κἂν
εἰ ἀποθνῄσκοι, εὖ
ἔχοι . Such cases as Symp. 185Aκἂν εἴ
τις—ἐξαπατηθείη, καλὴ
ἡ ἀπάτη, where the verb after
εἰ is in the optative, preserve traces of the origin of
the construction.
56. τὸν τρόπον τῆς πράξεως τοῦ
μισθοῦ
. Ar. Eth. Nic. IX. 2 . 1164 a .
24ὅπερ
φασὶ καὶ Πρωταγόραν ποιεῖν· ὅτε γὰρ
διδάξειεν ἁδήροτε, τιμῆσαι τὸν μαθόντα ἐκέλευεν ὅσου δοκεῖ ἄξια
ἐπίστασθαι καὶ ἐλάμβανε τοσοῦτον . This is more than Plato says:
see next note.
58. ἀποδέδωκεν
: but κατέθηκεν (gnomic aorist) two lines lower
down. It is not necessary to reject
ἀποδέδωκεν (with Sauppe and Schanz) or to read ἀπέδωκεν (with Kroschel and Kral). ἀποδέδωκεν is hardly to be explained as a
gnomic perfect (Goodwin), certain examples of which are rare, if not
unknown, but is to be taken in its natural sense: ‘if he prefers, he has
already paid . . . if not etc.’: this is also Heindorf's view. Unless the
pupil had paid in advance, Protagoras left the fee to
his own conscience and (according to his own account, ὥστε καὶ αὐτῷ
δοκεῖν τῷ μαθόντι ) generally fared better, even though
(if Diog. Laert. IX. 52 may be trusted) his fee was 100 minae. If Protagoras
made no bad debts, he escapes the censure of Plato in Gorg. 519C, where it is said that, if teachers
of δικαιοσύνη do not receive their fees,
it only shows that they have failed to teach their subject and deserve no
fees.
67. τῶνδε
. Protagoras is
more encouraging than Socrates in 319E
CHAPTER XVII
Here begins Socrates' criticism of Protagoras' speech. The
question is first raised—Is Virtue one, or many? The connection
between this question and the speech of Protagoras is that if
Virtue has a unity in knowledge, it is teachable, otherwise not:
see Introduction, p. xviii.
2. ἐπιδειξάμενος.
ἐπιδείκνυσθαιand
ἐπίδειξις are regularly used of a Sophistic display: e.g. Gorg. 447Aπολλὰ
γὰρ
καὶ καλὰ
Γοργίας ἡμῖν ὀλίγον πρότερον ἐπεδείξατο, Crat. 384Bτὴν
πεντηκοντάδραχμον ἐπίδειξιν. ἐπιδείκνυμιis also sometimes used in
the same way, e.g. Euthyd. 274Dand below, 347B in
320C above ἀλλ’ ἐπίδειξον
is intended to suggest this meaning, which comes out more clearly in ἐπιδείξω two lines below.
2. ἐπὶ μὲν πολὺν χρόνον
goes with ἔβλεπον
and ἔτι with
κεκηλημένος .
7. ὦ παῖ Ἀπολλοδώρου
: with mock solemnity: so 335Dὦ
παῖ Ἱππονίκου , Rep. II. 368Aὦ
παῖδες
ἐκείνου τἀνδρός.
8. ὦδε
in the sense of δεῦρο is noted as a Platonic idiom by the
lexicographers. The usage is found in tragedy, but no other example is
quoted from Plato.
16. τάχ’ ἂν καὶ τοιούτους λόγους
: καί goes
with τοιούτους —‘even such’, ‘just such’: τούτου should not be inserted (with Sauppe,
Schanz, Kral) before
τοιούτους .
18. ὥσπερ βιβλία
.
Hermann wished to read οὐχ ὥσπερ
βιβλία , since the orators do make a speech when spoken
to: but the point is that like books they do not answer the questions asked,
or put questions themselves, as the true dialectician does:
cf. Phaedr. 275Dδεινὸν
γάρ
που—τοῦτ’ ἔχει γραφή, καὶ ὡς
ἀληθῶς ὅμοιον ζωγπαφίᾳ. καὶ γὰπ τὰ ἐκείνης ἔκγονα ἕστηκε μὲν ὡς
ζῶντα, ἐὰν δ’ ἀνέπῃ τι, σεμνῶς ράνυ σιγᾷ. ταὐτὸν δὲ καὶ οἱ λόγοι·
δόξαις μὲν ἂν ὥς τι φπονοῦντας αὐτοὺς λέγειν, ἐὰν δέ τι ἔπῃ τῶν
λεγομένων βουλόμενος μαθεῖν, ἔν τι σημαίνει μόνον ταὐτὸν ἀεί:
below, 347E and Hipp. Min.365Dτὸν
μὲν
Ὅμηρον—ἐάσωμεν,
ἐρειδὴ καὶ ἀδύνατον ἐρανεπέσθαι, τί ροτε νοῶν ταῦτα ἐροίησε τὰ
ἔπη . A similar objection applies to laws: see
Polit. 294A (quoted above on
326D .
20. ὥσπερ τὰ χαλκία
.
The MSS. have
χαλκεῖα , but (as Kroschel points out) in Crat. 430Aεἴ τι
χαλκίον κινήσειε
κρούσας. χαλκεῖαwould mean ‘smithies’.
23. δόλιχον κατατείνουσι
τοῦλόγου.
δολιχόνis the reading of B and T, but
(1) the adjective δολιχός seems to be
exclusively poetic, the word surviving in Plato's time only in the form δόλιχος for δολιχὸς
δρόμος (cf. for the change of accent
κάκη and κακή, Φαῖδρος
and φαιδρός and the like); (2) δολιχὸς τοῦ λόγου would be a rare
construction, though not without parallels, e.g. πολλὴν
τῆς χώρας in Xen. Cyrop. III. 2. 2 and τής μαρίλης
συχνήν in Ar.
Ach. 350: ἀμήχανον τῆς
εὐδαιμονίας of Apol. 41Cis different; (3) after the
expressive simile which we have had, ‘a long speech’ sounds very weak. On
the other hand δόλιχος
τοῦ λόγου , the suggestion of Stephanus, is strongly
supported by 335E where Socrates compares
Protagoras, because he plays the ῥήτωρ and
not the dialectician, to a δολιχοδρόμος : νῦν δ’ ἐστὶν
ὥσρεπ ἂν εἰ δέοιό μου Κπίσωνι τῷ Ἱμεπαίῳ δπομεῖ ἀκμάζοντι
ἕρεσθαι ἢ τῶν δολιχοδπόμων τῳ ἢ τῶν ἡμεποδπόμων διαθεῖν τε καὶ
ἕπεσθαι , and the editors quote a number of parallels to the
metaphor, such as Plut. Phoc. 23. 3 καλῶς
ἔφη πρὸς τὸ στάδιον,
τὸν δὲ δόλιχον τοῦ πολέμου φοβοῦμαι ; Epicrates in Kock's Com. Att. Frag.II, 283 ἐπεὶ δὲ δόλιχον τοῖς ἔτεσιν ἤδη τρέχει , Ar. Clouds, 430τῶν Ἑλλήνων εἶναί με λέγειν ἑκατὸν σταδίοισιν
ἄριστονand Frogs, 91 πλεῖν
ἢ σταδίῳ λαλίστερα , Eupolis (Kock, I, 281) (of Pericles) ὁπότε παρέλθοι δ’ ὥσπερ
ἁγαθοὶ δρομῆς ἐκ δέκα
ποδῶν ᾕρει λέγων τοὺς ῥήτορας . Dropping the sporting
metaphor we may say ‘spin out a league of verbiage against
you’. The δόλιχος was 24 στάδια , the
στάδιον being covered 12 times both ways: cf. Pind. Ol.
III. 33.
25. ὡς αὐτὰ δηλοῖ
. The
MSS. read αὐτά , which most recent editors
change to αὐτό with Stephanus, regarding
the idiom as analogous to that in
324Aαὐτό σε διδάξει , but
in this idiomatic use of αὐτό the verb is
generally, if not always, in the future. αὐτό
που λέγει in Ar.
Eq. 204and the cases quoted by Blaydes in
loc. are different, since in each case
αὐτό has a definite antecedent expressed. ὡς αὐτὰ δηλοῖ is simply ‘as things
themselves’, i.e. ‘as facts show’: the reference is to the speech which
Protagoras has just delivered. Cf. Ar. Pol. IV. 12. 1331 a . 21 δῆλον ὡς αὐτὰ
προκαλεῖται κτλ. and (with Heindorf) Xen. Cyr. VI.
1. 7 οὐκ οἶδα μὲν ἔγωγε, εἴ τι δεῖ λόγων,
ὅπου αὐτὰ τὰ ἔργα
δείκνυσι τὸ κράτιστον .
29. εἴ μοι ἀποκρίναιο τόδε
.
The optative follows σμικροῦ
τινὸς ἐνδεής εἰμι πάντ’ ἔχειν as virtually equivalent to πάντ’ ἂν
ἔχοιμι (Heindorf).
30. εἴπερ ἄλλῳ τῳ ἀνθρώπων
πειθοίμην ἄν, καὶ σοὶ
πείθομαι
. The fullness of
expression is no doubt intentional: Socrates politely dwells upon his
compliment. The objections to the syntax are twofold: (1) ἄν with the optative in protasis; (2) εἴπερ (in clauses of this kind) with its
verb expressed. Cases of the potential optative in the protasis are given by
Goodwin, M.T. p. 192 (e.g. Xen. Mem. I. 5. 3 εἴ γε μηδὲ δοῦλον ἀκρατῆ
δεξαίμεθ’ ἄν, πῶς οὐκ ἄξιον αὐτόν γε φυλάξασθαι τοιοῦτον
γενέσθαι; ): for
εἴπερ with verb expressed Heindorf cites Meno, 98Bἀλλ’
εἴπερ τι ἄλλο φαίην ἂν εἰδέναι( ὀλίγα
δ’ ἂν φαίην ) ἓν δ’ οὖν καὶ
τοῦτο ἐκείνων θείην ἂν ὧν οἶδα . Socrates' νῦν δὲ πέπεισμαι (hardly serious) in 328E is not inconsistent with πειθοίμην ἄν , since he at once qualifies
his assent by πλὴν σμικρόν τί μοι
ἐμποδών : it is sufficiently represented here by καὶ σοὶ
πείθομαι . We therefore agree with Heindorf, Wayte, and
Turner in retaining the MSS. reading: other editors mostly read either εἴπερ ἄλλω? τῳ ἀνθρώπων πειθοίμην ἂν καὶ
σοί , or drop πειθοίμην ἄν
and retain καὶ σοὶ
πείθομαι .
33. ἔλεγες γάρ
: 332C
δικαιοσύνη and αἰδώς are
looked on as two distinct virtues.
34. πολλαχοῦ
: 324E325A
cf. 323A and E.
CHAPTER XVIII
Socrates elicits from Protagoras (1) that while Virtue as a whole is one, the
single virtues differ from each other and from the whole like the parts of the
face, that it is possible to possess one virtue without possessing all, and that
in all there are five virtues, justice, temperance, holiness, bravery, wisdom,
of which the last is greatest (
329D330A ; (2) that the virtues
differ from each other not only in themselves, but in their δύναμις ( 330A330B ; (3) that justice is just, and holiness
holy ( 330B330E
. The refutation of Protagoras does not begin till the next chapter.
3. προσώπου·
προσώπουis treated as an abstract
conception —‘parts of face’: cf. ψυχή in 313Cκάπηλος
τῶν ἀγωγίμων ἀφ’
ὧν ψυχὴ τρέφεται , Rep. IV. 435Cεἰς
φαῦλόν γε αὖ—σκῶμμα
ἐμρερτώκαμεν ρεπὶ ψυχῆς, εἴτε ἔχει τὰ τπία εἴδη ταῦτα ἐν αὑτῆ?
εἴτε
μή. In Aristotelian language, the face is ἀνομοιομερές .
6. ἀλλήλων καὶ τοῦ ὅλου
: so the MSS. and Heindorf (who suggests ἀλλήλων
τε καὶ τοῦ ὅλου ): recent editors mostly omit either ἀλλήλων or τὰ
ἕτερα
τῶν ἑτέρων. τὰ ἕτερα τῶν ἑτέρων should be taken quite
generally, τῶν ἑτέρων (and thus, by
implication, τὰ ἕτερα ) having its meaning
defined by the clause ἀλλήλων καὶ
τοῦ ὅλου. τὰ ἕτερα τῶν ἑτέρων could be dropped without
injury to the sense, but hardly ἀλλήλων :
without ἀλλήλων Plato would have written οὐδὲν διαφέρει τὸ ἕτερον τοῦ ἑτέρου καὶ
τοῦ ὅλου : cf. 330Aἆρ’ οὖν οὕτω καὶ τὰ τῆς ἀρετῆς μόρια οὐκ ἔστιν τὸ
ἕτερον
οἷον τὸ ἕτερον (not τὰ ἕτερα
οἷα
τὰ ἕτερα ); and so 330E331A331D349B359A
10.
μεταλαμβάνουσιν—μορίων—ἄλλο.
μεταλαμβάνειν, μετέχειν, μεταδιδόναιand
the like take an accusative of the part as well as a genitive of the whole. μεταλαμβάνειν μόριον = ‘to
receive a part of a whole’: μεταλαμβάνειν
μορίου = ‘to receive a part of a part’.
18. ὥσπερ τὰ τοῦ προσώπου
: we have placed the mark of interrogation
before
ὥσπερ : see on ἄλλο γε
in 311E The sentence ὥσπερ τὰ τοῦ προσώπου οὐκ ἔστιν ὀφθαλμὸς οἷον τὰ
ὦτα thus corresponds exactly to ἆρ’
οὖν οὕτω καὶ τὰ
τῆς ἀρετῆς μόρια οὐκ ἔστιν τὸ
ἕτερον οἷον τὸ ἕτερον . For τὰ
τοῦ
προσώπου followed by its parts in the same case cf. below 349Aἐκεῖνα—τὰ
μέν—τὰ δέ and Theaet. 151Aοἷς
ὅταν
πάλιν ἔλθωσι—ἐνίοις μὲν—ἀποκωλύει
συνεῖναι, ἐνίοις δὲ ἐᾷ. For the asyndeton regular in
explanatory and ampliative clauses see note on Apol. 22A.
25. ἀλλ’ οὕτως, ἔφη, ἔχει, ὦ
Σώκρατες
. So T: B has only ἀλλ’
οὕτως, ἔφη . The longer form of answer is more suited to
Protagoras' style.
31. ἡ δικαιοσύνη πρᾶγμά τί ἐστιν
. Cf. below 332Aἀφροσύνην
τι καλεῖς;
332C358D Plato frequently begins a
train of reasoning in this way.
32. καὶ ἐμοί
: so T: B
has καί μοι. καὶ ἐμοί seems slightly better than κἀμοί , as
forming a more effective balance to ἐμοὶ
μέν in the same line.
33. ὦ Πρωταγόρα τε καὶ Σώκρατες
: but ἐμέ τε καὶ σέ
as Greek usage requires. Protagoras is addressed first on the principle seniores
priores and honoris causa ; contrast 311D and cf.
353A (Kroschel).
34. εἴπετον
: contrast 311Dεἰπέ
μοι, ὦ Σώκρατές τε καὶ Ἱππόκρατες , where see note. The
dual gives prominence to the notion in κοινῇ
σκεψώμεθα (l. 29). The connection of this part of the argument
with the rest is this: in 330A330B it is said that no one part of
virtue is οἷον τὸ ἕτερον , e.g. that δικαιοσύνη is not οἷον
ὁσιότης (major premise); here it is said that δικαιοσύνη is δίκαιον,
ὁσιότης ὅσιον (minor premise): from which the conclusion (in the
next chapter) is drawn that δικαιοσύνη is
not ὅσιον , nor ὁσιότης
δίκαιον . This stage of the argument is therefore neither
‘tautological nor unmeaning’, as Grote (quoted by Turner) asserts.
45. οἷον ἀνόσιον εἷναι ἢ οἷον ὅσιον
. Notice the identification of the ‘not ὅσιον ’ with
ἀνόσιον : see below on 331A
47. εὐφήμει, ὦ ἄνθρωπε.
ὦ ἄνθρωπεis somewhat brusque: so ὦ ἄνθρωποι in
314D above. ἄνθρωπε without ὦ would border on rudeness: e.g. Gorg. 518Cἴσως ἂν
οὖν
ἠγανάκτεις, εἴ σοι
ἔλεγον, ἄνθρωπε, οὐδὲν ἐπαΐεις περὶ γυμναστικῆς. εὐφήμειis
frequent to express shocked surprise, real or feigned: e.g. Rep.
I. 329CMeno, 91B( Ἡράκλεις,
εὐφήμει, ὦ Σώκρατες ), Gorg. 469A, Euthyd. 301A.
CHAPTER XIX
Socrates endeavours to refute Protagoras and to show that Justice and Holiness
are identical. If ὁσιότης is not οἷον δικαιοσύνη , nor δικαιοσύνη
οἷον ὁσιότης , it will follow (says Socrates) that ὁσιότης is ἄδικον
and δικαιοσύνη ἀνόσιον . This is absurd, and
therefore ὁσιότης is
δίκαιον and δικαιοσύνη is ὅσιον . Protagoras will only admit that there is a
certain likeness between the two virtues.
3. τὰ τῆς ἀρετῆς μόρια
. B and
T omit the article, which can hardly be dispensed with, since the assertion was
made not of parts of virtue, but of the, i.e. all the
parts: see 330Aἆρ’ οὖνοὕτω
καὶ τὰ τῆς ἀρετῆς μόρια οὐκ ἔστιν τὸ ἕτερον οἷον τὸ ἕτερον—;
ἢ δῆλα δὴ ὅτι οὕτως ἔχει κτλ. ;
4. οὕτως—ὡς.
ὥστεfor ὡς
would be more usual: cf. Rep. II.
365Dἐξ ὧν τὰ μὲν πείσομεν, τὰ δὲ
βιασόμεθα,
ὡς πλεονεκτοῦντες
δίκην μὴ διδόναι . Perhaps the ὡς
of Phaedo, 108Eπέπεισμαι—ὡς
πρῶτον μέν—μηδὲν αὐτῇ δεῖν μήτε ἀέρος κτλ.is the same in kind: cf. the
old English ‘so as’. Here οὕτως—ὡς with the
infinitive is natural in view of τοιοῦτον
οἷον in the vicinity: 330C
and D.
9-10. σὺ—σός:
notice the mock asperity: I expected better things of
you.
14. οὐκ ἄρα ἐστίν
: the
interrogation begins here and ἄρα is
illative.
15. ἀλλ’ οἷον μὴ ὅσιον
.
So far we are entitled to go, but in τὸ δὲ
ἀνόσιον (l. 17) the contrary and the contradictory are
confused, as is frequently the case in Plato's dialogues: see note on Euthyphr. 7A
θεομισές, where are cited Alcib. II, 138D
ff., Rep. IV. 437C; add Phileb. 48B
ff., where φθόνος is said to be joy at a
friend's misfortune because envy of a friend's success implies joy at his
ill-luck (cf. ibid. 50A), and Euthyd. 276Bοὐκοῦν
εἰ
μὴ σοφοί, ἀμαθεῖς; πάνυ γε. Plato was not unaware of the
rules of logic in this matter (see Symp. 201E-202A), but the tendency of Greek
thought and life was not to rest content with negations; whence words like ἀνωφελής, ἄφθονος acquired a positive
significance, and Solon could enact ( Ἀθηναίων
πολιτεία ch. 8 ad fin. ) ὃς ἂν στασιαζούσης τῆς πόλεως μὴ τιθῆται τὰ ὅπλα
μηδὲ μεθ’ ἑτέρων, ἄτιμον εἶναι καὶ τῆς πόλεως μὴ μετέχειν
. Part of the argument in the next chapter suffers from the same flaw: see
on 332A l. 3.
16. ἀλλ’ ἄδικον ἄρα
:
Heindorf's emendation for ἀλλὰ
δίκαιον ἄρα , the reading of the best MSS., which τὸ δὲ ἀνόσιον proves to be wrong and shows
how to correct. Heindorf's correction was afterwards confirmed by a Paris
MS. ἄρα is illative. For τὸ μέν unexpressed (the words are
equivalent to ἀλλὰ τὸ μὲν ἄδικον ἄρα )
before τὸ δέ see on 330Aἄλλο, τὸ
δὲ
ἄλλο .
20. ὅτι
is
‘because’, not ‘that’: see note on l. 22 below.
21. δικαιότης ὁσιότητι
. Socrates gives the words the same
termination to suggest their closer likeness (‘justness’ to ‘holiness’); δικαιότης is found also
in Gorg. 508Aas a balance to κοσμιότητα . Plato was fond of this suffix
and coined by it the word ποιότηςTheaet. 182A.
22. καὶ μάλιστα πάντων—οἷον
δικαιοσύνη
. Kroschel objects to the emphasis, and
inclines to doubt the genuineness of this clause. If
ὅτι in l. 20 is translated as ‘because’ and not as ‘that’, the
difficulty disappears. ταὐτὰ
ἂν ταῦτα in l. 20 thus means simply that δικαιοσύνη is
ὄσιον and ὁσιότης
δίκαιον (ll. 18-19), which is the meaning also assigned to ταὐτὰ ἂν ταῦτα by Protagoras in his reply
(ll. 25 ff.). Socrates (for Protagoras) will reply that δικαιοσύνη is ὅσιον
and ὁσιότης
δίκαιον for two main reasons: (1) because δικαιότης is the same
as ὁσιότης —this he does not much insist
on—or because
δικαιότης is ὅ τιὁμοιότατον
ὁσιότητι —this he insists on more: (2) because δικαιοσύνη is οἷον
ὁσιότης and ὁσιότης οἷον δικαιοσύνη
—this he insists on most of all ( μάλιστα πάντων
), and with reason, because it expressly refutes Protagoras' assertion in 330A B. On the other hand if ὅτι is translated as ‘that’, Kroschel's
objections can hardly be got over—viz. that ἤτοι
ταὐτόν—δικαιοσύνη is not the same as
Socrates' reply on his own behalf; that the words are ignored both by
Protagoras in his reply and by Socrates himself in 333B and that the emphasis of μάλιστα πάντων is strained and unnatural.
26. ἁπλοῦν
: opposed to ἀλλά τί μοι δοκεῖ ἐν αὐτῶ? διάφορον
εἶναι in 27. Plato uses ἁπλοῦν
, as opposed to διπλοῦν, διάφορον,
σύνθετον, πεπλεγμένον, ποικίλον and the like, of that
which is uniform, simple, true without any difference or qualifications:
Bonitz in Hermes, II (1867), 307 ff.
32. τὸ δ’ ἐμέ τε καὶ σὲ τοῦτο λέγω·
τοῦτο(cf. l. 31) belongs to the τὸ δ’ ἐμέ τε καὶ σέ and not to λέγω in the usual sense of τοῦτο λέγω ‘I mean this’.
36. τὸ γὰρ λευκὸν τῷ μέλανι
. Anaxagoras went so far as to
say that snow was black (because it is still water, though congealed):
Ritter and Preller, § 128, n. b.
37. ὅπῃ
: an old emendation
for ὃ μή .
42. ταῦτα
:
the parts of the face.
45. κἂν πάνυ σμικρὸν ἔχῃ τὸ ὅμοιον
. This (the MSS. reading) is successfully
defended by Kroschel. The emphasis is on the first part of the sentence (‘it
is not right to call what has some likeness like—any more than to call what
has some unlikeness unlike—even if the likeness be very small’), to which
accordingly κἂν πάνυ σμικρὸν
ἔχῃ τὸ ὅμοιον reverts: compare Socrates' reply, which says
nothing of τὸ ἀνόμοιον , in the next
sentence. The German editors (except Cron and Kroschel) either reject τὸ ὅμοιον (Schanz, Sauppe, Bertram) or read τὸ
ἀνόμοιον ἢ τὸ ὅμοιον (Heindorf) or reject altogether the
words οὐδὲ τὰ ἀνόμοιόν τι ἔχοντα ἀνόμοια
(Kral).
CHAPTER XX
Without establishing more surely the identity of justice and holiness,
Socrates now seeks to prove the identity of temperance
and wisdom, and begins to discuss the relation between temperance and
justice.
The proof that temperance and wisdom are the same is briefly as follows: ἀφροσύνη is the opposite of
σοφία , and also of
σωφροσύνη : but a thing can have but one opposite: therefore σοφία and σωφροσύνη
are identical. It is admitted at once that ἀφροσύνη
and σοφία are opposites: the proof that ἀφροσύνη is ἐναντίον
σωφροσύνῃ is of some length and (as well as the assertion that a thing
can have but one opposite) assumes the identity of the contrary and
contradictory. The usual sense of ἀφροσύνη
(intellectual folly) and the meaning natural from its derivation (as the
opposite of σωφροσύνη ) are also—as is natural
to one who holds that vice is ignorance—identified, and the whole argument is
unnecessarily spun out.
1. ἀφροσύνην τι καλεῖς
. See above on
330C
3. πότερον δὲ ὅταν
.
Here begins the proof that σωφροσύνη is ἐναντίον
ἀφροσύνῃ . (1) τὸ ὀρθῶς
and ὠφελίμως
πράττειν is σωφρονεῖν , and σωφροσύνη is that
by which one σωφρονεῖ ; (2) τὸ μὴ
ὀρθῶς πράττειν is ἀφρόνως
πράττειν and οὐ σωφρονεῖν
: from which it is inferred that ἀφρόνως πράττειν
is the opposite of σωφρόνως
πράττειν , or (as is worked out at inordinate length) that ἀφροσύνη is the opposite of σωφροσύνη . In equating μὴ ὀρθῶς with ἀφρόνως
πράττειν in (2) Socrates again confounds contradictory and
contrary: see on 331A
5. ἢ τοὐναντίον
. So
Stallbaum, after Heindorf's ἢ τοὐναντίον
πράττειν : the MSS. have ἢ εἰ
τοὐναντίον ἔπραττον , which is faulty both because it in no way
corresponds to the answer σωφρονεῖν and
because εἰ with the imperfect is here
unsuitable. In ἢ τοὐναντίον it will be
observed that Socrates already allows no middle position between σωφρονεῖν and its opposite: see above on l.
3.
17. φέρε δή
. From here to
l. 24 Socrates tries to prove that a thing can have but one ἐναντίον . This is true only if we confine ἐναντίον to the meaning of ‘contradictorily
opposite’ throughout, e.g. if we are always content merely to assert that
the ἐναντίον of
καλόν is μὴ
καλόν : as soon as we say that its
ἐναντίον is αἰσχρόν we have
given to the thing two opposites (one of them multiform)—since μὴ
καλόν is not αἰσχρόν but
may be anything in the whole world except
καλόν . This part of the argument is therefore also
vitiated by neglecting the difference between contrary and contradictory
terms.
24. ἀναλογισώμεθα
:
of reckoning up and reflecting as in
Rep. I. 330E X. 618C.
30-1. ὑπὸ σωφροσύνης—ὑπὸ ἀφροσύνης.
This has not been admitted in so many words, but with σωφροσύνῃ and
ἀφροσύνῃ for ὑπὸ σωφροσύνης
and ὑπὸ ἀφροσύνης : 332B l. II: cf. C, l. 16.
37. ἔμπροσθεν
: 332A
41. τό
does not belong to ἕν but to the clause ἓν ἑνὶ μόνον
ἐναντίον εἶναι : cf. τὸ εἰ
βούλει
τοῦτο in 331Cἐκεῖνον refers to ch. XVIII.
46. οὐ πάνυ
μουσικῶς—συναρμόττουσιν
. ‘In his lenem
agnosco Sophistae irrisionem, qui supra §43’ (
326B ‘ πάντα
τὸν
βίον τοῦ ἀνθρώπου εὐρυθμίας τε καὶ εὐαρμοστίας δεῖσθαι
dixisset’, Heindorf.
49. πλείω δὲ μή
. B reads πλείοσιν, Τ πλείοσι : πλείω is a suggestion of Heindorf's,
adopted by most editors. The nominatives ἓν
μόνον in l. 48 and σοφία
and σωφροσύνη in 50 are strongly in favour
of πλείω . If
πλείοσιν is retained, it must be regarded as a blemish in Plato's
style.
56. τἀ λοιπά
. If δικαιοσύνη =
ὁσιότης and
σωφροσύνη = σοφία it
remains to identify either δικαιοσύνη or ὁσιότης with either
σωφροσύνη or σοφία in order to
prove the identity of these four virtues. Socrates begins to prove that δικαιοσύνη =
σωφροσύνη .
57. ὅτι ἀδικεῖ
: ὅτι (cf. below,
333D and Parm. 155E) is equivalent to κατὰ τοῦτο ὅ : cf. Rep. I. 340Dἐπεὶ
αὐτίκα ἰατρὸν
καλεῖς σὺ τὸν ἐξαμαπτάνοντα ρεπὶ τοὺς κάμνοντας κατ’ αὐτὸ
τοῦτο ὃ ἐξαμαρτάνει; ὅ τιthe relative and ὅτι the conjunction shade into one another
here. There is much to be said for Cron's view that the words should be
written alike: see on Apology, Appendix II, p. 123.
59. πολλοί γέ φασιν
.
In Rep. I. 348Bff., Thrasymachus asserts that ἀδικία is εὐβουλία,
ἀρετή, καλόν and ἰσχυρόν :
compare also Polus in Gorg. 469Bff. Notice that Protagoras' own opinion —that
ἀδικία is not compatible with
σωφροσύνη —makes for the identification of
δικαιοσύνη and
σωφροσύνη .
62. τὸν τῶν πολλῶν
: on
account of the τῶν here, Heindorf wished
to insert οἱ before πολλοί in l. 59, but such a view could
hardly be said to be held by the majority: cf. Rep. I. 348Eεἰ γὰρ
λυσιτελεῖν μὲν τὴν ἀδικίαν ἐτίθεσο, κακίαν μέντοι ἢ αἰσχπὸν αὐτὸ
ὡμολόγεις εἶναι ὥσρεπ ἄλλοι τινές, εἴχομεν ἄν τι λέγειν κατὰ τὰ
νομιζόμενα λέγοντες κτλ.As Sauppe points out, the article τῶν refers only to the above-mentioned πολλοί . With the situation cf. Rep. VII. 527Eff. σκόπει
οὖν αὐτόθεν πρὸς ποτέρους διαλέγει· ἢ
οὐ ρπὸς οὐδετέπους ἀλλὰ σαυτοῦ ἕνεκα τὸ μέγιστον ροιεῖ τοὺς
λόγους,
φθονοῖς μὴν οὐδ’ ἂν ἄλλω? εἴ τίς τι δύναιτο ἀπ’ αὐτῶν ὄνασθαι
;
63. εἴτ’ οὖν—εἴτε
:
see on Apol. 34E.
CHAPTER XXI
Before Socrates has completed his proof that
σωφροσύνη and δικαιοσύνη are
identical, Protagoras takes occasion to deliver an irrelevant though carefully
constructed harangue on ἀγαθά .
1. ἐκαλλωπίζετο
.
Cf. Phaedr. 236Dπαῦσαι
πρός με καλλωπιζόμενος· σχεδὸν γὰρ ἔχω ὃ εἰπὼν ἀναγκάσω σε λέγειν;
so also τρυφᾶν , cf. Euthyphr.
11 E ἐπειδὴ δέ μοι δοκεῖς σὺ τρυφᾶν, αὐτός
σοι ξυμπροθυμήσομαι , where see note.
5. ἔστω
. Protagoras has
already disclaimed this view in 333B
7. ὅτι ἀδικοῦσιν
:
Hirschig suggested ὅ τι ἀδικοῦσιν , but
see on 333B Schanz rejects the words, but
without sufficient reason.
8. εὖ πράττουσιν ἀδικοῦντες.
εὖis here primarily of success, and κακῶς of failure, but the collocation of εὖ πράττειν with
ἀδικεῖν is intended to suggest that the view which Protagoras is
defending is a paradox. Plato frequently makes use of the double sense (as
we should call it; but see on Euthyphr, 3A) of εὖ
πράττειν, εὖ ζῆν and the like, to imply that the virtuous life is
the happy one: e.g. Alcib. I, 116B ff.; Rep. I. 353Eff.; Charm. 172A,
173D; cf. Euthyd. 281C.
9. λέγεις οὖν ἀγαθά
.
Socrates proceeds to elucidate the definition of
εὖ in εὖ πράττειν .
14. ἀγωνιᾶν καὶ
παρατετάχθαι
. The martial metaphor in the
desiderative ἀγωνιᾶν is carried on by παρατετάχθαι , which is the MSS. reading,
and means literally ‘to be set in array’, cf. Thuc. IV. 43. 3 οὗτοι γὰρ παρατεταγμένοι ἦσαν ἔσχατοι . For
the metaphorical use cf. Rep. III. 399Bἐν
πᾶσι
τούτοις παρατεταγμένως καὶ καρτερούντως ἀμυνουμένου τὴν τύχην.
The whole clause describes the outward demeanour of Protagoras, which causes
Socrates to fear an imminent personal conflict. Kock's παρατετάσθαι , accepted by Schanz, does not
suit, since παρατετάσθαι
means ‘to be tired, worn out’, e.g. Euthyd. 303Bκαὶ
γελῶντε καὶ κροτοῦντε . . . ὀλίγου παρετάθησαν, cf. Ar. Clouds, 213. It is
noteworthy that συντεταγμένως and συντεταμένως are frequently found as
variants in Platonic MSS.
19. οὐδαμῶς, ἔφη
. The
argument is here broken off, and not (in its present form) again resumed. If
Socrates had continued, Protagoras would doubtless have asserted that what
is ὠφέλιμον for man is for
himἀγαθόν . The argument has
therefore been: σωφρονεῖν , it is said, is ἀδικεῖν . But
σωφρονεῖν = εὖ
φρονεῖν = εὖ βουλεύεσθαιif (but only if) εὖ
πράττειν (i.e. ὠφέλιμα
πράττειν ) accompanies
εὐβουλία . In other words ὠφέλιμα
πράττειν = ἀδικεῖν is the stage
which we have reached—a thesis which it is the object of the
Republic and of a large part of the Gorgias
to refute.
πολλὰ οἶδ’ ἅ
. The speech which follows may be
from some work by Protagoras (so recently Zeller in the Archiv
für
Geschichte der Philosophie, V, 2, 177), perhaps his περὶ ἀρετῶν , mentioned by Diog. Laert. IX.
8. 55 (since ἀρετή is a general word
for excellence). Zeller points out that just as the notion ‘true’ was
conceived by Protagoras (in his πάντων μέτρον
ἄνθρωπος ) as relative, so here the notion ‘good’ is
represented as relative and varying with that to which it is relative.
20. ἀνθρώποις μὲν—ὠφέλιμα
: ἀνθρώποις
μέν has no antithesis expressed: were the antitheses expressed in
full, the sentence would be very cumbrous, running somewhat as follows: ἔγωγε πολλὰ οἶδ’ ἃ ἀνθρώποις μὲν <τὰ
μὲν>
ἀνωφελῆ
ἐστί, καὶ σιτία—μυπία, <τοῖς δὲἄλλοις ζῴοις καὶ φυτοῖς
ὠφέλιμα>,
τὰ δέ γε ὠφέλιμα <τοῖς ἀνθρώποις, τοῖς δὲ ἄλλοις ἀνωφελῆ>
. For μέν without a balancing clause see
on τὸ μὲν καταγελασθῆναι in Euthyphr. 3C, and on 330A above for τὰ
δέ without a preceding τὰ μέν.
ἀνωφελῆ is ‘hurtful’, as frequently: see above on οἷον
μὴ ὅσιον in 331A With
Protagoras' classification of
ὠφέλιμα—ἀνωφελῆ—οὐδέτερα cf. Gorg. 467Eἆρ’ οὖν
ἔστιν
τι τῶν ὄντων, ὃ οὐχὶ ἤτοι ἀγαθόν γ’ ἐστὶν ἢ κακὸν ἢ μεταξὺ
τούτων οὔτε ἀγαθὸν οὔτε κακόν(where see Thompson's note)
and below, 351D
23. οὐδενί
: Schanz follows
Naber in reading οὐδέσι against the MSS.
both here and in Euthyd. 302C. The plural would be more
appropriate here, but what is denied of all individuals is
denied of the species, and the dative plural of
οὐδείς seems to lack authority.
27. εἰ δ’ ἐθέλοις—πάντα ἀπόλλυσιν
. Heindorf suggests εἰ
δ’ ἐθέλεις —the indicative being generally used in this phrase,
e.g. Alcib. I, 122B εἰ
δ’
αὖ ἐθέλεις εἰς πλούτους ἀποβλέψαι κτλ.,
αἰσχυνθείης ἂν ἐπὶ σαυτῷ —but Goodwin, M.T.
p. 188, § 500, quotes a precisely similar example from Thuc. II. 39. 5 καίτοι εἰ
π(αθυμίᾳ μᾶλλον ἢ ρόνων μελέτῃ—ἐθέλοιμεν κινδυνεύειν,
ρεπιγίγνεται
ἡμῖν κτλ. In both examples the present in the apodosis
contains a reference to the future.
τὴν δυσχέρειαν—ὄψοις
. The nausea is of
course that felt by a sick person at the smell of food: so far there is
therefore no reason for holding
ῥινῶν to be corrupt and reading
χυμῶν (as Kroschel formerly read), still less εὐκρινῶν with Bergk. But it is not clear
how oil could thus prevent nausea, nor does there seem to be any
parallel among the ancients to such a statement. It is known that the
ancients (like many modern peoples) used oil in cooking much as we use
butter (see Blümner's
Privataltherthümer, p. 228), but the present passage seems
rather to point to the use of some kind of fragrant oil sprinkled on the
food after it was cooked. The Greeks were at all events not unfamiliar
with the use of scents in banqueting: see Xen.
Symp. II. 2 ff. Kroschel thinks Plato is
making fun of Protagoras by putting into his mouth the word ‘
ῥινῶν pro πικρῶν vel χυμῶν ’, but this view will hardly command
assent.
CHAPTER XXII
This and the next three chapters form a kind of interlude. In
this chapter Socrates, protesting against Protagoras' long replies,
remembers an engagement and is about to go, and Callias
beseeches him to stay.
9. καὶ βραχυτέρας ποίει
.
Hirschig would reject the words, but they explain the metaphor in σύντεμνε : see on 314Aκυβεύῃς
τε καὶ κινδυνεύῃς .
22. ὡς ὁ ἀντιλέγων—οὕτω
διελεγόμην
. Asyndeton is frequent in such sentences:
cf. Rep. II. 359B(cited by Heindorf) εἰ τοιόνδε ποιήσαιμεν τῇ διανοίᾳ, δόντες
ἐξουσίαν—εἶτ’ ἐπακολουθήσαιμεν κτλ. See on 311E
24. ἐγένετο Πρωταγόρου ὄνομα
. With ἐγένετο
ὄνομα (for which Kroschel reads ἐλέγετο
ὄνομα ) cf. Apol. 20Dτί ποτ’
ἔστιν
τοῦτο ὃ ἐμοὶ πεποίηκε τό τε ὄνομα καὶ τὴν διαβολήν: γίγνεσθαι is the usual passive to ποιεῖν . With the sentence generally cf.
Euthyphr. 4E-5A, where Euthyphro says οὐδὲν
γὰρ ἄν μου ὄφελος εἴη, ὦ
Σώκπατες, οὐδέ τῳ ἂν διαφέποι Εὐθύφπων τῶν ρολλῶν ἀνθπώρων, εἰ
μὴ κτλ. : see note in loc. for more
parallels.
25. οὐκ ἤρεσεν—καὶ—οὐκ ἐθελήσοι
. The combination of indicative and optative
in the same sentence in indirect speech is fairly common: Goodwin,
M.T. p. 261, § 670.
28. ἡγησάμενος
.
Heindorf conjectures ἡγησάμενος οὖν , but οὖν may be dispensed with after a short
parenthesis.
38. ἵνα συνουσία ἐγίγνετο
. For this construction see note on Crito, 44Dεἰ γὰρ
ὤφελον—οἷοί τ’ εἶναι—ἴνα οἷοί τ’ ἦσαν. A secondary tense of the
indicative is found with ἴνα and ὅπως (without
ἄν ) in final clauses dependent on a wish which can no
longer be fulfilled, or on the apodosis to an impossible protasis: Goodwin,
M.T. p. 120, § 333. The idiom is frequent in Plato and sometimes
corrupted by scribes, e.g. Meno, 89Bἡμεῖς ἂν
παραλαβόντες—ἐφυλάττομεν—ἵνα μηδεὶς αὐτοὺς διέφθειρεν, ἀλλ’ ἐπειδὴ
ἀφίκοιντο εἰς τὴν ἡλικίαν, χρήσιμοι γίγνοιντο ταῖς πόλεσιν—where
perhaps we should read ἀφίκοντο and ἐγίγνοντο . See Cobet's Variae
Lectiones, pp. 102, 359.
45. τρίβωνος
. The
ordinary clothing of an Athenian consisted of a
χιτών , or shirt, with a ἱμάτιον
or short mantle worn above it. The τρίβων
was a short cloak of coarse material worn by the Spartans and sometimes by
the Laconisers in other states to take the place of both χιτών and
ἱμάτιον . It was the ordinary garment of Socrates ( Symp. 219B), and was afterwards much affected
by the more ascetic philosophers, such as the Cynics (Diog. Laert. VI. I.
13). Its use was supposed to be a mark of sturdy simplicity and austerity of
manners.
48. οὐδ’ ἂν ἑνός
. The
two parts of οὐδείς are sometimes
separated by ἄν or a preposition, often
with the effect (as here) of increasing the emphasis by making οὐδέ = ne—quidem, cf.
below 343Dοὐδὲ
πρὸς ἔνα λόγον .
51. ὦ παῖ Ἱππονίκου
:
see on 328D above. With ἀεὶ μὲν—
ἀτάρ Sauppe compares Rep. II. 367Eκαὶ
ἐγὼ
ἀκούσας ἀεὶ μὲν δὴ
τὴν φύσιν τοῦ τε Γλαύκωνος καὶ τοῦ Ἁδειμάντου ἠγάμην, ἀτὰπ οὖν
καὶ
τότε πάνυ γε ἥσθην.
52. φιλοσοφίαν
. The
original meaning of the word φιλοσοφία was ‘love of knowledge for its own sake’, no particular
kind of knowledge being specified. The verb
φιλοσοφεῖν is first found in Hdt.
I. 30ὡς φιλοσοφέων γῆν πολλὴν θεωρίης
εἵνεκεν
ἐπελήλυθας . In the present passage (as in Thuc. II. 40 φιλοσοφοῦμεν ἄνευ μαλακίας ) the word
retains its original wider meaning, viz, ‘love of knowledge’ in general; but
side by side with this in Plato it has the more restricted meaning of
‘Philosophy’, e.g. Rep. VI. 496Aπάνσμικρον
δή τι. . .λείπεται τῶν κατ’ ἀξίαν
ὁμιλούντων φιλοσοφίᾳ. The wider meaning is also found in
Aristotle, where he calls Theology the ‘Highest Study’ ( πρώτη
φιλοσοφία ), and elsewhere.
55. Κρίσωνι
. Criso of
Himera, a famous σταδιοδρόμος , won three
times at Olympia, viz. Olymp. 83, 84 and 85 (448, 444 and 440 B.C.). His
chastity during his prime as an athlete is mentioned in Laws, VIII. 840A. δρομεῖ
ἀκμάζοντι is rejected by some editors, but
δρομεῖ should be taken with Ἱμεραίῳ
and
ἀκμάζοντι with ἕπεσθαι :
‘to keep up with Criso, the runner of Himera, when he was in his
prime’—presumably at the assumed date of this dialogue he was past his ἀκμή .
56. δολιχοδρόμων
: δολιχοδρόμοι εἰσὶν οἱ τὸν δόλιχον
τρέχοντες , says the scholiast: see on 329A
ἡμεροδρόμων
. Heindorf quotes Livy, XXXI.
24. 4 ‘Hemerodromos vocant Graeci ingens die uno cursu emetientes
spatium.’ Such was Phidippides; see Hdt.
VI. 105ἡμεροδρόμην
τε
καὶ τοῦτο μελετῶντα .
57. διαθεῖν τε καὶ ἕπεσθαι.
δια‐in compounds frequently denotes
competition: for διαθεῖν cf. Theaet. 148Cεἶτα
διαθέων
τοῦ ἀκμάζοντος καὶ ταχίστου ἡττήθης. As the emphasis is on ἕπεσθαι (‘keep up with’), διαθεῖν τε καὶ ἕπεσθαι is equivalent to διαθέοντα ἕπεσθαι : cf. note on 317Cἐνδείξασθαι
καὶ καλλωπίσασθαι , where καὶ
καλλωπίσασθαι is (so to speak) enclitic as διαθεῖν τε καί is proclitic (cf. the
English ‘Some—must be talked over by the hour before they could reach the
humblest decision, which they only left the office to
return again (ten minutes later) and
rescind ’).
61. συγκαθεῖναι
:
intransitive as in Rep. VIII. 563Aοἱ
δὲ
γέροντες ξυγκαθιέντες τοῖς νέοις: so
παρέχω for παρέχω ἐμαυτόν below, 348Aἕτοιμός εἰμί σοι παρέχειν ἀποκρινόμενος :
cf. also ἐκεῖνοί τε ἀπέκρυψαν (sc. ἑαυτούς ) Thuc. V. 65. 5. The omission of
the reflexive pronoun is a well-recognised way of making transitive verbs
into intransitive.
66. χωρίς
. Soph.
O.C. 808 χωρὶς τό τ’ εἰπεῖν
πολλὰ καὶ τὰ
καίρια . ‘In talibus locis δίχα,
χωρίς etc. non, ut vulgo, seiunctionem et separationem, sed
diversitatem et oppositionem significant’ (Kroschel). The usage is frequent
in Plato. δημηγορεῖν is
contionari —platform oratory.
68. ὁρᾷς
. Almost like our
colloquial ‘don't you know’ (when used parenthetically and without
interrogative force): the ἀλλά belongs in
strict logic to δίκαια δοκεῖ λέγειν .
Heindorf quotes parallels from Aristophanes, e.g. Peace,
330-1 οὐκἂν ὀρχησαίμεθ’,
εἴπερ ὠφελήσαιμέν τί σε. ἀλλ’ ὁρᾶτ’, οὔπω πέπαυσθε . Where ὁρᾷς or
ὁρᾶτε stand in this way as the first word of a sentence,
editors generally regard the usage as interrogative, e.g. Eur.
Orest. 581 ὁρᾷς; Ὀδυσσέως ἄλοχον οὐ
κατέκτανε .
70. καὶ σύ
. So the
original hand in T: B has καί σοι . If we
read καὶ σοί , the construction is ἀξιῶν αὑτῷ τε ἐξεῖναι
διαλέγεσθαι
ὅπως βούλεται καὶ σοὶ ἐξεῖναι κτλ. , but
Protagoras has nowhere asked that Socrates should be
permitted to converse as he likes: quite the contrary. With σύ the construction is καὶ σὺ δίκαια
δοκεῖς λέγειν ἀξιῶν διαλέγεσθαι ὅπως ἂν κτλ. , i.e. and your demand that Protagoras should converse as you wish likewise seems fair. Protagoras asked to
be allowed to use his own style in 335A
Socrates requested that Protagoras should converse as Socrates wished in 334D335C335E Alcibiades' defence of Socrates in
the next chapter seems also to imply the reading
σύ here. The only objection to this view lies in the
position of τε after
αὑτῷ : we should expect it to follow Πρωταγόρας.
τε is however frequently misplaced (see above on 316D . σοί
can only be retained if we either (1) take καὶ
σοί as altogether independent of
ἀξιῶν — which is barely possible, or (2) regard Plato as guilty of
inaccurate writing.
CHAPTER XXIII
Alcibiades defends Socrates, and together with Critias and
Prodicus hopes that the conversation will be continued.
1. οὐ καλῶς λέγεις, ὦ Καλλία
. The jingle is intentional:
Handsome is that handsome says. Plato loves to play upon the names of his
interlocutors ( ὦ λῶ?στε Πῶλε in Gorg. 467B): see Riddell's Digest of
Idioms, § 323, and cf. the Editor's notes on Euthyphr. 2E, 4E, 5C.
5. λόγον τε δοῦναι καὶ δέξασθαι
. We should expect
τε to follow
δοῦναι : see on
316D
10. ἐκκρούων
. ‘Vox ducta
a pugilatu, cuius proprium κρούειν de rep.
IV. p. 422B οὐδ’ εἰ ἐξείη—ὑποφεύγοντι ( τῷ πύκτῃ ) τὸν
πρότερον αἰεὶ προσφερόμενον ἀναστρέφοντα κρούειν etc.’ Heindorf.
The simple verb is used metaphorically in Theaet. 154E of
beating arguments with arguments, ἤδη
ἂν—συνελθόντες
σοφιστικῶς εἰς μάχην τοιαύτην ἀλλήλων τοὺς λόγους τοῖς λόγοις
ἐκρούομεν , and the compound in Phaedr. 228Eἐκκέκρουκάς
με
ἐλπίδος. Here the idea is of beating off, staving off by
force, i.e. here by μακρηγορία : ἐκκρούειν δίκην is used by Demosthenes of
staving off a trial by συκοφαντία and the
like.
14. οὐχ ὅτι
: ‘not but
what’. The idiom (as if οὐ λέγω ὅτι , omitto quod ) is tolerably common in Plato, e.g. Gorg. 450Eοὐχ
ὅτι τῷ ῥήματι οὕτως εἶπες, Theaet. 157Bτὸ δ’
εἶναι πανταχόθεν
ἐξαιρετέον, οὐχ ὅτι ἡμεῖς—ἠναγκάσμεθα—χρῆσθαι αὐτῷ.
16. χρὴ γὰρ κτλ.
:
said apologetically.
20. φιλόνικος
. The MSS.
read φιλόνεικος and presently συμφιλονεικεῖν . It is however clear that
the word comes from φιλο‐ and νίκη , not from
φιλο‐ and νεῖκος (in which case
the form would be φιλονεικής : compare φιλοκερδής, φιλοκυδής , but φιλότιμος, φιλόδοξος, φιλόθηρος and the
like). Schanz has found only two traces of the original spelling with iota
in Plato's MSS. (A, B, T): viz. in Laws, XI. 935B, where Paris A has ἀριστείων
πέρι φιλονικήσῃ , and Alcib. I, 122C, where φιλονικίαν appears as a correction for φιλονεικίαν in T. We might in consequence
be tempted to suppose that Plato himself wrote
φιλόνεικος through the influence of a false etymology, were it not
that the derivation from νίκη alone suits
the meaning, and that in more than one passage he shows himself conscious of
the connection of the word with νίκη ,
notably in Rep. IX. 586Cτί
δέ;
περὶ τὸ θυμοειδὲςοὐχ
ἕτερα τοιαῦτα ἀνάγκη γίγνεσθαι, ὃς ἂν αὐτὸ τοῦτο διαπράττηται
ἢ φθόνῳ διὰ φιλοτιμίαν ἢ βίᾳ διὰ φιλονικίαν( φιλονεικίαν Α ) ἢ
θυμῷ διὰ δυσκολίαν, ρλησμονὴν τιμῆς τε καὶ νίκης καὶ θυμοῦ
διώκων ἄνευ λογισμοῦ τε καὶ νοῦ; Cf.
also ibid. 581A-B. The orthography of this word is an
old subject of dispute (see Stallbaum on Rep. VIII. 545A); Schanz (Preface to vol. VI,
p. X) declares himself, after a full discussion, for
φιλόνικος .
24. ὁ Πρόδικος—ἔφη
.
Prodicus contrives to make his remarks an
ἐπίδειξις on ὀρθότης ὀνομάτων
, which was his leading subject of instruction: see Euthyd. 277Eand cf. above on 314C The distinctions drawn by Prodicus
are on the whole sound if somewhat wiredrawn and pedantic. The carefully
balanced style of the speech finds a parallel in the story of Heracles in
Xen. Mem. II. I. 21 ff.: cf. especially §§ 31-3.
26.
κοινοὺς—ἀκροατάς—ἴσους.
κοινόςand
ἴσος are found as epithets of
ἀκροατής in the orators: e.g. Dem. De Cor. 7 τὰ
τοῦ λέγοντος ὑστέπου δίκαια εὐνοϊκῶς ρποσδέξεται καὶ ραπασχὼν
ἑαυτὸν ἴσον καὶ κοινὸν ἀμφοτέποις ἀκποατὴν οὕτω τὴν διάγνωσιν
ποιήσεται περὶ πάντων , and Andoc. in
Alcib. § 7 δέομαι δ’ ὑμῶν,
τῶν λόγων ἴσους καὶ κοινοὺς ἡμῖν ἐπιστάτας γενέσθαι
(Heindorf).
29. τῷ μὲν σοφωτέρῳ πλέον κτλ.
In other words ἰσότης
γεωμετρική and not ἰσότης
ἀριθμητική should be observed by the audience ( Gorg. 508A): the regard paid to the speakers
should be in proportion to their merit.
33. ἀμφισβητεῖν—ἐρίζειν
. Cicero's translation of this sentence
is preserved by Priscian (Nobbe's
Cicero, p. 1313): ‘Nunc a vobis, a Protagora et Socrate ( leg. o Protagora et Socrates), postulo, ut de isto
concedatis alter alteri, et inter vos de huiuscemodi rebus controversemini,
non concertetis.’
38. εὐδοκιμοῖτε καὶ οὐκ
ἐπαινοῖσθε
. Heindorf suggests that ἀλλ’ οὐκ should be written for καὶ οὐκ , or
καί omitted; but
καί is occasionally used in this way.
39. ἄνευ ἀπάτης
is
opposed to παρὰ δόξαν ψευδομένων : εὐδοκιμεῖν implies that he with whom one εὐδοκιμεῖ is sincere. ἐν λόγῳ as opposed to παρὰ ταῖς ψυχαῖς suggests Shak.
‘Mouthhonour, breath, which the poor heart would fain deny, but dare not’.
42. εὐφραίνεσθαι
is
connected by Prodicus with φρόνησις ( φρονήσεως μεταλαμβάνοντα ): for a fantastic
derivation of the kindred εὐφροσύνη see Crat. 419Dπαντὶ
γὰρ
δῆλον ὅτι ἀπὸ τοῦ εὖ
τοῖς ρπάγμασι τὴν ψυχὴν ξυμφέπεσθαι τοῦτο ἔλαβε τὸ ὄνομα,
εὐφεροσύνην, τό γε δίκαιον· ὅμως δὲ αὐτὸ καλοῦμεν εὐφροσύνην. Cf.
Ar. Top. II. 6, p. 112 b . 22 Πρόδικος διῃρεῖτο τὰς ἡδονὰς εἰς
χαρὰν καὶ τέρψιν καὶ εὐφροσύνην . The Greek usage of this
word hardly conformed to the rule laid down by Prodicus.
44. αὐτῇ τῇ διανοίᾳ
: αὐτῆ? is ‘by itself’, i.e. without the
body, as αὐτῷ in αὐτῷ
τῷ σώματι is without the mind. ἡδύ
is introduced to give the derivation of ἥδεσθαι
.
CHAPTER XXIV
Hippias, anxious for a compromise, proposes the selection of an
umpire in a speech marked by his characteristic doctrines and
style.
If we may judge from this speech, Hippias must have been devoted to metaphor:
e.g. τύραννος, πρυτανεῖον in D, ὥσπερ ὑπὸ
διαιτητῶν in E, and in 338Aἐφεῖναι καὶ χαλάσαι τὰς ἡνίας, κάλων
ἐκτείναντα οὐπίᾳ ἐφέντα, ρέλαγος λόγων, ἀροκπύψαντα γῆν, μέσον τι
τεμεῖν, ῥαβδοῦχον and πρύτανιν .
Zeller ( Archiv für Geschichte der
Philosophie, V, 2, 175) thinks that the opening part of the speech may
have come from some book of which Hippias was himself the author.
2. ἀπεδέξαντο
means simply
‘assented’: cf. Theaet. 162E.
4. ἡμᾶς
is Heindorf's correction
for ὑμᾶς ; ‘uti mox ἡμᾶς
οὖν αἰσχρόν etc., neque video cur se a ceteris h. l. segreget
Hippias’.
5. φύσει οὐ νόμῳ
. The
opposition between φύσις and νόμος frequently appears attributed to
different sophists or their representatives in the Platonic dialogues: the
historical Hippias was a leading champion of φύσις
(see Introduction p. XX). Usually, however, νόμος
is represented as a convention binding men together into friendship and φύσις (whose teaching is that might is right)
as responsible for the enmity of man to man in the savage state: e.g. Rep. II. 358Dff., Gorg. 482Dff. From the natural principle of ‘Like
to like’ is here deduced something like the Stoic doctrine of the kinship
between wise men.
τὸ γὰρ ὁμοῖον τῷ ὁμοίῳ
: Gorg. 510Bφίλος μοι
δοκεῖ
ἕκαστος
ἑκάστῳ εἶναι ὡς οἷόν τε μάλιστα, ὅνρεπ οἱ ραλαιοί τε καὶ σοφοὶ
λέγουσιν, ὁ ὁμοῖος τῶ? ὁμοίῳ; Laws, IV. 716C. The proverb appears in the most
various forms in Greek literature from Homer ( Od. XVII. 218ὡς αἰεὶ
τὸν
ὁμοῖον ἄγει θεὸς ὡς τὸν ὁμοῖον) downwards. For more examples
of its use in Plato see Stallbaum on Gorg.
loc. cit.
7. τύραννος—βιάζεται
. Hippias has in view the lines of Pindar
quoted in Gorg. 484Bνόμος ὁ
πάντων βασιλεὺς θνατῶν τε
καὶ ἀθανάτων—ἄγε. δικαιῶν τὸ βιαιότατον ὑπερτάτᾳ χειρὶ κτλ.
11. πρυτανεῖον τῆς σοφίας
. The prytaneum (like the temple of
Vesta at Rome) was the religious centre of a Greek
πόλις . It was sacred to Ἑστία ,
in whose honour fire was always kept burning, and contained what was called
the ‘Common Hearth’ of the city: see Frazer in Journal of Philology,
XIV, 145-72. The editors refer to Athenaeus, v. 187D τὴν
Ἀθηναίων
ρόλιν, τὸ τῆς Ἑλλάδος μουσεῖον, ἣν ὁ μὲν Ρίνδαπος Ἑλλάδος
ἔπεισμα
ἔφη, Θουκυδίδης δ’ ἐν τῷ εἰς Εὐπιρίδην ἐριγπάμματι Ἑλλάδος
Ἑλλάδα,
ὁ δὲ Πύθιος ἑστίαν καὶ πρυτανεῖον τῶν Ἑλλήνων .
16. συμβῆναι—ὥσπερ
ὑπὸ διαιτητῶν ἡμῶν συμβιβαζόντων.
συμβαίνωforms a passive to συμβιβάζω as
πάσχειν to ποιεῖν , whence ὑπό : see note on Apol. 17A.
συμβιβάζω is regular in the sense of bringing together,
effecting an arrangement between: cf. (with Sauppe) Thuc. II. 29. 6 ξυνεβίβασε
δὲ καὶ τὸν
Περδίκκαν τοῖς Ἀθηναίοις . Note that ἡμῶν has no preposition with it—this is
frequent (but not universal) in similes where
ὥσπερ and a preposition precede the object compared, and
the effect is almost to make the simile an identification: if on the other
hand the object compared comes first, the preposition must be expressed
twice. Cf. Theaet. 170Aὥσπερ
πρὸς
θεοὺς ἔχειν τοὺς ἐν
ἑκάστοις ἄρχοντας(which might have been πρὸς τοὺς ἐν ἑκάστοις
ἄρχοντας ὥσπερ πρὸς θεοὺς ἔχειν ) and see notes on Crito, 46C, Euthyphr. 2C.
19. λίαν
: with ζητεῖν : κατὰ
βραχύ as in Gorg. 449Bἀλλ’
ἐθέλησον κατὰ βραχὺ τὸ ἐρωτώμενον ἀποκρίνεσθαι.
20. ἐφεῖναι καὶ χαλάσαι τὰς
ἡνίας τοῖς λόγοις
. For the metaphor Kroschel compares Laws, III. 701Cκαθάπερ
ἀχάλινον
κεκτημένον τὸ στόμα, βίᾳ ὑπὸ τοῦ λόγου φερόμενον κτλ.
22. ἡμῖν
: so most editions:
BT have ὑμῖν , which can hardly be right,
as Hippias is at this moment addressing Socrates alone. ‘Pro ὑμῖν dici potuit
σοί , sed ὑμιν recte explicari
nequit’ (Kroschel).
23. πάντα κάλων ἐκτείναντα.
παροιμία ἐπὶ τῶν πάσῃ προθυμίᾳ χρωμένων,
says a scholiast (quoted by Sauppe). This nautical metaphor means to stretch
out every reefing rope and so set all sail: κάλως
does not refer to the sheet, which is πούς.
κινεῖν, σείειν, ἐξιέναι, ἐφιέναι, ἐκλύειν are also found
with κάλων in much the same sense.
οὐρίᾳ ἐφέντα
: see on συγκαθεῖναι
336A For the asyndeton before these words Heindorf compares Euthyphr. 4Cσυνδήσας
τοὺς ρόδας καὶ τὰς χεῖπας αὐτοῦ, καταβαλὼν εἰς τάφπον τινά, ρέμρει
δεῦρο ἄνδρα κτλ.
ἀποκρύψαντα
: like Virgil's ‘protinus
aerias Phaeacum abscondimus arces’ ( Aen. III. 291): cf.
the use of καταδύω in Callimachus,
Epigr. 2 ἥλιον
ἐν
λέσχῃ κατεδύσαμεν and Virgil's imitation ‘saepe ego longos
Cantando puerum memini me condere soles’ ( Ecl. IX. 51).
25. μέσον τι—τεμεῖν.
τέμνειν ὁδόνlike secare
viam is a natural metaphor. Cf. Pindar, Isthm. VI. 22 μυρίαι δ’ ἔργων
καλῶν τέτμηνθ’ ἑκατόμπεδοι ἐν σχερῷ κέλευθοι , Pl.
Laws, VII. 803E τὸ μὲν τῶν τύπων εἴρηται
καὶ καθάπερ ὁδοὶ τέτμηνται καθ’ ἃς
ἰτέον κτλ. Here μέσον τι
τεμεῖν = μέσην τινὰ ὁδὸν τεμεῖν
.
ὣς οὖν ποιήσατε καὶ πείθεσθε.
ὥς(so B: T has
ὡς ) is best understood as for οὕτως
—a rare usage, except after a preceding ὡς
or ὥσπερ as in
326D but it is found in Thuc. III. 37. 5 (with οὖν and a form of
ποιεῖν as here) ὣς
οὖν χρὴ καὶ ἡμᾶς ποιοῦντας—
παραινεῖν . For ποιήσατε
the MSS. read ποιήσετε , which is very
harsh before πείθεσθε , and is
probably a mistake for ποιήσατε , due
to the influence of the common construction of
ὅπως with 2nd person fut. ind. It is, however, possible that
this use of the future as well as the use of ὥς for οὕτως
was characteristic of Hippias' style.
26. ῥαβδοῦχον—πρύτανιν.
ῥαβδοῦχος, ἐπιστάτηςand βραβευτής are said of umpires or presidents
at games: ῥαβδούχους
εἶπε τοὺς κριτὰς τοῦ ἀγῶνος , says the schol. on Ar. Peace, 733; for ἐπιστάτης cf. Laws, XII. 949Aγυμνικῶν
τε καὶ ἱππικῶν ἄθλων
ἐπιστάτας καὶ βραβέας. πρύτανιςis an old word with lofty
associations for ruler or prince. Cron thinks Hippias made this proposal
with a view to being chosen President himself; he was probably still sitting
on his θρόνος , cf. 315B317D
Socrates protests against appointing an umpire, and in order
that the conversation may go on is willing that Protagoras should
become the interrogator. The others assent, Protagoras
reluctantly.
2. ἐμέ γε
. The MSS. read τε not γε; γε
is due to Heindorf. The position of τε is
usually explained as due to displacement (see on
316D , e.g. by Kroschel ‘nam haec dicit Socrates; omnes laudabant
meque et Callias retinebat et (omnes) orabant ut praesidem deligerem’: but Καλλίας can hardly be coupled in this way with
an unexpressedπάντες . If τε is right it must be taken (with Turner) as
coupling the whole clause ἐμὲ ὁ Καλλίας
οὐκ ἔφη ἀφήσειν with καὶ ἑλέσθαι
ἐδέοντο
ἐπιστάτην : this is possible, but strikes us as harsh.
8. ἀλλὰ δή
like at enim introduces a possible objection: see on Crito, 54A. The fuller form of the comparative
( βελτίονα and the like) is less common in
Plato than the contracted.
10. ὥστε
. Heindorf cites ( inter alia ) Phaedr. 269Dτὸ μὲν
δύνασθαι, ὦ Φαῖδρε, ὥστε ἀγωνιστὴν τέλεον γενέσθαι. The insertion
of ὥστε with the usual infinitive after ἀδύνατον increases the emphasis of ἀδύνατον by making it appear more than a
mere auxiliary notion. Badham's conjecture ἀδύνατον
ὂν ὑμῖν ἴστε deserves mention for its ingenuity. For Πρωταγόρου see above, note on 318D
13. τό γ’ ἐμὸν οὐδὲν διαφέρει
. Gorg. 458Dτό γ’
ἐμὸν
οὐδὲν
κωλύει. τό γ’ ἐμόνis frequent in Plato for quantum
ad me attinet.
16. εἰ μὴ βούλεται
.
For the asyndeton see above on 330A
27. πάνυ μὲν οὐκ ἤθελεν
: οὐκ ἤθελεν
is virtually one word: ‘was very reluctant’. The phrase is quite different
from οὐ πάνυ : see on οὐ
πάνυ τι in 321B above.
CHAPTER XXVI
Here begins an episode (lasting down to the end of ch. XXXII), in
which Protagoras cross-examines Socrates upon a poem of
Simonides. For the bearing of this episode on the general
subject of the dialogue see Introduction, pp. xxiii ff.: and for the
different restorations of the poem Appendix I.
3. περὶ ἐπῶν δεινὸν εἶναι.
ἐπῶνis ‘verses’. As education in poetry
formed part of the usual curriculum at Athens, it was natural for the Sophists
to pose as poetical critics, and Sauppe gives a number of references to show
that they did so: it will suffice to quote Isocrates,
Panath. 18 ἀπαντήσαντες γάρ τινές μοι
τῶν ἐριτηδείων ἔλεγον, ὡς ἐν τῷ Λυκείῳ συγκαθεζόμενοι τπεῖς ἢ
τέτταπες τῶν ἀγελαίων σοφιστῶν καὶ ράντα φασκόντων εἰδέναι—
διαλέγοιντο ρεπί τε τῶν ἄλλων ροιητῶν καὶ τῆς Ἡσιόδου καὶ τῆς
Ὁμήρου ποιήσεως κτλ. : cf. below
347A where Hippias says he has a speech ready on the poem, and Hipp.
Minor,363C ff. καὶ
ἄλλα ρολλὰ καὶ ραντοδαρὰ ἡμῖν ἐριδέδεικται καὶ ρεπὶ ροιητῶν τε
ἄλλων καὶ περὶ Ὁμήρου . Protagoras appears as a critic of
poetry in Ar. Poet. 19, p. 1456 b
. 15 ff. (where he censures Homer ὅτι
εὔχεσθαι οἰόμενος ἐπιτάττει εἰπὼν ‘ μῆνιν
ἄειδε θεά ’) and in Soph.
El. 14, p. 173 b . 19 ff. The popularity of
such discussions as the present may be inferred from the well-known scene
between Euripides and Aeschylus in the Frogs, 1119 ff.
8. νῦν διαλεγόμεθα
: so B and T: the editors mostly read νῦν δὴ ( νυνδὴ
) διελεγόμεθα.
νῦν does not mean ‘at this present
moment’, but simply ‘now’, ‘on the present occasion’, = ἐν
τῇ νῦν συνουσίᾳ : translate ‘about the same subject as you
and I are now discussing’, i.e. about the subject of our present discussion.
A discussion which has never been finished (see on 334A and is to be resumed
(cf. 338Eἐπειδὰν
ἱκανῶς ἐρωτήσῃ, πάλιν
δώσειν λόγον , and 338D
ought not to be spoken of as past. We have in fact in νῦν διαλεγόμεθα an indication that the
subject of the dialogue is the same throughout: see Introduction pp. xvii
ff. νῦν in καὶ δὴ
καὶ νῦν (l. 6) is simply ‘in the present case’ and introduces the
application of the general statement contained in ἡγοῦμαι—λόγον
δοῦναι : cf. Apol. 17D-18A ὥσπερ
οὖν ἂν—καὶ δὴ
καὶ νῦν .
περὶ ἀρετῆς
. According to Diog. Laert.
IX. 8. 55, Protagoras wrote a book having the title περὶ ἀρετῶν .
10. Σιμωνίδης
. It is a
saying of Simonides of Ceos (ca. 556-468 B.C.) that forms the text on which
the discussion in the first book of the Republic is based:
see Rep. I. 331Dff. Plato seems also to allude to
him in two other places, viz. Rep. II. 365Cἐπειδὴ
τὸ
δοκεῖν, ὡς δηλοῦσί μοι οἱ σοφοί, καὶ τὰν ἀλάθειαν βιᾶται
καὶ κύριον εὐδαιμονίας κτλ.and Rep. VI. 489Bοὐ
γὰρ
ἔχει φύσιν—
τοὺς σοφοὺς ἐπὶ τὰς πλουσίων θύρας ἰέναι ἀλλ’ ὁ τοῦτο
κομψευσάμενος
ἐψεύσατο(compare Ar.
Rhet. II. 16. 1391 a.
8 ff. with Cope's note).
Σκόπαν
. The Scopadae were a ruling family
at Crannon and Pharsalus in Thessaly. Simonides seems to have frequently
been their guest, and wrote poems in their honour: the most famous is
that referred to by Cicero, de Or. II. § 352-3.
12. ἀγαθόν
is here more
than morally good: it includes bodily and external as well as internal
well-being: whence χερσίν τε καὶ
ποσί as well as νόῳ :
see also note on 344B l. 4 below. The
notion of external well-being belonged to the word from very early times:
see Grote, III, 45, n. 3: ‘good’ and ‘bad’ are applied in Theognis and Solon
‘to wealth as contrasted with poverty— nobility with low birth—strength with
weakness—conservative and oligarchical politics as opposed to innovation’.
This sense survived in classical times in the political meaning of καλὸς
κἀγαθός , e.g. Xen. Hell. II. 3. 12, Pl. Rep. VIII. 569A.
13. τετράγωνον
.
Simonides avails himself of a Pythagorean notion: among the Pythagoreans the
number 4 was sacred, as being the first square number: see Ritter and
Preller 7 , § 54. The expression τετράγωνος ἀνήρ became afterwards almost
proverbial for a perfect man: Sauppe refers to Ar. Rhet. III.
11. 1411 b . 27 ολ(=ον
τὸν ἀγαθὸν ἄνδρα φάναι εἶναι τετράγωνον· ἄμφω γὰρ τέλεια .
16. καὶ πάνυ μοι—μεμεληκός
. From this and 347A where the same is implied of
Hippias, it would seem that the poem was thought to be difficult.
19. ἔφην ἐγὼ καλῶς τε καὶ ὀρθῶς
. This, Bergk's emendation, is generally
accepted. B has ἔφην ἐγώ τε καὶ ὀρθῶς : Τ ἔφην
ἔγωγε καὶ ὀρθῶς .
24. ἐμμελέως—νέμεται.
ἐμμελέωςbelongs to
εἰρημένον , and νέμεται
is poetic for νομίζεται : cf. (with
Sauppe) Soph. O.R. 1080 ἐγὼ δ’
ἐμαυτὸν παῖδα τῆς τύχης νέμων . The story is (schol. to
Plato, Hipp.
Maior,304E quoted by
Sauppe) that Pittacus, when ruler of Mitylene, on hearing of Periander's
rapid conversion into a tyrant, sat down at an altar and begged to be
released of his rule, assigning as his reason ὡς
χαλεπὸν ἐσθλὸν ἔμμεναι . The scholiast adds that Solon when he
heard the remark capped it with χαλεπὰ τὰ καλά
. Pittacus is mentioned side by side with Bias and Simonides as one of the σοφοὶ καὶ μακάριοι ἄνδρες in Rep. I. 335E.
29-31. ὁμολογεῖσθαι—ὁμολογεῖν.
The middle is said of things, and the active of persons, according to the
general rule.
34. ὀλίγον δὲ τοῦ ποιήματος εἰς
τὸ πρόσθεν
: these words as well as προϊόντος τοῦ ᾄσματος in 339C are in favour of the supposition
that some verses are wanting between ἄνευ
ψόγου
τετυγμένον and οὐδέ μοι
ἐμμελέως : see Appendix I, pp. 213-14.
40. τὸ πρότερον
:
adverbial.
41. θόρυβον παρέσχεν καὶ
ἔπαινον.
θόρυβοςdenotes only ‘noise’, ‘tumult’
(cf. Rep. VI. 492Cθόρυβον—τοῦ
ψόγου καὶ
ἐπαίνου): καὶ ἔπαινον is
needed to show that the noise was favourable. So above, 334Cἀνεθορύβησαν
ὡς εὖ λέγοι . With παρέχειν in
this sense cf. the phrase παρέχειν γέλωτα
in Gorg. 473E and Theaet. 174C.
43. ὡσπερεὶ ὑπὸ ἀγαθοῦ πύκτου
πληγείς
. For the metaphor cf. Euthyd. 303Aἐγὼ
μὲν
οὖν—ὥσπερ πληγεὶς ὑπὸ τοῦ λόγου
ἐκείμην ἄφωνος. Socrates describes the effect of
Protagoras' questions on himself in words which recall the descriptions of
his own dialectic in its effect on others: cf. e.g. Meno, 80
A ff.
44. ἐσκοτώθην τε καὶ
εἰλιγγίασα
. So BT: the second hand in T
corrects to
ἰλιγγίασα . According to Suidas (quoted by Schanz in
Preface to Vol. VII, p. v) the Greeks wrote
εἰλιγγιῶ , but ἴλιγγος .
In Plato's MSS. εἰλιγγιῶ is somewhat less
frequent than ἰλιγγιῶ .
45. ὥς γε—ἀληθῆ
: see
on 309A
46. ἐγγένηται
: B and T
have ἐκγένηται :
ἐγγένηται is Heindorf's correction, now found in a Vienna MS.
(Kral's I): cf. Phaedo, 86Eἵνα
χρόνου
ἐγγενομένου βουλευσώμεθα τί ἐροῦμεν.
49. σὸς μέντοι—πολίτης
. Iulis in Ceos was their native place. μέντοι is ‘surely’. Notice the emphasis on σός and compare σέ
in ll. 50 and 55.
50. παρακαλεῖν
is
future: cf. Theaet. 183Dἀλλά
μοι
δοκῶ—
οὐ πείσεσθαι αὐτῷ, Phaedr. 228Cδοκεῖς
σὺ
οὐδαμῶς με ἀφήσειν: tr. ‘therefore I think I
will call you to my assistance’. ἐγώ and σέ
are contrasted in view of the illustration which is about to follow.
ὥσπερ ἔφη κτλ.
:
ὥσπερ corresponds to καὶ ἐγώ
in l. 55: as, according to Homer, Scamander called on Simois, so look
you, I call upon you. For ὥσπερ used
in this way see above, note on 330A
The other editors take δοκῶ οὖν ἐγὼ
παρακαλεῖν σέ with the ὥσπερ
clause, and, regarding παρακαλεῖν as a
present, print a full stop after σχῶμεν
in the quotation; but (1) there is a certain awkwardness in the
repetition ‘I think I am summoning you’ and ‘so look you, I am summoning
you’; (2) the quotation does not finish with
σχῶμεν , but
ἐκπέρσῃ in l. 56 belongs to it also—a point which is
against separating φίλε
κασίγνητε—σχῶμεν from the following clause. In the view
which we have taken a fresh start begins with
ὥσπερ , after which the actual summons follows in the present ἀτὰρ καὶ ἐγὼ σὲ
παρακαλῶ .
51. ἔφη Ὁμηρος
. Il. XXI. 305 ff.οὐδὲ
Σκάμανδρος ἔληγε τὸ
ὃν μένος ἀλλ’ ἔτι μᾶλλον χώετο Ρηλείωνι—Σιμόεντι δὲ κέκλετ’
ἀύσας· Φίλε κασίγνητε, σθένος ἀνέπος ἀμφότεποί ρεπ σχῶμεν, ἐρεὶ
τάχα ἄστυ μέγα Πριάμοιο ἄνακτος ἐκπέρσει. This ἐκπέρσει explains the occurrence of ἐκπέρσῃ in l. 56, although (as Heindorf
shows) the same metaphor is occasionally found in tragedy (but hardly in
prose), e.g. Trach. 1104 τυφλῆς
ὑπ’ ἄτης ἐκπεπόρθημαι τάλας .
55. ἀτάρ
: cf. above 335D
57. μουσικῆς
: ‘culture’,
as often; here not without some sarcasm, in reference to
Prodicus' ὀνομάτων ὀρθότης , exemplified
in 337A ff.
58. βούλεσθαι—ἐπιθυμεῖν.
βούλεσθαιis of will, ἐπιθυμεῖν of desire. The distinction is
generally well marked in Plato: see note on Apol. 25Cand cf. Cope on Ar. Rhet.
II. 19. 9. Prodicus does not touch on this example in his speech in 337, but
it is quite in Plato's way to select a fresh example (cf.
Theaet. 147A-B, 166E by the side of 159C, 169A-B), which may
in this case be supposed to come from Prodicus' lectures (cf. 341A . We should expect the article to
be repeated with ἐπιθυμεῖν , as the two
words are to be distinguished (cf. below in l. 63 τὸ
γενέσθαι καὶ τὸ εἶναι ); but the article is sometimes dropped with
the second of two words even when the words are contrasted, e.g. Euthyphr. 9Cτὸ
ὅσιον
καὶ μή. Here the effect of its omission is perhaps to
suggest that the two notions are after all more like than different.
63. γενέσθαι—εἶναι
.
The distinction though long ago recognised by the philosophers was not
always present in ordinary speech: otherwise (as Kroschel points out)
Protagoras' censure of Simonides would be too absurd, and Socrates'
pretended bewilderment out of place. But that Simonides in this poem drew a
distinction between γενέσθαι and
εἶναι is certain: whether it was the same distinction as
Socrates himself draws later is another question; see on γενόμενον δὲ—ἀδύνατον in 344B
69. τὸ αὐτόν
. B and T
here have τὸ αὐτόν , which Schanz retains:
the form occurs on inscriptions and once or twice in Plato's MSS.: v.
Schanz, XII, vii.
70. ἔλεγεν, τὸ χαλεπὸν γενέσθαι
. So Heindorf.
ἔλεγεν is ‘said’, not ‘meant’, and the sentence is intended to
prove what is stated in the last sentence, viz. that Pittacus οὺ τὸ αὐτὸν
ἑαυτῷ
ἔλεγεν (said), ἀλλ’ ἄλλο. τό
goes with the whole clause χαλεπὸν
γενέσθαι ἐσθλόν ; the emphasis is on γενέσθαι : for which reason τὸ ἔμμεναι in the next line (for τὸ ἔμμεναι ἐσθλὸν χαλεπόν ) suffices. It is
unnecessary to read (with Schanz and Kroschel)
ἔλεγε ( ν ) χαλεπόν, τὸ γενέσθαι ἐσθλόν , or ἔλεγε χαλεπόν, γενέσθαι ἐσθλόν with Sauppe.
75. Πρόδικος ὅδε καὶ ἄλλοι
πολλοί
. Socrates dissociates
himself from the others, because he is about to give a different solution of
Simonides' apparently contradictory statements (in 344B ff.).
76. Ἡσίοδον
: in Works
and Days, 289 ff. τῆς δ’
ἀρετῆς
ἱδπῶτα θεοὶ ρποράποιθεν ἔθηκαν ἀθάνατοι· μακπὸς δὲ καὶ ὄπθιος
οἶμος ἐς αὐτὴν καὶ τπηχὺς τὸ ρπῶτον· ἐρὴν δ’ εἰς ἄκπον ἵκηται,
ῥηιδίη δἤπειτα πέλει, χαλεπή περ ἐοῦσα . This passage was
very famous in antiquity: Plato cites it again in Rep. II. 364C, Laws, IV. 718E.
Hesiod in effect says it is difficult to become good, but easy to be good.
Simonides himself refers to Hesiod's verses in Frag. 58 (Bergk) ἔστι τις λόγος τὰν ἀρετὰν ναίειν δυσαμβάτοις ἐπὶ
ρέτπαις, νῦν δέ μιν θεῶν χῶπον ἁγνὸν ἀμφέρειν. . .οὐδ’ ἀραντᾶν βλεφάποις
θνατῶν ἔσορτον, ᾧ μὴ δακέθυμος ἱδπὼς ἔνδοθεν μόλῃ θ’ ἵκηταί
τ’ ἐς ἄκρον ἀνδρείας .
80. ἐκτῆσθαι
: to be
taken with ῥηϊδίην . B and T read κτῆσθαι , but cf. 340E For the form see above on 319A
CHAPTER XXVII
After some dialectical skirmishing, Socrates volunteers to give
a continuous exposition of the poem.
6. ἰώμενος μεῖζον τὸ νόσημα ποιῶ
. Socrates is thinking of the proverb κακὸν κακῷ
ἰᾶσθαι .
8. ποιητοῦ—ἐκτῆσθαι
. The poet is not of course Hesiod but
Simonides. Socrates nowhere said that in censuring Pittacus Simonides
implies that it is
easy to ‘keep virtue’, i.e. to be virtuous: the quotation from
Hesiod was put in the mouth of Prodicus and ἄλλοι
πολλοί ( 340C . At the same time
Protagoras might fairly turn Socrates' fallacies (see on 331A against himself and say that if
Simonides said it was ‘not difficult’ to be virtuous, he meant that it was
‘easy’ to be so.
12. κινδυνεύει γάρ τοι
: the art of Prodicus (Socrates means) can
lay as good claims to antiquity as yours: cf.
316D
13. θεία τις εἶναι πάλαι
. Kroschel's reading εἶναι
καὶ παλαιά would somewhat change the meaning, which is ‘has long
been an art divine’:
divine because practised by poets and the like, cf. Rep. I. 331Eἀλλὰ
μέντοι—Σιμωνίδῃ γε οὐ ῥᾴδιον ἀπιστεῖν·σοφὸς γὰρ καὶ θεῖος ἁνήρ: above 315E and note. In ἤτοι ἀπὸ
Σιμωνίδου there is an allusion to 316D
16. οὐχ ὥσπερ ἐγώ
, sc. εἰμί . The idiom is frequent in Plato, e.g. Symp. 179Eοὐχ
ὥσπερ
Ἀχιλλέα—ἐτίμησαν καὶ εἰς
μακάρων νήσους ἀπέπεμψαν.
μαθητής
. Socrates calls himself a
disciple of Prodicus also in Crat. 384B, Meno, 96D, Charm. 163D.
18. τὸ χαλεπὸν τοῦτο.
τόmarks
χαλεπόν as a quotation: see above on
331C
20. ἀλλ’ ὥσπερ κτλ.
The
application of the illustration follows in
341B ll. 27 ff. ἴσως οὖν καὶ τὸ
χαλεπὸν—ὑπολαμβάνουσιν , where see note.
22. Πρωταγόρας σοφὸς καὶ
δεινός ἐστιν
. The ἢ ἄλλον
τινά is neglected, and Πρωταγόρας
takes us back to σέ : cf. note on ἐνδείξασθαι
καὶ καλλωπίσασθαι in 317C
The collocation σοφὸς
καὶ δεινός is tolerably frequent in ironical
characterisations, e.g. Theaet. 173Bδεινοί
τε
καὶ σοφοὶ γεγονότες, ὡς οἴονται.
23. ἐρωτᾷ
explains νουθετεῖ , whence the asyndeton
explicativum : see on 335A above.
24. τὸ γὰρ δεινὸν—κακόν ἐστιν
. Prodicus' canon—which rests on the derivation
of
δεινόν from δέος —is not
borne out by Greek usage, except to this extent, that when a man is called δεινός , it is generally implied that he is
more clever than good.
25. δεινοῦ πλούτου κτλ.
Genitives
of exclamation in the Platonic dialogues are generally (as Turner remarks)
preceded by an interjection, e.g. Euthyd, 303Aπυππὰξ
ὦ
Ἡράκλεις καλοῦ
λόγουand ibid.ὦ
Πόσειδον δεινῶν λόγων . Here of course the exclamation is left out
as irrelevant: the only relevant point is the use of
δεινός .
27. ἴσως οὖν καὶ τὸ χαλεπόν
. Sauppe remarks that we should expect οὕτω καὶ τὸ
χαλεπόν to introduce the apodosis to the ὥσπερ clause (
341A l. 20); καί is however enough
to show that we have reached the application; οὖν
is introduced on account of the parenthesis from τὸ
γὰρ δεινόν to κακοῦ ὄντος ; and
ἴσως marks the suggestion as only tentative.
31. φωνήν
: ‘dialect’ as
often, e.g. Phaedo, 62Aκαὶ ὁ
Κέβης—ἴττω Ζεύς, ἔφη, τῇ αὑτοῦ φωνῇ εἰπών.
32. κακόν, ἔφη
.
Prodicus enters into the spirit of the joke: in view of C and D it would be
absurd to take this seriously: see note on ἀλλὰ
παίζειν in D below.
37. τὰ ὀνόματα—ὀρθῶς διαιρεῖν
: cf. above,
340A and below, 358Aτὴν δὲ
Προδίκου τοῦδε διαίρεσιν τῶν ὀνομάτων
παραιτοῦμαι . Prodicus pretends to regard Simonides (cf.
341 A) as a teacher like himself of ὀνομάτων
διαίρεσις .
38. ἅτε Λέσβιος ὤν
: had he
been Κεῖος , he would have learnt ὀνομάτων διαίρεσις forsooth in its natural
home.
39. ἐν φωνῇ βαρβάρῳ
: a
malicious exaggeration inspired by the odium
philologicum.
47. ἀλλὰ παίζειν
.
The editors suppose that Socrates is here turning the tables on Prodicus,
who it is supposed meant his criticism seriously, but the tone of the
passage seems to imply that Prodicus is in league with Socrates to make fun
of Protagoras, who is represented throughout the whole dialogue as lacking
all sense of humour. It would not be wit, but sheer buffoonery, in Plato to
represent Prodicus as seriously believing that
Simonides had censured Pittacus for having said: ‘It is bad to be good.’
48. καὶ σοῦ δοκεῖν
ἀποπειρᾶσθαι.
δοκεῖνis not pleonastic after οἶμαι but means ‘think fit’—a very
idiomatic use, cf. Aesch. Ag. 16 ὅταν
δ’ ἀείδειν ἢ μινύρεσθαι δοκῶ . See Class. Rev. III,
148, where Mr Arthur Sidgwick discusses and illustrates this usage.
53. οὐ δήπου τοῦτό γε λέγων.
οὐ δήπουgoes with
λέγων , which is ‘meaning’ not ‘saying’, and τοῦτο is explained by κακὸν ἐσθλὸν ἔμμεναι . For the asyndeton
see on 335A and for the use of εἶτα cf.
311A and Symp. 200Aπότερον
ἔχων
αὐτὸ οὗ
ἐπιθυμεῖ τε καὶ ἐρᾷ, εἶτα ἐπιθυμεῖ τε καὶ ἐρᾷ, ἢ οὐκ ἔχων;
54. τοῦτο γέρας
.
Heindorf reads τοῦτο τὸ γέρας as in 344C but
γέρας may be regarded as predicative and going closely
with ἀπένειμε , so that
τοῦτο—τοῦτο balance each other. Sauppe compares Symp. 179Cεὐαριθμήτοις
δή τισιν ἔδοσαν τοῦτο γέρας οἱ θεοί.
55. ἀκόλαστον—οὐδαμῶς
Κεῖον
. This seems to be the earliest
passage making allusion to the sobriety and uprightness of
the Ceans, to which, perhaps, Aristophanes sarcastically alludes in
Frogs, 970 ( οὐ Χῖος, ἀλλὰ Κεῖος
). In Laws, I. 638B(quoted by Sauppe) Plato cites
the subjugation of the Ceans by the Athenians as a proof that victory does
not always favour the more virtuous side. Strabo (X. 486) quotes from
Menander the lines καλὸν τὸ Κείων
νόμιμόν
ἐστι, Φανία· ὁ μὴ δυνάμενος ζῆν
καλῶς οὐ ζῇ κακῶς and explains them by saying that a Cean
law required those above the age of 60 to take hemlock so as to make their
country's produce suffice to feed the others.
59. ὃ σὺ λέγεις τοῦτο
refers
to περὶ ἐπῶν
338E For the idiom cf. the usual τὸ σὸν
δὴ τοῦτο , e.g. Symp. 221B.
CHAPTER XXVIII
Socrates introduces his exposition of the poem with a paradoxical theory that
Sparta is the oldest home of philosophers.
The wise men of old accordingly expressed their wisdom in
pithy Laconic sayings, and such a saying is that of Pittacus.
Simonides, as a rival craftsman, wrote this entire poem to overthrow that
saying.
This chapter is intended as a kind of counterblast to Protagoras' claim on behalf
of σοφιστική in
316D ff. In general tone as well as in many of the particular statements
it is elaborately ironical; but it should be remembered that Plato thought
highly in many respects of the Cretan and Spartan constitutions and borrowed
much from them in constructing his ideal city.
4. τῶν Ἑλλήνων
: ‘among
the Greeks’. The genitive belongs rather to ἐν
Κρήτη τε καὶ Λακεδαίμονι than to
πλείστη : cf. Thuc. II. 18. 1 ὁ δὲ
στρατὸς—ἀφίκετο τῆς
Ἀττικῆς ἐς Οἰνόην . Similarly in γῆς
ἐκεῖ,
γῆς belongs to ἐκεῖ rather
than to πλεῖστοι : there would seem to be no
exact parallel to justify us in taking πλεῖστοι γῆς
together. For the meaning of σοφισταί see on 312C
5. ἐξαρνοῦνται καὶ
σχηματίζονται.
σχηματίζεσθαιof ‘posing’ as in Soph. 268Aἀγνοεῖ
ταῦτα
ἃ πρὸς τοὺς ἄλλους ὡς
εἰδὼς ἐσχημάτισται.
7. οὓς—ἔλεγε τοὺς σοφιστάς
: viz. in
316D The attraction is common enough, e.g. Crito, 48Cἃς δὲ σὺ
λέγεις τὰς σκέψεις
περί τε ἀναλώσεως χρημάτων καὶ δόξης κτλ.and below, 359D
10. τὴν σοφίαν
.
So B and the second hand in T: the first hand omits the words (so
Schanz, Kroschel and Kral).
12. τοὺς—λακωνίζοντας
. The editors refer to Ar. Birds, 1281ἐλακωνομάνουν ἅπαντες ἄνθρωποι τότε,
ἐκόμων, ἐπείνων,
ἐρρύπων, ἐσωκράτωνand Demosth. κατὰ
Κόνωνος 34 μεθ’ ἡμέραν
μὲν ἐσκυθπωράκασι καὶ λακωνίζειν φασὶ καὶ τπίβωνας ἔχουσι καὶ
ἁπλᾶς ὑποδέδενται . The Laconisers in Athens were
tolerably numerous: Plato himself ( Rep. VIII. 544C) places ἡ Κρητική τε
καὶ Λακωνικὴ πολιτεία nearest in merit to his ideal city.
12. οἱ μὲν ὦτά τε κατάγνυνται
: thanks, of course, to boxing: cf. Gorg. 515Eτῶν τὰ
ὦτα
κατεαγότων(i.e. τῶν
λακωνιζόντων ) ἀκούεις ταῦτα, ὦ
Σώκρατες , and Martial, VII. 32. 5 ‘at uvenes alios fracta colit aure magister’.
13. ἱμάντας
περιειλίττονται
. The
ἱμάντες were thongs of leather bound round the knuckles for
greater efficacy in boxing: Hom. Il.
XXIII. 685. The caestus, being loaded with balls
of lead, was a much more brutal instrument (Virg. Aen. v.
404-5).
14. βραχείας ἀναβολάς
: ‘short cloaks’ in imitation of the τρίβων (the national Spartan dress: see on 335D .
ἀναβολή (here almost concrete) and
ἀναβάλλεσθαι were said of the ἱμάτιον
, to wear which rightly and like a gentleman was ἐπὶ
δεξιὰ ἀναβάλλεσθαι (
Theaet. 175 E), not ὲπ’ ἀριστερά
( Ar. Birds, 1567-8, a
passage which seems decisive against reading
ἐπιδέξια in this phrase). From Suidas (s.v. ἀναβάλλει—ἀναβάλλεσθαι δὲ τὸ
ἱμάτιον, οὐ περιβάλλεσθαι λέγουσιν ) we may infer that ἀναβολή refers not to the throwing back of
the ἱμάτιον over the shoulder (since in
point of fact it was thrown back over the left
shoulder) but to pulling it round the back (from left to right) before
throwing the end over the left shoulder in front.
15. ὡσδὴ—κρατοῦντας
is
‘quasi vero—his superent’ (Kroschel). For the construction cf. (with
Kroschel) Rep. I. 345Eοὐκ
ἐννοεῖς ὅτι οὐδεὶς ἐθέλει ἄπχειν ἑκών, ἀλλὰ μισθὸν αἰτοῦσιν, ὡς
οὐχὶ αὐτοῖσιν ὠφέλειαν ἐσομένην ἐκ τοῦ ἄρχειν ἀλλὰ τοῖς
ἀρχομένοις;Madvig's Gk Syntax,
p. 168.
19. ξενηλασίας
.
Heindorf quotes ( inter alia ) Ar. Birds, 1012ὥσπερ ἐν Λακεδαίμονι ξενηλατοῦνταιand Plut.
Lyc. 27. 6 τοὺςἀθροιζομένους ἐπ’ οὐδενὶ
χρησίμῳ καὶ παρεισρέοντας
εἰς τὴν πόλιν
ἀπήλαυνεν (sc. Λυκοῦργος
), οὐχ, ὡς Θουκυδίδης (II. 39) φησί,
δεδιὼς μὴ τῆς ρολιτείας μιμηταὶ γένωνται καὶ ρπὸς ἀπετήν τι
χπήσιμον ἐκμάθωσιν, ἀλλὰ μᾶλλον ὄρως μὴ διδάσκαλοι κακοῦ τινος
ὑπάρξωσιν . The reasons assigned by Plutarch are no doubt the true
ones.
22. οὐδένα ἐῶσιν—ἐξιέναι
. Plut. Lyc. 27. 5 οὐδ’ ἀποδημεῖν
ἔδωκε ( Λυκοῦργος ) τοῖς βουλομένοις καὶ πλανᾶσθαι ξενικὰ συνάγοντας
ἤθη
καὶ μιμήματα βίων ἀπαιδεύτων καὶ πολιτευμάτων
διαφοράν, ἀλλὰ καὶ τοὺς ἀθροιζομένους etc. (see last
note). In Laws, XII. 950Cff. (quoted by Sauppe) Plato
lays down similar though less stringent regulations as to ἀποδημία .
23. ὥσπερ οὐδὲ Κρῆτες
.
There seems to be no other authority for this statement, but (as
Sauppe
remarks) the resemblance between the Cretan and Spartan institutions
is
well known.
26. ἀλλὰ καὶ γυναῖκες
. Women in Sparta held a position of much
greater power and influence than in the rest of Greece, partly at least in
consequence of their superior education, physical and otherwise: cf.
Ar. Pol. II. 9. 1269 b.
32 πολλὰ
διῳκεῖτο ὑπὸ τῶν γυναικῶν ἐπὶ τῆς ἀρχῆς αὐτῶν (sc. τῶν Λακεδαιμονίων ) and see Grote, 11, 383
ff. Heindorf remarks that wise and pregnant sayings by Spartan women (such
as are given in pseudo-Plutarch's Λακαινῶν
ἀποφθέγματα , e.g. the famous τέκνον,
ἢ τὰν ἢ ἐπὶ τᾶς ) were probably already current in Plato's
time.
28. εἰ γὰρ ἐθέλει—εὑρήσει
. Cf. 324A
32. ἐνέβαλεν
ῥῆμα—συνεστραμμένον
. The aorist is like ‘behold!
he has thrown in’: it expresses rapidity by representing the action as no
sooner begun than over. The idiom is very frequent in Plato: Turner refers
to Stallbaum on Rep. III. 406D ἐὰν δέ
τις αὐτῷ μικρὰν δίαιταν
προστάττῃ—ταχὺ εἶπεν ὅτι οὐ
σχολὴ κάμνειν . With συνεστ
ραμμένον cf. Ar. Rhet. II. 24. 1401 a . 5 συνεστ
ραμμένως—εἰπεῖν ; the metaphor is apparently from an animal
gathering itself for a spring (cf. Ar. Hist. Anim. IX. 48.
631 a . 27 συστρέψαντες
ἑαυτοὺς φέρονται ὥσπερ τόξευμα and Plato, Rep. I. 336Bσυστρέψας
ἑαυτὸν ὥσπερ θηρίον ἧκεν ἐφ’ ἡμᾶς).
34. παιδὸς μηδὲν βελτίω
. The phrase is almost proverbial: see on Crito, 49Bπαίδων
οὐδὲν
διαφέροντες.
38. φθέγγεσθαι
, here
of an impressive (almost mystic) utterance, as often in Greek, e.g. Ar. Clouds, 315αὗται αἱ
φθεγξάμεναι τοῦτο τὸ σεμνόν.
39. Θαλῆς ὁ Μιλήσιος κτλ.
This list of the seven wise men is remarkable as
excluding Periander, who was canonised later (Diog. Laert. I. 13). Plato
refused to allow that a tyrant could be truly σοφός
( Rep. IX. 587D) or even (in the true sense of
the term) powerful: see Rep. I. 336Aοἶμαι
αὐτὸ(sc. the view that justice is doing good to friends
and evil to enemies) Περιάνδρου
εἶναι ἢ Ρεπδίκκου ἢ Ξέπξου ἢ Ἰσμηνίου τοῦ Θηβαίου ἤ τινος ἄλλου
μέγα οἰομένου δύνασθαι πλουσίου ἀνδρός .
Myson(the least known of the seven) figures as early as
Hipponax (Frag. 45, quoted by Sauppe) καὶ Μύσων
ὃν Ὡπόλλων
ἀνεῖπεν ἀνδρῶν σωφρονέστατον πάντων . According to a tradition
preserved in Diog. Laert. I. 106 the Pythian priestess, being asked by
Anacharsis to say if there was any man wiser than himself, replied Οἰταῖόν τινά φημι Μύσων’ ἐνὶ Χηνὶ
γενέσθαι σοῦ
μᾶλλον πραπίδεσσιν ἀρηρότα πευκαλίμη?σι : but another account
placed his birthplace in Chen in Laconia, and a third (reading Ἠτεῖόν τινά φημι for Οἰταῖόν
τινά φημι in the oracle) in Etea, which was variously placed in
Laconia and in Crete. Sauppe remarks that the presence of Λακεδαιμόνιος with
Χίλων seems to show that Plato did not regard Laconia as Myson's
birthplace, but favoured the view which made him a native of Chenae by Mount
Oeta. Thales ( fl. ca. 585 B.C., the
eclipse of which year he is said to have predicted) is mentioned in two
other passages in Plato (in neither of which is his philosophical
teaching—that the ἀρχή is ὕδωρ —referred to), once as an author of useful
inventions ( Rep. X. 600A), and once as the hero of an anecdote
illustrating the philosopher's want of worldly wisdom ( Theaet. 174A). Pittacus ( fl. ca. 612 B.C.) and Bias of Priene in
Ionia (contemporary with or earlier than Hipponax, who refers to him in Diog. Laert. I. 84) are mentioned together again in Rep. I. 335EΒίαντα ἢ
Πιττακὸν—ἤ τιν’ ἄλλον τῶν σοφῶν τε καὶ μακαρίων
ἀνδρῶν. Cleobulus of Lindus in Rhodes and
Chilon of Sparta (both about the beginning of the 6th cent. B.C.)
are not again referred to by Plato.
The traditions relating to the wise men and many of the aphorisms with which
they are credited are given in Diog. Laert. I. 22-122: for the authorities
for their lives, and for their sayings, see Mullach's
Fragmenta
Philos. Graec. II, 203-34. This passage of the
Protagoras, apparently the earliest in which seven are named
together, probably contributed in large measure to the canonisation of the
wise men.
42. Λακεδαιμόνιος
:
Heindorf would read ὁ Λακεδαιμόνιος , but
Plato may well have said ‘a Lacedaemonian, Chilon’.
46. εἰρημένα· οὗτοι
.
The sentence beginning with οὗτοι shows
how one is to learn αὐτῶν τὴν σοφίαν
τοιαύτην οὖσαν ; the asyndeton (as Heindorf observes)
resembles that after σημεῖον δέ,
τεκμήριον δέ and the like. Here οὗτοι
καὶ κτλ. is so far removed from καὶ
καταμάθοι—οὖσαν that we might have expected οὗτοι
γὰρ καί or (as Kroschel reads)
ὅτι for οὗτοι , but the
emphatic οὗτοι (parallel to
οὗτοι in l. 43 above) renders the explanatory particle
unnecessary. Hermann's correction εἰρημένα ἅ
for εἰρημένα —adopted by Sauppe—gives a
wrong meaning; for ἀπαρχή ‘first-fruits’
(l. 47) coming after καὶ κοινῇ
ξυνελθόντες , in marked antithesis to ἑκάστῳ
εἰρημένα , cannot mean merely the sayings of each
individual—as it will have to mean if ἅ is
read, ἅ being then in apposition to ἀπαρχήν . Kral's ῥήματα
βραχέα
ἀξιομνημόνευτα <σκοπῶν> ἑκάστῳ εἰρημένα, ἃ οὗτοι κτλ.
suffers from the same fault, besides that it is very unlikely that σκοπῶν should have fallen out.
47. κοινῇ
ξυνελθόντες—ἀνέθεσαν
. The editors cite Pausanias, X.
24. I ἐν δὲ τῷ
προνάῳ τῷ ἐν Δελφοῖς γεγραμμένα ἐστὶν
ὠφελήματα ἀνθπώροις εἰς βίον—οὗτοι οὖν οἱ ἄνδπες ἀφικόμενοι ἐς
Δελφοὺς ἀνέθεσαν τῷ Ἀρόλλωνι τὰ ἀ?δόμενα Γνῶθι σαυτὸν καὶ Μηδὲν
ἄγαν . The same explanation of the presence of these
maxims on the temple at Delphi meets us in other authors; but in each case
the author is obviously borrowing the story from Plato. Plato states that
these two maxims were the cream of the wisdom of the wise men: it would be
hardly too much to say that upon them the whole structure of Greek ethical
philosophy was based. For the construction, and for the practice of thus
dedicating wisdom to a god, Kroschel aptly quotes Diog.
Laert. IX. 6 ἀνέθηκε (sc. Ἡράκλειτος ) δ’
αὐτὸ (sc. τὸ
περὶ φύσεως βιβλίον ) εἰς τὸ τῆς
Ἀρτέμιδος ἱερόν .
51. τοῦ δὴ ἕνεκα ταῦτα λέγω
; Plato frequently enlivens his style by such
self-interrogations: Sauppe quotes ( inter alia ) Gorg. 457Eτοῦ δὴ
ἕνεκα
λέγω ταῦτα; Apol.40B τί οὖν αἴτιον εἶναι
ὑπολαμβάνω;
τῶν παλαιῶν τῆς φιλοσοφίας.
τῶν παλαιῶνin this emphatic place
suggests the contrast with Protagoras and the
νεώτεροι whose
τρόπος is μακρολογία .
53. καὶ δὴ καί
marks the
application to the present case: cf. Apol. 18Aὥσπερ οὖν
ἂν
κτλ.—καὶ δὴ καὶ νῦν.
59. τούτου ἕνεκα
,
i.e. τοῦ εὐδοκιμεῖν ἕνεκα. τούτῳ in τούτῳ
ἐπιβουλεύων is τούτῳ τῷ ῥήματι
: with the construction cf. Rep. IV. 443B εὐθὺς ἀρχόμενοι τῆς πόλεως οἰκίζειν and see
Stallbaum on Rep. I. 342B.
Socrates develops his theory of the poem and applies it to the
first two lines, not without much sophistry.
3. μανικόν
. Notice the
extreme dogmatism of Socrates, suggesting a weak case: cf. οὐδὲ πρὸς ἕνα λόγον (l. 5).
5. οὐδὲ πρὸς ἕνα λόγον
:
see on 335Dπρὸς
λόγον = εὔλογον or εὐλόγως is frequent in Plato: see on 351E
6. ἐὰν μή τις ὑπολάβῃ κτλ.
The natural interpretation of the μέν (since it follows ἀγαθόν , not
γενέσθαι ) is this. While it is difficult ‘ γενέσθαι ’ truly good
, it is yet possible to reach a fair standard of
ἀρετή . The antithesis is implied if not actually expressed in the
sequel: see 345D and 346C Cf. Introduction, p. xxiv.
8. λέγοντος τοῦ Πιττακοῦ
: a fresh start is made, to explain ὥσπερ ἐρίζοντα
λέγειν .
9. εἰπεῖν
but λέγειν in l. 7: the past tense is used
because Socrates is about to put Simonides' meaning in the form of an actual
address in past time to Pittacus.
10. ὡς ἀληθῶς
to be
taken with χαλεπόν ἐστιν : see below, 344A (l. 22). Here again Socrates'
interpretation is opposed to the natural sense of the passage, according to
which ἀλαθέως in the poem goes with ἀγαθόν , and has nothing to do with χαλεπόν .
13. εὔηθες—Σιμωνίδου
. As well might Socrates say it is εὔηθες to use the word ἄριστος .
14. ὑπερβατόν
is used in
its technical grammatical sense, Heindorf quotes Long. de
Sublim. 22 ἔστιν δὲ (sc. τὰ ὑπ ερβατὰ ) λέξεων
ἢ νοήσεων ἐκ τοῦ κατ’ ἀκολουθίαν
κεκινημένη
τάξις καὶ οἱονεὶ
χαρακτὴρ ἐναγωνίου πάθους ἀληθέστατος .
15. ὑπειπόντα
. There is
no need to explain ὑπειπόντα here as
‘interpreting’ (a sense for which no exact parallel is quoted). ὑπειπεῖν is used here in its regular sense
‘to say before’, ‘to say first’, as in Ar.
Wasps , 54-5φέρε νυν
κατείπω τοῖς
θεαταῖς τὸν
λόγον, ὀλίγ’ ἄτθ’ ὑπειπὼν πρῶτον αὐτοῖσιν ταδί. The
meaning is: if we would arrive at Simonides' meaning, we must regard the
adverb ἀλαθέως as transposed, and speak
the words of Pittacus first ( ὑπειπόντα τὸ
τοῦ Πιττακοῦ ): i.e. instead of saying ἄνδρ’
ἀγαθὸν μὲν ἀλαθέως γενέσθαι χαλεπόν first, and quoting
Pittacus' saying afterwards, we should begin with χαλεπὸν
ἐσθλὸν ἔμμεναι (line 18 εἰπόντα Ὦ
ἄνθρωποι, χαλεπὸν ἐσθλὸν ἔμμεναι ), and make ἄνδρ’ ἀγαθόν etc. follow as Simonides'
answer (ll. 19-22), putting
ἀλαθέως last. οὑτωσί πως
shows that ὑπειπόντα is to be explained in
the sequel, viz. from ὥσπερ ἄν to ἀλαθέως in l. 22.
18. εἰπόντα
: i.q. τὸν μὲν εἰπόντα : see on 330A Note the precision in the use of
the tenses ( εἰπόντα , but ἀποκρινόμενον ).
20. οὐ γὰρ εἶναι ἀλλὰ γενέσθαι μέν
. Cf. Crito , 43D οὔτοι
δὴ ἀφῖκται ἀλλὰ δοκεῖ μέν μοι ἤξειν κτλ. μέν without
following δέ is frequent in a clause
introduced by ἀλλά , the antithesis being
contained in the preceding negative clause.
22. οὕτω φαίνεται
.
After φαίνεται the MSS. have τό : ‘vel expungendum vel in τοι mutandum hoc τό
’ says Heindorf. For πρὸς λόγον see on 351E
24. τὰ ἐπιόντα
:
see Appendix I, p. 214.
29. τύπον
. Socrates'
criticism of the poem so far has been δῑ
ἀκριβείας : cf. Rep. II. 414Aὡς ἐν
τύπῳ, μὴ δῑ ἀκριβείας εἰρῆσθαι. See also note on ὑπογράψαντες γραμμὰς τῇ γραφίδι in 326D above.
30. παντὸς μᾶλλον
is
frequent in Plato for ‘assuredly’: cf.
Crito , 49B.
CHAPTER XXX
Socrates expounds the next section of the poem in accordance
with his theory of the purport of the whole and finds therein his
own doctrine that ill doing comes from want of knowledge.
1. μετὰ τοῦτο—διελθών
.
This sentence is somewhat difficult. τοῦτο
means from ἄνδρ’
ἀγαθόν to ἄνευ ψόγου τετυγμένον
. The reference in ὀλίγα διελθών must be to
the verses omitted between τετυγμένον and οὐδέ μοι ἐμμελέως etc. The
logical object of λέγει is the sentence
(in l, 4) γενόμενον δὲ διαμένειν etc., which
is Socrates' paraphrase of οὐδέ μοι
ἐμμελέως , etc., but the grammatical
object begins with ὅτι γενέσθαι —the stress
being, as often happens, thrown upon the δέ
clause: ‘While it is truly difficult to become a good man (albeit possible for
some length of time), to continue in that state after you have become good and
to be a good man, etc.’ γενέσθαι
μὲν ἄνδρα ἀγαθόν , etc., is not, as Socrates says
, μετὰ τοῦτο , but his desire to expound the τύπον τὸν ὅλον of the poem throughout ( διὰ
παντὸς τοῦ ᾄσματος ) leads him to begin at the beginning, even
at the cost of an error not unnatural in conversational style. See Appendix I,
pp. 214-15.
ὡς ἂν εἰ λέγοι λόγον
: ‘as if he were making a speech’,
i.e. not a poem. The speech begins at γενέσθαι
μέν , for ὅτι here
introduces oratio recta.
3. οί=ον τε μέντοι ἐπί γε χρόνον τινά
. These words do not give the gist of the lost lines:
still less are they to be assigned (with Bonghi) to the poem itself, for (as
Aars remarks, ‘Das Gedichtdes Simonides’ in Platons
Protagoras (1888), p. 12, n. 3) it is implied by Socrates in 343D ff. that
μέν in γενέσθαι
μέν has no expressed antithesis: they are
educed by Socrates himself from χαλεπὸν
ἀλαθέως . Cf. below 346Eπάντας δὲ ἐπαίνημι καὶ φιλέω ἑκὼν ( ἐνταῦθα δεῖ ἐν τῷ ἑκών διαλαβεῖν λέγοντα ) ὅστις ἕρδῃ μηδὲν
αἰσχρόν, ἄκων δ’ ἔστιν οὓς ὲγὼ ἐπαινῶ καὶ φιλῶ . The likeliest
supposition is that of Blass—that the lost verses contained a further
elaboration of the idea in ἀγαθὸν ἀλαθέως .
4. γενόμενον δὲ...ἀδύνατον
. Socrates correctly apprehends the gist
of Simonides' objection to the saying of Pittacus, although Simonides himself no
doubt read more into the ἔμμεναι of Pittacus
than Pittacus intended it to express. Simonides here takes ἔμμεναι to denote a permanent state, and γενέσθαι as not permanent, although in ἄνδρα δ’ οὐκ ἔστι μὴ
οὐ κακὸν ἔμμεναι he himself uses
ἔμμεναι more loosely: see below on 344E
l. 26. It is however most improbable that Simonides meant by γενέσθαι ‘to become’, i.e. ‘to be made’, as
Socrates everywhere implies: by ἄνδρ’ ἀγαθὸν μὲν
γενέσθαι
ἀλαθέως he meant only ‘that a man should prove himself truly
good’, i.e. quit him like a perfect man: cf. Hdt.
VII.
224Λεωνίδης—πίπτει ἀνὴρ γενόμενος
ἄριστος , Xen. Anab. IV. 1. 26 ἐρωτᾶν εἴ τις
αὐτῶν ἔστιν ὅστις ἀνὴρ ἀγαθὸς ἐθέλοι γενέσθαι . The usage is
thoroughly idiomatic.
15. ὄντα ποτὲ—καθέλοι.
ποτέgoes with
καθέλοι as with καταβάλοι in l.
13.
19. καὶ ἰατρὸν ταὐτὰ ταῦτα.
ταὐτὰ ταῦταis virtually adverbial as
in
Meno , 90D οὐκοῦν καὶ περὶ
αὐλήσεως καὶ
τῶν ἄλλων
τὰ αὐτὰ ταῦτα;
20. ἐγχωρεῖ κακῶ? γενέσθαι
. Socrates says
γενέσθαι , although Simonides said ἔμμεναι
; see on E (l. 26) below.
21. παρ’ ἄλλου ποιητοῦ
.
Xen. Mem. 1. 2. 20 μαρτυρεῖ δὲ
καὶ τῶν ποιητῶν ὅ τε λέγων ‘ ἐσθλῶν
μὲν γὰρ ἀπ’ ἐσθλὰ διδάξεαι· ἢν δὲ
κακοῖσι συμμίσγῃς, ἀπολεῖς καὶ τὸν ἐόντα νόον ’, καὶ ὁ λέγων ‘
αὐτὰρἀνὴρ ἀγαθὸς
τοτὲ
μὲν κακός, ἄλλοτε
δ’ ἐσθλός ’. The first of these quotations is known (see
Meno , 95D) to be from Theognis, so that it seems clear that the
second must be from some other poet. It is difficult to resist the
impression that the author of this line intended ἀγαθός,
κακός , and ἐσθλός to have a
political sense, and was alluding to the ups and downs of an aristocrat's
life in times of civil dissension: cf. Theognis, 1109-10 Κύρν’, οἱ πρόσθ’
ἀγαθοὶ νῦν αὖ κακοί, οἱ δὲ κακοὶ ρπὶν νῦν ἀγαθοί· τίς κεν ταῦτ’
ἀνέχοιτ’ ἐσορῶν; Euripides, Hecuba
, 595 ff. (quoted by Cron) pointedly contradicts the sentiment of this line
(as interpreted by Socrates): ἄνθ ρωποι δ’
ἀεὶ ὁ μὲν πονηρὸς οὐδὲν ἄλλο πλὴν κακός, ὁ δ’
ἐσθλὸς ἐσθλός, οὐδὲ συμφορᾶς ὕπο (alluding to Simonides'
poem) φύσιν διέφθειρ’, ἀλλὰ χρηστός
ἐστ’ ἀεί .
25. εὐμήχανον καὶ σοφὸν καὶ
ἀγαθόν.
εὐμήχανοςis identified with ἀγαθός by means of the middle step σοφός, σοφία being
ἀγαθόν because it is one of the virtues. See on τῷ ἐπιστάτῃ καὶ
ἐπαἳοντι in Crito , 47B.
26. οὐκ ἔστι μὴ οὐ κακὸν ἔμμεναι
. If Simonides had consistently carried out
the distinction between γένεσις and οὐσία attributed to him (in part rightly:
see on
344B l. 4), he would have used
γενέσθαι , not ἔμμεναι here.
Socrates throughout interprets ἔμμεναι as
equivalent to γενέσθαι in this part of the
poem, in spite of his previous distinction: but so (apparently) did
Simonides: see on 344B
28. τὸ δ’ ἐστίν κτλ.
τὸ δέ‘whereas in point of fact’ is
very frequent in Plato: see on Apol. 23A. Notice how Socrates reverts to the
beginning of the poem: see note on 346D
and Appendix I, p. 214.
29. (δυνατὸν δἒ ἐσθλόν
. There is not sufficient ground for
rejecting (with most of the editors) ἐσθλόν
: its position is a trifle awkward, but not more, since δυνατὸν δέ is parenthetical, the μέν after
γενέσθαι being balanced by δέ
in ἔμμεναι δέ . Heindorf reads δυνατὸν δέ, ἐσθλὸν δ’ ἔμμεναι with slight
MS. authority.
30. πράξας μὲν γὰρ εὖ κτλ.
γάρis probably due to Plato, who
represents this sentence as adducing a reason for ἔμμεναι
δὲ
ἀδύνατον : see Appendix I, p. 217. πράξας
εὖ is ‘if he has prospered’: the whole sentiment is the converse
of ἄνδρα δ’ οὐκ
ἔστι μὴ οὐ κακὸν ἔμμεναι and is characteristic of the
ordinary Greek moral code: cf. Hom.
Od. XVIII. 136-7τοῖος γὰρ
νόοςἐστὶν ἐπιχθονίων
ἀνθρώπων οἷον
ἐπ’
ἦμαρ ἄγῃσι πατὴρ ἀνδρῶν τε
θεῶν τε. The view that affliction involves moral
degeneracy appears in the transition of meaning in
πονηρός and
μοχθηρός from ‘afflicted’ to ‘depraved’: the common view
that ‘prosperity’ brings virtue is involved in the usual equivocation on εὖ
πράττειν ‘fare well’ and ‘do well’; see on
Crito , 47E and Euthyphr , 3A. After κακὸς
δ’ εἰ κακῶς is to be understood
ἔπραξεν .
32. τίς οὖν εἰς γράμματα κτλ.
In order to read into Simonides the doctrine that
virtue is knowledge and vice ignorance, Socrates assigns to πράξας εὖ in the poem the meaning of acting well, rather than faring well.
36. κακὸς δὲ κακῶς
,
sc. πράξας : a free rendering of κακὸς δ’
εἰ κακῶς of the poem, which Kral (following Ast) reads
here against the MSS.
40. κακῶς πράξαντες
, i.e. εἰ
κακῶς πράξαιμεν , as the words of the poem show. Socrates'
reasoning is: to become a bad doctor by practising badly, you must first
have been a good doctor: for if you cannot become a
doctor by practising badly, obviously you cannot become a bad doctor. The argument is as fallacious as it is
ingenious: it assumes that κακὸς ἰατρός is
a twofold notion, and more than ἰατρός ,
whereas it is a single notion and less. It would be more in conformity with
experience to say that the ἰδιώτης does
become by practising badly a κακὸς ἰατρός
.
45. αὕτη γὰρ
μόνη—στερηθῆναι
. This sentence (necessary as the
converse of the statement in 345A that
good action comes from knowledge) is introduced as an explanation of ὑπὸ
χρόνου
κτλ. , because χρόνος, πόνος,
νόσος , etc., produce ἐπιστήμης
στέρησις .
47. μέλλει—γενέσθαι
.
See on
312C above.
50. διατελοῦντα ἀγαθόν
explains
ἀγαθόν more precisely: cf. 344Bγενόμενον δὲ διαμένειν ἐν ταύτῃ τῇ ἕξει καὶ εἶναι
ἄνδρα
ἀγαθόν. διατελεῖν without a participle seems not to be
elsewhere found in Plato, though it occurs in Thucydides and others.
52. ἐπὶ πλεῖστον
: ‘ diutissime , ut ἐπὶ πολύ
saepe significat diu ’. καί
is ‘also’ not ‘and’, and balances οὓς ἂν οἱ θεοὶ
φιλῶσιν : οἱ θεοφιλεῖς are also ἄριστοι .
CHAPTER XXXI
The rest of the poem is now expounded and the theory that no
man sins willingly discovered in it.
3. δηλοῖ
(sc. εἰρημένα ) is used as in Soph. Ant.
242 δηλοῖς δ’
ὥς τι σημανῶν κακόν .
εὐρυεδοῦς ὅσοι—χθονός
. Hom. Il. VI. 142βροτῶν οἳ
ἀρούρης καρπὸν ἔδουσιν, Hom.
Od. II. 14. 10‘quicumque terrae munere vescimur’ (Heindorf).
9. ἐπί θ’ ὑμῖν εὑρὼν ἀπαλλελέω
: after Bergk's emendation for the ἔπειθ’ ὑμῖν of the MSS., which cannot be
made to scan: see Appendix I, p. 217. It might be possible (in view
especially of φησίν in the next line) to
regard ἔπειτα here as no part of the poem,
were it not for
346D where it must be part. ἐπί
θ’ ὑμῖν is the most probable of the many emendations
proposed and accounts by far the most easily for the reading of the MSS.
ἐπί is to be taken with εὑρών
, and τε is like the quasignomic τε in Homer, e.g. Il. I. 218ὅς κε
θεοῖς
ἐπιπείθηται, μάλα
τ’ ἔκλυον αὐτοῦ. Translate ‘“trust me, I will tell you
when I've found your man”, says he’. ὑμῖν
(a kind of ethic dative) does not belong so much to
ἀπαλλελέω as to
ἐφευρών . What Simonides himself wrote was no doubt ἐπί τ’ ὔμμιν (availing himself of the
Aeolic form as in the next line); this Plato put in Attic as ἐπί θ’
ὑμῖν , from which to ἔπειθ’
ὑμῖν the step was easy. Sauppe's ἐπὶ
δή μιν εὑρών and Kroschel's ἐπεὶ
οὔτιν’ εὑρών are hardly happy.
10. φησίν
applies only to
the last line: the former φησὶ γάρ covers
the first sentence.
12. πάντας ὅστις
: so
below in l. 16 ὥστε τούτους φάναι ἐπαινεῖν ὃς
ἄν and in l. 23 ὃς ἂν—τούτων
: see also note on 319D
14. ἀνάγκῃ δ’ οὐδὲ
θεοὶμάχονται
. Proverbial: cf. Laws
, VII. 818B ἔοικεν
ὁ τὸν θεὸν πρῶτον παροιμιασάμενος—εἰπεῖν ὡς οὐδὲθεὸς ἀνάγκῃ μή ποτε φανῇ
μαχόμενος . Aars quotes the words of Agamemnon in Il. XIX. 86ἐγὼ δ’
οὐκ
αἴτιός εἰμι, ἀλλὰ Ζεὺς καὶ
Μοῖρα καὶ ἠεροφοῖτις Ἐρινύς.
17. ὃς ἂν ἑκὼν—ποιῇ
:
but ἑκὼν ὅστις
ἕρδῃ without ἄν above,
as often in poetry: Goodwin,
M.T. p. 208, § 540.
19. οὐδεὶς τῶν σοφῶν—ἑκόντα
ἐξαμαρτάνειν
. The doctrine that no one sins
willingly—a corollary of the view that vice is only ignorance—is
characteristic of the ethical teaching both of Socrates and Plato (compare
note on 324A and on Euthyphr. 2C), but not of all Greek sages, and
it is only by the most perverse sophistry that Socrates here reads it into
Simonides, ignoring entirely the words ἀνάγκῃ
δ’ οὐδὲ θεοὶ
μάχονται .
23. καὶ δὴ καί
: see on 343B above.
26. καλὸν κἀγαθόν
:
see on Apol. 21D.
27. καὶ ἐπαινέτην
.
The words φιλεῖν
καὶ ἐπαινεῖν which follow in the MSS. were ejected by
Heindorf.
28. μητέρα ἢ πατέρα ἀλλόκοτον
. Sauppe remarks that from Homer onwards μήτηρ generally comes first in such
enumerations—an interesting survival, perhaps, of the greater importance
assigned to the mother in primitive Greece.
ἀλλόκοτον (‘eccentric’ as in Rep. VI. 487D) from
ἄλλος (in its sinister sense) and
κότος (i.q. τρόπος, ἦθος, ὀργή
) according to Phrynichus (quoted by Kroschel).
29. ἢ πατρίδα
: see
Crito , 50E-51C.
34. ἔτι μᾶλλον
: not = μᾶλλον ἢ κατ’ ἀξίαν , but—as is presently
explained—because they ‘add voluntary feuds to those which they cannot
avoid’.
36. ἀναγκαίαις
:
Heusde's correction for ἀνάγκαις of MSS.
ἐπικρύπτεσθαι—ἀναγκάζεσθαι
. Plato is
probably thinking of Socrates after his trial as he depicts him in the
Crito.ἀναγκάζεσθαι ‘are
constrained’ is of course passive.
39. παραμυθεῖσθαι
,
like mulcere , as often. Sauppe quotes Hor.
Epod. XIII. 18 ‘deformis aegrimoniae dulcibus
alloquiis ’.
41. ἡγήσατο—ἀναγκαζόμενος
: ‘believed—that he had
praised, etc.’ Plato deals a sly thrust at Simonides' notorious avarice, as
Pindar (quoted by Sauppe) does in Isthm. 11. 6 ἁ
Μοῖσα γὰρ οὐ φιλοκερδής πω τότ’ ἦν οὐδ’ ἐργάτις . The
words ἀλλ’
ἀναγκαζόμενος contain the sting; for the life of the χρηματιστής is
βίαιος (Ar. Eth. Nic. 1. 3. 1096 a
. 5).
46. ἔμοιγ’ ἐξαρκεῖ κτλ.
See
Appendix I, pp. 214 ff. for the arrangement of this part of the
poem.
48. γ’ ὀνησίπολιν
.
The MSS. read γ’
ὀνήσει πόλιν , which G. Hermann emended to τ’ ὀνησίπολιν , Bergk to ὀνασίπολιν .
49. οὐ μήν
:
so the MSS., and so, most probably, Plato; but Simonides can hardly
have
written this, which will not scan; see Appendix I, p. 217.
51. οὐ γάρ εἰμι φιλόμωμος
probably belongs to an earlier part of the
poem (before ἔμοιγ’
ἐξαρκεῖ : cf. οὐ διὰ ταῦτά σε
ψέγω, ὅτι εἰμὶ φιλόψογος in line 45): see Appendix I, p.
217.
53. γενέθλα
is Stephanus'
correction for γένεθλα of the MSS., a
mistake due to supposing that
ἀπείρων (not from ἄπειρος
) went with ἠλιθίων : it belongs to γενέθλα .
56. πάντα τοι καλά—μέμικται
sums
up the whole moral teaching of the poem.
60. καὶ οὐ ζητῶ κτλ.
Socrates
recapitulates part of the poem by way of interpreting the final text: see
note on τὸ δ’
ἐστὶν γενέσθαι κτλ. in 344E
above and Appendix I, p. 214.
62. τούτου γ’ ἕνεκα
:
‘si hoc spectetur s. requiratur, τὸ πανάμωμον
εἶναι ’ (Heindorf): cf. Phaed. 85B ἀλλὰ τούτου γ’ ἕνεκα
λέγειν τε χρὴ καὶ ἐρωτᾶν ὅ τι ἂν βούλησθε . The sense is:
if I must wait for perfection before beginning to praise, I shall never
praise anyone.
66. ὡς πρὸς Πιττακὸν λέγων
:
not serious, of course, nor true.
67. διαλαβεῖν
: i.e.
make a division, ‘pause’, virtually ‘punctuate’. The editors compare the use
of διαστίξαι in Ar.
Rhet. III. 5. 1407 b . 14 τὰ γὰρ Ἡρακλείτου διαστίξαι ἔργον διὰ τὸ ἄδηλον
εἶναι ποτέρω? πρόσκειται .
68. ἄκων δ’ ἔστιν οὕς
:
see on 344B
70. νῦν δὲ—σφόδρα γάρ
.
Cf. Apol. 38Bνῦν δὲ—οὐ
γὰρ
ἔστινand note in loc. Here διὰ ταῦτα sums up the clause σφόδρα γὰρ—
λέγειν .
CHAPTER XXXII
The original question is now resumed, Socrates expressing
himself disparagingly on poetical criticism. With some reluctance
Protagoras consents to submit himself again to Socrates' interrogatory.
5. ἔστι μέντοὶ καὶ ἐμοὶ κτλ.
Imitated
in Hipp. Maior , 286 A, where Hippias says ἔστι γάρ μοι περὶ αὐτῶν πάγκαλος
λόγος
συγκείμενος καὶ ἄλλως εὖ διακείμενος καὶ τοῖς ὀνόμασι . Like
Socrates in his recent exposition, Hippias looks upon poetical criticism as a
legitimate field for the exercise of sophistry and wit.
6. ἐπιδείξω
: see on ἐπιδειξάμενος in
328D
8. ὡμολογησάτην
: in 338D where, however, the terms of the
agreement are somewhat more stringent.
16. καὶ γὰρ δοκεῖ μοι κτλ.
This
passage (from τὸ
περὶ
ποιήσεως down to κἂν πάνυ
πολὺν
οἶνον πίωσιν ) is quoted by Athenaeus, 111. 51. It is
doubtful whether Plato is here animadverting on Xenophon's
Symposium , in which (2. 1 and 9. 3 ff) both a flute-girl
and a dancing-girl appear: the words τοῖς
συμποσίοις τοῖς τῶν φαύλων καὶ ἀγοραίων ἀνθρώπων would
contain a very pretty hit at Xenophon, if the evidence for the allusion were
more complete. There is a similar passage in the Symposium of
Plato (176E) εἰσηγοῦμαι τὴν μὲν ἄρτι
εἰσελθοῦσαν αὐλητρίδα χαίρειν ἐᾶν, αὐλοῦσαν ἑαυτῇ ἢ ἂν βούληται ταῖς
γυναιξὶ ταῖς
ἔνδον : this passage Athenaeus (XI. 112) cites in support
of his theory of a literary rivalry between Plato and Xenophon.
18. ἀγοραίων
: like the
Latin circumforanei , ‘
ἀγοραῖος , vel ut critici veteres volunt,
ἀγόραιος , est ὁ
ἐν
ἀγορᾷ τεθραμμένος , s. qui totos dies forum conterit, quem ἀγορᾶς περίτριμμα Comicus
appellat, vilis et ex ima plebe homo, Aristoph. Eqq. 181 ὁτιὴ
πονηρὸς κἀξ ἀγορᾶς εἶ καὶ θρασύς : 214 τὰ δ’ ἄλλα σοι πρόσεστι
δημαγωγικά, φωνὴ μιαρά, γέγονας κακῶς, ἀγόραιος εἶ ’
(Heindorf).
21. τιμίας ποιοῦσι τὰς
αὐλητρίδας
: ‘run up the price of flute-players’: τὸ γὰρ
σπάνιον—τίμιον ( Euthyd. 304B). Heindorf aptly quotes Xen. De
Vect. IV. 10 χρυσίον ὄταν πολὺ παραφανῇ
αὐτὸ μὲν ἀτιμότερον γίγνεται, τὸ δὲ ἀργύριον τιμιώτερον ποιεῖ
.
25. καὶ πεπαιδευμένοι
. So Athenaeus (III. 51) and the second
hand in T: B and T read πεπαιδευμένοι .
Schanz brackets πεπαιδευμένοι , but ὑπὸ
ἀπαιδευσίας in l. 21 is in its favour.
30. κἂν πάνυ πολὺν οἶνον πίωσιν
: like Socrates in the Symposium
: see 220A, 223C. In
Laws , I. 637B ff. Plato argues that wine properly used is
the means of teaching self-control, since the man who will be σώφρων when drunk will a
fortiori be σώφρων when sober: cf. ibid. II. 673E ff.
31. ἐὰν μὲν κτλ.
μένsuggests that in different society
the same would not be the case—an antithesis which is already expressed in 347C D. Cf. Apol. 17Bεἰ μὲν
γὰρ
τοῦτο λέγουσιν,
ὁμολογοίην ἂν ἔγωγε οὐ κατὰ τούτους εἶναι ῥήτωρ. For λάβωνται cf. (with Sauppe) Symp. 218Aνέου
ψυχῆς
μὴ ἀφυοῦς ὅταν λάβωνταιcf. (sc. οἱ
ἐν
φιλοσοφίᾳ λόγοι ).
33. οὔτε ἀνερέσθαι—ἐπαγόμενοί τε
: for the sentiment see on 329A above: for
οὔτε—τε on
309B for αὐτούς after οὕς on 313Aἐπάγεσθαι is the regular word for ‘cite’,
e.g. Rep. II. 364Cμάρτυρας
ποιητὰς ἐπάγονται.
36. ὃ ἀδυνατοῦσιν
: ὅ , not in B and T, was restored by
Heindorf: it has since been found in a Vienna MS.
38. ἐῶσιν
: the subject is
supplied from ἀνδρῶν οἷοίπερ ἡμῶν
οἱ πολλοί φασιν εἶναι .
41. καταθεμένους
:
for the asyndeton see on 330A Both here
and in Tim. 59C
κατατίθεσθαιis not used in the sense of laying aside for
good, but rather (as generally) putting away to be resumed
again. ‘Putting the poets on their shelves’ would give the effect of the
Greek.
45. παρέχειν
: see on συγκαθεῖναι in
336A above.
51. καὶ νῦν
: as before 336B
54. ἵνα τούτῳ μὲν ταῦτα
συνειδῶμεν
. Symp. 193Eεἰ μὴ
συνῄδη Σωκράτει τε καὶ Ἀγάθωνι δεινοῖς οὖσι περὶ τὰ ἐρωτικά.
In σύνοιδα ἐμαυτῷ ἀγαθῷ ὄντι συν‐ goes
with ἐμαυτῷ —I am conscious with myself
that I am good—by the convenient fiction which separates the observing ego from the observed. Cases where the dative is
not a reflexive pronoun are later in development and presuppose only
knowledge about, not knowledge along with, the object.
56. ὥς γέ μοι
. B has ὥστε μοι , T ὡς
γ’ ἐμοί ( sic ). There is no occasion
for the emphatic form of the pronoun.
58. τῶν ἄλλων σχεδόν τι.
σχεδόν τιneed not be accompanied by πάντες : compare Phaedo ,
59C ἄλλος δέ τις παρῆν;
σχεδόν τι οἶμαι τούτους παραγενέσθαι .
59. προὐτράπετο
. No
other example of the aorist middle of
προτρέπω is quoted from any Attic author, but ἐτραπόμην is common, e.g. Apol. 21Bμόγις
πάνυ
ἐπὶ ζήτησιν αὐτοῦ τοιαύτην
τινὰ ἐτραπόμην.
60. ἐκέλευεν
:
the imperfect of this verb is used in narrative style for the
aorist.
CHAPTER XXXIII
After a prefatory compliment to Protagoras, Socrates again asks
whether the five virtues are only different names for one thing
or differ in reality from one another.
4. τὸν Ὅμηρον τό.
τόgoes with the whole quotation, to which τι is in predicative apposition (cf. τί τοῦτο λέγεις and the like), literally ‘I
think that what Homer says, etc., is something’, i.e. ‘I think there is sense in
what Homer says’. Schanz brackets τὸν
Ὅμηρον , so as to make the articular clause the subject to λέγειν as in Ar.
Knights , 334, but there is no occasion for the change. The
quotation had become almost proverbial (cf. Symp. 174D, Alc. II , 140A) for
‘Two heads are better than one’: it is from Il. X. 224 ff., where Diomedes says: σύν τε δὔ ἐρχομένω, καί τε πρὸ ὁ τοῦ ἐνόησεν, ὄππως
κέρδος ἔῃ· μοῦνος δ’ εἴ πέρ
τε νοήσῃ, ἀλλά τέ οἱ βράσσων τε νόος λεπτὴ δέ τε μῆτις . Leaf
( in
loc. ) explains ἐρχομένω as a
pendent accusative and for the order of words in πρὸ
ὁ τοῦ cites Il. V. 219ἐπὶ νὼ τῷδ’
ἀνδρί.
6. εὐπορώτεροι—ἐσμεν
, i.e. οὕτως
ἔχοντες (viz. σὺν δύο
ἐρχομένω ); it is hardly necessary to read οὕτως πως or to change πως into οὕτως
as Heindorf suggests.
8. αὐτίκα περιιὼν—ἐντύχῃ
. The
ἐπιδείξηται and βεβαιώσηται
—deliberative subjunctives—of the MSS. would imply too much eagerness: the
change to ἐπιδείξεται and
βεβαιώσεται is adopted by Sauppe and others. This mistake
(or the reverse) is tolerably frequent in Plato's MSS., cf. Gorg. 489A(
βεβαιώσωμαι T, βεβαιώσομαι B),
505E ( ποιήσωμεν BT), 510A ( ἀδικήσωμεν BT).
10. ἕνεκα τοὐτου
refers
to the following clause introduced by ἡγούμενος
. Heindorf refers to his note on Phaedo , 102D λέγω
δὲ τοῦδ’ ἕνεκα, βουλόμενος δόξαι σοὶ ὅπρ ἐμοί .
17. ὥστε καὶ κτλ.
The
reference is to 316D ff. καί does not go with ἄλλων but with the whole sentence (as
Sauppe points out).
19. ὑποκηρυξάμενος
‘having
had yourself heralded as a sophist’: compare Aeschin. in
Ctes. 41 ἄλλοι δέ τινες
ὑποκηρυξάμενοι τοὺς
αὑτῶν οἰκέτας ἀφίεσαν ἀπελευθέρους . The force of ὑπο‐ is probably the same as in ὑπεῖπον : see note on 343E Notice the effect of the double σεαυτόν (both of them after a natural
pause): σεαυτὸν ὑποκηρυξάμενος—σεαυτὸν ἀπέφηνας
: the ‐αυτόν is brought out so strongly as
to suggest that Protagoras is the only true Αὐτός
or Master.
22. μισθὸν—ἄρνυσθαι
: 328B where however it is not said that
Protagoras was the first to take a fee. The Homeric word ἄρνυσθαι is occasionally used by prose
writers in the phrase μισθὸν
ἄρνυσθαι : whence μισθαρνεῖν
.
25. ἐκεῖνα—τὰ μὲν—τὰ δέ
: see above on
330A
27. ἦν δὲ—τόδε
: 329C ff.
39. ἕκαστα
attracted for ἔκαστον : so Rep. VIII. 546Cδεομένων
ἑνὸς ἑκάστων, i.e. ‘lacking—each of them—one’.
42. οὐδέν σοι ὑπόλογον τίθεμαι.
ὑπόλογον τίθεμαιlike ὑπόλογον ποιοῦμαι ( Lach. 189B) and
ὑπολογίζομαι ( Apol. 28B) is ‘to set down against’, ‘per
contra’, whence ‘object’ as here.
CHAPTER XXXIV
Protagoras gives up what he had contended for before, and
contents himself with saying that courage alone is quite different
from its sister virtues. Socrates endeavours to identify courage
and knowledge in a cumbrous proof, against the validity of
which Protagoras rightly protests.
2. μόρια μέν
. The
antithesis to μέν was already expressed in ἔφησθα οὖν σὺ οὐκ ὀνόματα ἐπὶ ἑνὶ
εἶναι349B
4. ἡ δὲ ἀνδρεία κτλ.
Protagoras
therefore yields to Socrates' arguments so far as they have yet gone, and
takes his stand on the only virtue the relation of which to the others has
not yet been discussed: see on
333C and D and Introduction, p. xiii.
7. ἀκολαστοτάτους—ἀνδρειοτάτους
δέ
: like Otho (Tac.
Hist. II. 49), apropos of whose death Merivale quotes the lines of
Byron, which well illustrate the sentiment of Plato:
And strange to say, the sons of pleasure,
They who have revelled beyond measure
In beauty, wassail, wine and treasure,
Die calm, and calmer oft than he
Whose heritage was misery.
8. ἀνδρειοτάτους δὲ
διαφερόντως
. The extreme difference (cf. πάνυ πολὺ διαφέρον in l. 4) between courage
and the other virtues is brought out by representing those most lacking in
the other virtues as sometimes ‘supremely brave beyond all others’: below in
359B the διαφερόντως is
omitted as unnecessary in a recapitulation. Sauppe quotes Tim. 23Cἡ νῦν
Ἀθηναίων
οὖσα πόλιςἀρίστη
πρός τε
τὸν πόλεμον καὶ κατὰ πάντα εὐνομωτάτη διαφερόντως: cf.
also Gorg. 487Bαἰσχυντηροτέρω
μᾶλλον τοῦ δέοντος. Various suggestions have been proposed, but
the text is sound.
ἔχε δή
. ‘Hac sistendi formula aut
monetur, qui rectam viam ingressus est, ut caveat, ut hic et Gorg. 460A,
aut revocatur, qui a recta aberravit, ut Prot. 349D rsquo; (Wohlrab on Theaet. 186B).
9. πότερον τοὺς ἀνδρείους
θαρραλέους κτλ.
Socrates proceeds by reasoning thus: (1) ἀνδρεῖοι are
θαρραλέοι ; (2) ἐπιστήμονες are
θαρραλέοι ( 349E l. 16
to 350B l. 25); (3) none who are θαρραλέοι without
ἐπιστήμη are ἀνδρεῖοι ( 350B ll. 25-30). From this he infers
that σοφοί (i.e.
ἐπιστήμονες ) are
ἀνδρεῖοι , i.e. that σοφία
is ἀνδρεία . The reasoning is far from
cogent. In the first place, we have to assume (it is
nowhere stated) that θαρραλέοι contains
two classes and no more, viz. θαρραλέοι
with knowledge and θαρραλέοι without
knowledge: the assumption would be (to Socrates) a natural one, since
(according to the reasoning in ch. XIX ff.) every one who is not ἐπιστήμων is
ἀνεπιστήμων . Now as ἀνδρεῖοι
are θαρραλέοι and no ἀνεπιστήμονες (in the class θαρραλέοι ) are
ἀνδρεῖοι , it follows that ἀνδρεῖοι
are ἐπιστήμονες , but even then the
conclusion of Socrates is not warranted— that
ἐπιστήμονες are ἀνδρεῖοι , since ἀνδρεῖοι may be only a part of ἐπιστήμονες . Socrates —consciously or
unconsciously—covers his erroneous reasoning by another fallacy when about
to draw his conclusion in 350B , ll. 31
and 34, where see note.
10. καὶ ἴτας γ’, ἔφη
:
i.e. they not only have θάρρος (which may
be quiescent) but they put it into action. In ἰέναι
Protagoras contrives to give the derivation of ἴτης
: Sauppe refers to the scholiast on Ar.
Clouds , 444ἴτης. ἰταμός, ἀναιδής,
καὶ δῑ αὐτῶν
χωρῶν τῶν πραγμάτων. ἀνδρεῖοςis coupled with ἴτης in Symp. 203D and with θρασύς in Ar. Clouds, loc.
cit.
11. φέρε δή κτλ.
This
section (from φέρε δή to ὡς οἷόν τεμάλιστα in l. 16) is intended to prepare
the way for the proof of the third proposition (see on l. 9) in 350B see note on l. 29, and cf.
Laches, 192C, where the proof that ἄφρων
καρτέρησις is not ἀνδρεία is
introduced in much the same way: σχεδὸν γάρ τι
οἶδα—ὅτι τῶν πάνυ καλῶν πραγμάτων ἡγεῖ σὺ ἀνδρείαν εἶναι .
14. εἰ μὴ μαίνομαί γε
: ‘as
I'm a sane man’. This and similar phrases are frequent in Plato, e.g. Euthyd. 283E, Rep. X. 608D ( εἰ μὴ ἀδικῶ γε ), Gorg. 511Bοἶδα—εἰ
μὴ
κωφός γ’ εἰμι.
17. αολυμβῶσιν
. This
and the next example are given also in Lach. 193 B ff. Sauppe
thinks that the object of such diving (an art in which the Greeks were very
expert: see Thuc. IV. 26. 8) may have been to clean the wells and the like.
21. τίνες δὲ πέλτας ἔχοντες
.
See Introduction, p. xxxii.
24. αὐτοὶ ἑαυτῶν—ἤ
.
The notion ‘than’ is expressed twice: see note on Crito, 44Cκαίτοι
τίς
ἂν αἰσχίων εἴη ταύτης δόξα ἢ
δοκεῖν κτλ., and cf. below,
350E and (with Sauppe) Hdt. VIII. 86ἐγένοντο—μακρῷ ἀμείνονες αὐτοὶ ἑωυτῶν ἢ πρὸς
Εὐβοίῃ .
29. αἰσχρὸν
μεντἄν—ἀνδρεία
: and if
αἰσχρόν , not ἀρετή (which it
is), since all ἀρετή is καλόν ( 349E
. Cf. Lach. 182Cἡ δέ
γε ἀνδρεία ὡμολογεῖτο καλὸν εἶναιand with the general
sentiment Meno, 88Bοἶον
ἀνδρεία,
εἰ μὴ ἔστι φρόνησις ἡ ἀνδρεία ἀλλ’ οἶον
θάππος τι· οὐχ ὅταν μὲν ἄνευ νοῦ θαππῇ ἄνθπωρος, βλάρτεται, ὅταν
δὲ
σὺν νῷ, ὠφελεῖται;
30. λέγεις
: the present is
idiomatically used in referring to an earlier part of a discussion not yet
ended: see on ὅπερ λέγω in Apol. 21A. With
λέγεις followed by an accusative in this sense compare Symp. 199Eπειρῶ δὴ
καὶ
τὸν Ἔρωτα εἰπεῖν· ὁ Ἔρως
ἔρως ἐστὶν οὐδενὸς ἢ τινός;
31. οὐχὶτοὺς θαρραλέους εἶναι
. This Protagoras did not say, but only
that οἱ
ἀνδρεῖοι are θαρραλέοι :
see 349E For this reason Sauppe and others
reject τούς before
θαρραλέους , and in favour of this urge the reply of Protagoras ( καὶ νῦν γε ): but inasmuch as (1) οὐκοῦν οὗτοι—μαινόμενοι
φαίνονται seems to be intended to be incompatible with τοὺς ἀνδρείους οὐχὶ—εἷναι , (2) θαρραλεώτατοιδὲ ὄντες ἀνδρειότατοι in l. 35 clearly
implies that θαρραλέοι are conceived of as ἀνδρεῖοι (no less than ἀνδρεῖοι as
θαρραλέοι ), we must, if we regard the argument as a whole, retain
the MSS. reading. Protagoras' καὶ νῦν γε
is an unwary admission: he does not at first catch the difference between οἱ ἀνδρεῖοί εἰσιν οἱ θαρραλέοι and οἱ ἀνδρεῖοί εἰσι θαρραλέοι , and Socrates
avails himself of his opponent's slip to hasten to his conclusion—which but
for this misrepresentation could only be expressed as ἀνδρεῖοι are σοφοί
( =
ἐπιστήμονες ), not σοφοί
are ἀνδρεῖοι : see on 349E and
350D
34. ἐκεῖ
, i.e. in the case
of θάρρος based on
σοφία , illustrated in 350A
Sauppe (after Schöne) reads οἳ σοφώτατοι, οὗτοι κτλ.
: but οἱ σοφώτατοι need not go closely
with οὗτοι (which is resumptive) any more
than οἱ οὕτω θαρραλέοι ὄντες with the
preceding οὗτοι . There is a kind of
chiasmus in the order οὗτοι—
οἱ—θαρραλέοι ) ( οἱ σοφώτατοι
οὗτοι .
36. οὐ καλῶς—μνημονεύεις κτλ
. Protagoras sees now that ‘All brave are bold’ is
not equivalent to ‘All bold are brave’, and rectifies his καὶ νῦν γε by pointing out that he
originally said only ‘All brave are bold’ but he confines his attention to
this point, without touching on the fundamental flaws in Socrates' argument
from
349E to 350B
39. ὡμολόγησα
: in 349E
40. τότε ἤρου
. So B and
T. In τότε there is perhaps a latent
contrast to καὶ νῦν γε of l. 31.
Protagoras is correcting his recent slip—had you asked me then (viz. at 349E , I should have answered rightly. τοῦτο has inferior MSS. authority.
41. τοὺς δὲ ἀνδρείους ὡς οὐ
θαρραλέοι εἰσίν
. The οὐ
after
ὡς is due to a confusion between (1) τοὺς
δὲ ἀνδρείους ὡς
οὐ θαρραλέοι εἰσίν, οὐδαμοῦ ἐπέδειξας and (2) οἱ δὲ ἀνδρεῖοι ὡς
θαρραλέοι εἰσίν, τὸ ἐμὸν ὁμολόγημα, οὐδαμοῦ κτλ. The
insertion of οὐ is the more natural
because after verbs of refuting and the like the object clause gives what is
maintained and not what is refuted, whence ἐλέγχειν
ὡς οὐ, ἀντιλέγειν ὡς οὐ etc.
45. καὶ ἐν τούτῳ οἴει κτλ.
Protagoras
ignores Socrates'
third proposition in 350B
(25-30), where it is shown that θάρρος
without
ἐπιστήμη is not ἀνδρεία
; see next note.
48. πρῶτον μὲν γὰρ κτλ.
,
i.e. you might as well argue (1) οἱ
ἰσχυροί are δυνατοί , (2) οἱ ἐπιστήμονες are
δυνατοί , therefore οἱ
ἐπιστήμονες are ἰσχυροί
. This would only be correct if for (1) we substituted οἱ δυνατοί are
ἰσχυροί . To make Protagoras' picture of Socrates' argument
complete, we should have to add (3) none who are
δυνατοί without ἐπιστήμη are
ἰσχυροί —but this is not true, whereas Socrates' third
proposition is. The completed picture therefore fails to represent correctly
Socrates' reasoning in each of its steps, but none the less are Protagoras'
objections strictly relevant, and indeed fatal to Socrates' conclusion as
expressed in 350C (33-6), and that is why
Socrates makes no reply.
58. ἀπὸ ἐπιστήμης—τὴν δύναμιν κτλ.
Protagoras says in effect:
δύναμις and
ἰσχύς are of the body, θάρσος
and ἀνδρεία of the soul. δύναμις may come from knowledge (as when
one has learnt how to wrestle: above
350E , or from madness or rage (as in the feats of madmen, or
men inspired with the thirst for vengeance; such men have no real physical
strength or ἰσχύς as it is presently
defined, but excel themselves by virtue of
δύναμις ). ἰσχύς comes
from natural constitution ( φύσις ) and
proper nurture of the body (by gymnastics in the widest sense). Similarly θάρσος may result from art ( τέχνη is substituted for ἐπιστήμη in view of the illustrations in 350A , from rage or madness (as when
Empedocles leapt into Etna); ἀνδρεία comes
from the native character and proper nurture of the soul (cf. Rep. III. 410Dτὸ
θυμοειδὲς—τῆς φύσεως—ὀρθῶς μὲν τραφὲν
ἀνδπεῖον ἂν εἴη, μᾶλλον δ’ ἐπιταθὲν τοῦ δέοντος σκληπόν τε καὶ
χαλερὸν
γίγνοιτ’ ἄν, ὡς τὸ εἰκός).
CHAPTER XXXV
Here Socrates, taking a fresh start, endeavours to make Protagoras assent to
the doctrine that pleasure is good. Protagoras
desires to have the question examined. He allows that wherever
knowledge is present, it must rule, but this is inconsistent with
the view that one can know the better and do the worse. It is
agreed to examine this popular view, in case the inquiry should
throw light on the relation between courage and the rest of
virtue. On the ethical doctrine of this and the following chapters
see Introduction, p. xxvi.
3. εὖ ζῆν εἰ ἀνιώμενος—ζῴη
. There is the usual ambiguity in εὖ ζῆν : see on
344E above.
5. οὐκ εὖ ἄν σοι δοκεῖ
.
The MSS. have
δοκοῖ , which all the editors (except Heindorf) retain.
The meaning required is: ‘would he not, think you, have lived well?’ (to
which Protagoras replies ἔμοιγε sc. δοκεῖ ), not ‘would
you not think he has lived well?’ and
δοκεῖ is as necessary here as in ἆρ’
οὖν δοκεῖ
σοι ἄνθρωπος ἂν εὖ ζῆν εἰ—ζῴη above. The idiom is attested
by abundant examples, e.g. Ar.
Plut. 380καὶ μὴν φίλως γ’
ἄν μοι
δοκεῖς, νὴ τοὺς θεούς, τρεῖς μνᾶς ἀναλώσας λογίσασθαι δώδεκα
,
Wasps, 1404-5 εἰ νὴ Δί’
ἀντὶ τῆς κακῆς γλώττης ποθὲν πυροὺς
πρίαιο σωφρονεῖν ἄν μοι δοκεῖς : in Plato it is extremely
frequent, e.g. Rep. 1. 335Bπάνυ μὲν
οὖν οὕτως ἄν μοι δοκεῖ καλῶς λέγεσθαι , Alc. I,
105C εἰ αὖ σοι
εἴποι—οὐκ ἂν αὖ μοι δοκεῖς ἐθέλειν , Gorg.
514E, cf. Euthyd. 294B,
306BGorg. 522A, and below 357A The corruption is natural: it
occurs also in the MSS. of Ar. Wasps,loc. cit.
10. ἐγὼ γὰρ λέγω
: i.e.
‘I mean’ not ‘I say’: cf. below, l. 23 in E. Socrates puts his question in a
different form inviting an affirmative answer. After the ἡδέα following Heindorf would insert τὰ ἡδέα , but the subject is easily
supplied.
11. μὴ εἴ τι—ἄλλο
. So B
and the first hand in T. The clause εἴ
τι—ἄλλο defines negatively the meaning of κατὰ τοῦτο , as καθ’
ὃ ἡδέα ἐστίν defined it positively. μή
deprecates or forbids the possible misunderstanding: its use in the
idiomatic μὴ ὅτι is the same in kind: see
above on 319D To read εἰ μή τι (with the second hand in T) would
be to beg the whole question— that step is not reached
till 353D
18. ἔστι μὲν ἃ κτλ.
See
on ἀνθρώποις μὲν—ὠφέλιμα in 334A
26. ἐὰν μὲν πρὸς λόγον κτλ.
πρὸς λόγονdoes not (except per
accidens ) mean ‘relevant’ but is equivalent to εὔλογον : compare the phrases μετὰ λόγου, κατὰ λόγον ; and, for the use
of πρός, πρὸς ὀργήν, πρὸς βίαν and the
like. So in 343D
344A Here the meaning is further explained by the
clause καὶ τὸ αὐτὸ—
ἀγαθόν. τὸ σκέμμα is quite different from σκέψις : it is not the inquiry itself, but
the proposition to be inquired into, viz. that Pleasure
is good: if this proposition is reasonable, says Protagoras, we shall accept
it, if not, we shall dispute it. The sentiment does not deserve the scorn
which Heindorf pours upon it, if only we catch the force of πρὸς λόγον, σκέμμα and ἀμφισβητήσομεν .
31. δίκαιος—σύ
. Plato
very frequently omits the copula ἐστίν; εἶ
and ἐσμέν more rarely, εἶναι often, ἦν
rarely, parts of the conjunctive and optative very rarely. Schanz, Novae
Commentationes Platonicae, 31-5.
κατάρχεις
: a lofty word (here used with a
touch of irony) with religious associations: the middle is used of
beginning a sacrifice. Cf. Symp. 177Eἀλλὰ
τύχῃ
ἀγαθῆ? καταρχέτω Φαῖδρος
καὶ ἐγκωμιαζέτω τὸν Ἔρωταand ibid.
176A.
34. ἢ πρὸς ἄλλο τι
. It is
not of course implied that ὑγίεια is an ἔργον σώματος , i.e. something ὃ σῶμα ἐργάζεται . Examples of σώματος ἔργα would be different kinds of
bodily labour. ἢ πρὸς
ὑγίειαν κτλ. is equivalent to πῶς
ἔχει ἢ πρὸς ὑγίειαν κτλ. : cf. below
352Bπῶς
ἔχεις
πρὸς ἐπιστήμην;
35. τὸ πρόσωπον καὶ τὰς χεῖρας ἄκρας
: the rest being covered by clothes. χείρ is not hand here (otherwise χεῖρας
ἄκρας would be the tips of the fingers), but the arm, as
in Homer's φίλας περὶ χεῖρε βαλόντε ( Od. XI. 211).
37. ἐπισκέψωμαι
. The
word is apt here, as it is often used of a medical inspection: cf. Phaedo, 117Eἐπεσκόπει
τοὺς πόδας
καὶ τὰ σκέλη. With the whole passage cf. Theaet. 162Aἆρα
κἂν
εἰς Λακεδαίμονα ἐλθὼν—πρὸς τὰς παλαίστρας ἀξιοῖς ἂν ἄλλους
θεώμενος
γυμνούς, ἐνίους φαύλους, αὐτὸς μὴ ἀντεπιδεικνύναι τὸ εἶδος
παραποδυόμενος;
39. θεασάμενος
: with
the usual asyndeton; see on 330A
42. καὶ τοῦτο·
καίrefers to
351C D.
45. ἡγεμονικόν
: this
word was afterwards selected by the Stoics to denote τὸ
κυριώτατον τῆς ψυχῆς, ἐν ᾧ αἱ φαντασίαι καὶ αἱ
ὁρμαὶ γίνονται (Diog. Laert. VII. 159).
46. ὡς περὶ τοιούτου αὐτοῦ ὄντος
: see on 337E
51. περὶ τῆς ἐπιστήμης ὥσπερ περί
: see the reference in the last note. Aristotle
alludes to this passage in Eth.
Nic. VII. 2. 1145 b . 23 δεινὸν γὰρ ἐπιστήμης ἐνούσης, ὡς ᾤετο Σωκράτης,
ἄλλο
τι κρατεῖν καὶ περιέλκειν αὐτὴν ὥσπερ ἀνδράποδον .
54. ἐάνπερ γιγνώσκῃ—μὴ ἂν
κρατηθῆναι
: a frequent theme in Plato, e.g. Meno, 77Bff., Gorg. 466Dff., two passages which contain much
in common with the discussion in this and the next chapter.
56. ἢ ἃ ἂν ἡ
: the reading of
Stephanus; B has ἢ ἃ ἡ , T ἢ ἂν ἡ .
59. αἰσχρὸν—μὴ οὐχί
.
Goodwin, M.T. p. 327, § 817. As a
σοφιστής himself Protagoras must exalt
σοφία .
62. καλῶς γε σὺ λέγων
:
sc. φὴ|ς τοῦτο , to be supplied from φάναι .
73. ὑπὸ τῶν ἡδονῶν ἡττᾶσθαι
is virtually within inverted commas. With καὶ οὐ the sentence which started as a
relative clause becomes independent: see note on
313A
Although pleasures are sometimes called evil and pains good,
it is in such cases their consequences which are intended to be
so called: at the time itself all pain is evil, and all pleasure good.
The argument proceeds by these stages: First, the meaning of ἥττω εἶναι τῶν ἡδονῶν is explained ( 353C : next, it is shown that pleasures are
called evil when they bring pain in their train or loss of pleasure, not because
they are pleasant themselves ( 353C354A , and that pains are called good because
they bring pleasure in their train or escape from pain, not because they are
painful themselves ( 354A354C ; therefore pleasure in
itself is good, and pain evil ( 354C E). The
rest of the chapter forms an introduction to the chapter which follows.
3. ἐλέγομεν
is more
humble than λέγομεν —the idea is ‘used to
call’ till you said it was wrong.
4. ἀκούετε δή
:
Socrates bespeaks ‘Attention!’ like a herald. ἀκούετε
λεῴ (e.g. Ar. Peace,
551) was the usual way of beginning a proclamation at Athens. Cf. Apol. 20D, 32A, Theaet. 201D.
5. ἄλλο τι
. This, the
shorter form of this particle of interrogation, is probably not a deliberate
abbreviation for ἄλλο τι ἤ. Thus ἄλλο τι τοῦτο ἀληθές ἐστιν = ‘this is
true—anything else?’ i.e. isn't it?, the words being thrown in
parenthetically like nicht wahr and n'est
ce pas.
6. ἐν τοῖσδε—οί=ον·
τοῖσδεwould lead us to expect an
enumeration of the cases: as it is, only examples are given. The effect of
the Greek may be brought out by ‘in the following cases—that often for
example, etc.’ With this punctuation it is needless to write (as Kroschel
does) τοιοῖσδε for
τοῖσδε .
16. ὅμως δ’ ἂν κακὰ ἦν
.
So the MSS.: most recent editors (except Kral) read
εἴη . The imperfect is used because the answer ‘No’ is expected
and desired: would they be evil just because they give us pleasure?
Certainly not. See Goodwin, M.T. p. 190, § 503.
Schleiermacher wrongly rejected
δέ after ὅμως : the
‘apodotic δέ ’ is frequent after ὅμως, ὡσαύτως, οὕτω and the like.
16. ὅ τι μαθόντα ποιεῖ κτλ
.
So the MSS. A variety of emendations have been proposed for μαθόντα , such as
ἁμαρτόντα (Schleiermacher, followed by Heindorf), ἀμαθαίνοντα (Orelli), παρόντα (Hermann),
παθόντα (Sauppe and others), while Kroschel doubts the entire
passage ἦν—ὁπῃοῦν , saying ‘Totus autem
locus ita comparatus est ut de eius emendatione desperandum esse videatur’.
It would be natural to regard this particular passage as corrupt if this
were an isolated example of the idiom in question; but—not to mention other
authors—it occurs also in the following passages of Plato: Apol. 36Bτίἄξιός εἰμι παθεῖν ἢ ἀποτῖσαι,
ὅ τι
μαθὼν ἐν τῷ βίῳ οὐχ ἡσυχίαν
ἦγον; Euthyd.283E εἰ μὴ ἀγροικότερον—ἦν εἰπεῖν, εἶπον ἄν, σοὶ
εἰς κεφαλήν, ὅ τι μαθὼν ἐμοῦ—καταψεύδει κτλ. ; ibid. 299A πολὺ
μέντοι—δικαιότεπον ἂν τὸν ὑμέτεπον ρατέπα τύρτοιμι, ὅ τι μαθὼν
σοφοὺς υἱεῖς οὕτως ἔφυσεν . In each of these cases the
MSS. reading μαθών (not παθών ) should be retained. In the direct
speech τί μαθών is used in an impatient
question: τί μαθὼν τοῦτο
ἐποίησας is ‘what ever made you think of doing this?’
(e.g. Ar. Clouds, 1506 ,
Wasps, 251, Ach. 826): cf. the idiom τί ληρεῖς
ἔχων; in which τί depends on
ἔχων (see Kühner, Gr. Gr. II, 624). τί
μαθών becomes in the indirect ὅ
τι
μαθών , but in every case in which this phrase occurs in
Plato ὅ τι μαθών means not ‘why’ but
‘because’. The transition in meaning is sometimes explained as parallel to
the use of οἶος, ὅσος, ὡς etc. for ὅτι τοιοῦτος, ὅτι
τοσοῦτος, ὅτι οὕτως , so that ὅ
τι
μαθών = ὅτι τοῦτο μαθών
; but a simpler explanation is perhaps possible (see my edition of the
Apol. Appendix II, p. 123). ὅ τι μαθών
is an impatient ὅ τι just as τί μαθών is an impatient τί ; but as ὅτι
and ὅ τι are in reality the same word (see
on 333B , and ὅτι
means ‘because’, ὅ τι
μαθών comes also to mean ‘because’ (impatiently), the
original interrogative force being lost. Similarly, in sentences like ληρεῖς
ἔχων , the interrogation is dropped, and the participle
alone survives, conveying the same sense of blame or impatience as in τί ληρεῖς ἔχων; which
is probably the form of sentence in which this idiom originated. Here μαθόντα is of course the nom. plur.; if (as
we suppose) the original force of the participle is no longer felt in this
idiom, there is nothing harsh in finding it in agreement with a neuter
subject.
29. οὐκοῦν πάλιν ἂν—ἐροίμεθα
. There is no sufficient reason for
changing ἄν to
αὖ or for omitting ἄν : ἄν points forward to the apodosis in l. 35 φαῖεν ἄν and is just as idiomatic as ἄν in ὥσπερ
ἂν εἰ , e.g. in 311B
above.
33. καύσεών
τε—λιμοκτονιῶν
. Gorg. 521Eπολλὰ
ὑμᾶς
καὶ κακὰ ὅδε εἴργασται ἁνήρ(sc. ὁ
ἰατρός )— τέμνων τε καὶ κάων,
καὶ ἰσχναίνων καὶ ρνίγων—ρικπότατα ρώματα διδοὺς καὶ ρεινῆν καὶ
διψῆν ἀναγκάζων. λιμοκτονία (‘Hungerkur’, says Stallbaum)
is part of the μικρὰ δίαιτα of Rep. III. 406D.
40. ἄλλων ἀρχαί
:
‘dominions over others’—not ἄλλων
πόλεων : cf. Gorg. 452Dαἴτιον
ἅμα
μὲν ἐλευθερίας αὐτοῖς τοῖς
ἀνθρώποις, ἄμα δὲ τοῦ ἄλλων ἄρχειν ἐν τῇ αὑτοῦ πόλει ἑκάστῳ.
Heindorf's conjecture ἄλλαι (i.e.
‘besides’) is not necessary, in view of Gorg. 514A(quoted by Sauppe) ἢ χρήματα πολλὰ
λαμβάνειν ἢ ἀρχήν τινων ἢ ἄλλην δύναμιν ἡντινοῦν .
43. τέλος
. The
philosophical sense of this word—as an end of action—is beginning to appear
in Plato: cf. Gorg. 499Eἆρα
καὶ σοὶ συνδοκεῖ οὕτω, τέλος εἶναι ἁπασῶν τῶν πράξεων τὸ ἀγαθὸν
κτλ.;
44. ἀλλ’ ἢ ἡδονάς
is
Stephanus' emendation for ἀλλ’ ἡδονάς .
47. ὡς ἀγαθὸν ὄν
: the
copula is attracted to the predicate, as regularly: cf. below, 359Dτὸ ἥττω
εἶvαι ἑαυτοῦ ηὑρέθη ἀμαθία οὖσα .
64. εἴ με ἀνέροισθε
:
without the φαίην
ἄν which we should expect. Socrates apostrophises the ἄνθρωποι as if they stood before him; the φαίην ἂν ἔγωγε of l. 66 is part of what
Socrates says to the
ἄνθρωποι .
68. ἐν τούτῳ
: see on 310D above. πᾶσαι
αἱ ἀποδείξεις means all the proofs that pleasure is good and pain
evil.
69. ἀναθέσθαι
suggests
(as often) draughts-playing: a comparison which is worked up into a simile
by Plato in Rep. VI. 487B-C.
71. ἢ τὸ κακὸν ἄλλο τι
. B
and T have ἤ before ἄλλο τι by a natural mistake: it is
corrected in T by a later hand.
77. ἄνθρωπος
: so the
MSS., but ὁ ἄνθρωπος in line 80. Kroschel
refers to the variation in 321Dἄνθρωπον—τῷ ἀνθρώπῳ
—ἀνθρώπω?—ἄνθρωπος . Cf. below
355E
79. καὶ αὖθις αὖ λέγετε
.
We should of course expect λέγητε , but
the second part of a logically subordinate clause in Greek tends to become
an independent clause: see on 313A
CHAPTER XXXVII
The meaning of the phrase ‘to be overcome by pleasure’ is now
explained in conformity with the results of the last chapter.
If we substitute ‘good’ for ‘pleasure’ the common saying that we do evil, knowing
it to be evil, because overcome by ‘pleasure’, becomes ‘we do evil knowing it to
be evil, because overcome by good’ ( 355B C).
‘To be overcome by good’ is shown to be the choosing of greater evil in place of
lesser good (D-E). Similarly, substituting pleasure for good, and pain for evil,
we have the sentiment ‘we do the painful, knowing it to be painful, because
overcome by pleasure’, and here also ‘to be overcome by pleasure’ is to choose
in place of lesser pleasures greater pains ( 355E356A . No doubt in this case the pleasures are
present and the pains remote, but we make allowance for this in our process of
weighing pleasures and pains against themselves and one another ( 356A C). ‘Near’ and ‘Far’ have the same
bewildering effect on the eyes when we look at size and number; but there the
arts of measurement and of arithmetic resolve our perplexity ( 356C357A . In
like manner there must be some art or knowledge whose function it is to settle
the value of ‘more’ and ‘less’, ‘near’ and ‘far’, etc., in their application to
pleasure and pain. In other words τὸ
ἡδονῆς
ἡττᾶσθαι is due to ignorance ( 357A357E .
2. χρώμεθα ἅμα.
ἅμαis due to a correction in one inferior
MS., approved by Cobet and Kroschel; BT have χρώμεθα ἄρα
. If we read χρώμεθα ἄρα , there are
difficulties serious enough to suggest an error in the reading: (1) the position
of ἄρα is to say the least most unusual: no
example is quoted of ἄρα coming at the end of
a conditional clause in this way; (2) is ἄρα
to be taken with
ἐάν in the usual sense ( si forte ) or as
inferential? The inferential meaning strikes us as somewhat far-fetched, and the
other is both inappropriate here and impossible from the position of the
particle. On the other hand ἅμα is almost
necessary to the sense; without ἅμα , the
words ἐὰν μὴ—χρώμεθα would not
correctly describe Socrates' procedure in the following discussion, in which he does use all four names. But as he does not use them together, his procedure is accurately described by the
addition of ἅμα to
χρώμεθα .
6. θέμενοι—οὕτω·
οὕτωis explained by ὅτι
γιγνώσκων—
αὐτὰ ποιεῖ : ‘let us lay it down and say, etc.’ The thesis of
the many is stated in order to be demolished. With the style of reasoning which
follows cf. Gorg. 499A-B, where (as a reduction
ad
absurdum of the view that pleasure is good and pain evil) it is
argued that in that case the bad man would be just as bad and just as good as
the good man since he feels just as much pain and pleasure as the other: see
also Alc. I, 116 A ἆρ’ οὖν καὶ ᾗ
ἀγαθὸν
καλόν, ᾗ δὲ κακὸν αἰσχπόν; vαί. τὴν ἄπα ἐν τῷ ρολέμῳ τοῖς φίλοις
βοήθειαν λέγων καλὴν μὲν εἶναι, κακὴν δέ, οὐδὲν διαφεπόντως λέγεις ἢ εἰ
προσεῖπες αὐτὴν ἀγαθὴν μέν, κακὴν δέ .
10. ὑπὸ μὲν ἡδονῆς
.
The antithesis is not expressed by a δέ
clause but in ἐκείνῳ δὴ—τοῦ ἀγαθοῦ below.
11. μετείληφεν
: the
subject is ἡδονή and τὸ ἀγαθόν is in apposition to ἄλλο ὄνομα. ἀντὶ τῆς ἡδονῆς means ‘in place
of pleasure’, i.e. the name pleasure.
18. ἐν ὑμῖν
: not ‘before
your tribunal’, but ‘in you’, i.e. inside you, in your souls. The idea is of
a conflict between the good and evil in the soul before you do the evil. ἐν ὑμῖν might have been ἐν αὐτῶ? , but the
ὑβριστής now selects his interlocutors as his examples. The subtle
reasoning which follows may be put thus: We do evil, knowing it to be evil,
because we are overcome by good. But—since that which
we do is evil—the good which overcomes is less worthy than the
evil in us which it overcomes. ‘Less worthy’ (to overcome) means that
‘there is less of it’: to be overcome by good is therefore to choose less
good than evil. The argument is extraordinarily ingenious but hardly sound—
the flaw lies in substituting ‘the evil in us’ for ‘us’; it was not ‘the
evil in us’, but ‘we’ who were overcome by good. See also Introduction, p.
xxvi. The usual way of taking ἐν ὑμῖν as
‘before your tribunal’ or the like (cf. Gorg. 464D) makes the false step much more
serious—since it substitutes not ‘the evil in us’ but simply ‘the evil’ for
‘us’.
21. ἀνάξιά ἐστιν τἀγαθὰ τῶν κακῶν
should be translated literally—‘the good is
unworthy of the bad’. The expression— in Greek as in English—is somewhat
strained in order to correspond to οὐκ
ἀξίων above (l. 17); but after all ‘I am unworthy of you’
is much the same as ‘I am less worthy than you’. The Greeks can even use
ἀνάξιος in the sense of ‘more worthy than’, ‘too good
for’: e.g. Soph. Philoct. 1009.
22. τὰ μὲν μείζω—ᾖ
:
i.e. when τὰ κακά are μείζω and τὰ
ἀγαθὰ σμικρότερα , then τἀγαθά
are ἀνάξια τῶν κακῶν : τὰ κακά are ἀνάξια
τῶν ἀγαθῶν , when τὰ ἀγαθά are μείζω , and τὰ κακὰ
σμικρότερα . Similarly with
πλείω and ἐλάττω . It
must be borne in mind that ἄξιος does not
here denote moral, but rather physical strength or value: good is ἀνάξιον
κακοῦ , because it is smaller or less numerous.
23. πλείω, τὰ δὲ ἐλάττω ᾖ
.
See on 330A
26. μεταλάβωμεν
, i.e.
‘let us change and take the names pleasant and painful and apply them to,
etc.’ Cf. below 356Dἐπί follows
ὀνόματα as in τίθεσθαι ὄνομα ἐπί
τινι and the like.
31. καὶ τίς ἄλλη ἀναξία
.
This—the MSS. reading—is undoubtedly right. Plato coins the word ἀναξία for ‘unworthiness’ to complete the
parallel with D above: cf. ll. 17-21 οὐκ ἀξίων
ὄντων νικᾶν—κατὰ τί δὲ—ἀνάξιά ἐστιν τἀγαθὰ τῶν κακῶν κτλ.
Similarly in Phaedo, 105E, Plato coins ἀνάρτιος , in 106A
ἄθερμος (rightly accepted, in spite of MS. authority, by editors)
and ἄψυκτος (see MSS., but Wyttenbach's ἄψυχρος is—we think rightly—accepted by
some editors) as pointed and convenient negatives to ἄρτιος,
θερμός, ψυχρός . Cicero's translation ‘quae igitur potest esse indignitas voluptatis ad molestiam, nisi in
magnitudine aut in longitudine alterius utrius posita?’ (Nobbe's
Cicero, p. 1313) shows that ἀναξία
was read in his time: so in Ficinus' ‘quae vero alia inest ad dolorem indignitas voluptati quam excessus inter se atque
defectus?’ The word ἀναξία hardly took
root in Greek, though occasionally found in the writings of the Stoics,
whose regular word for this notion is ἀπαξία. ἡδονῇ
(now found to be the reading of some MSS.) for
ἡδονή is due to Heindorf.
33. ταῦτα δ’ ἐστί
: as
Sauppe remarks, we should expect ταῦτα
δ’ ἐστὶ τὸ μείζω—γίγνεσθαι , but the words are said as if for καὶ τίς ἄλλη ἀναξία
κτλ. had been written καὶ πῶς
ἄλλως
ἀνάξια τὰ ἡδέα ρπὸς τὰ λυρηπά, ἀλλ’ ἢ ὑρεπβάλλοντα ἀλλήλων καὶ
ἐλλείποντα;
35. μᾶλλον καὶ ἧττον
:
this case is not given above (D-E) because the notion of
intensity is more applicable to pleasure (and pain) than to good (and
evil): cf. Phileb. 24A ff. with 27E ἡδονὴ
καὶ λύπη πέρας ἔχετον, ἢ τῶν τὸ μᾶλλόν τε
καὶ
ἧττον δεχομένων
ἐοτόν; ναί, τῶν τὸ μᾶλλον, ὦ Σώκρατες .
εἰ γάρ τις λέγοι
. So far we have reached this
point. To be overcome by pleasure is to choose in place of lesser
pleasures greater pains and the like. But here the element of time comes
in: a man might fairly say—yes, but the pleasures are
now, the pains remote. Socrates tries to show that this makes no
real difference.
36. τὸ παραχρῆμα ἡδύ
. When
we are overcome by pleasure, we do the pleasant, not the painful: therefore
the contrast is between the present pleasure and the
remote consequences, whether pleasure or pain. For this reason it would be
wrong to supply καὶ λυπηρόν after ἡδύ .
45. ἐάν τε τὰ ἐγγὺς κτλ.
When
once you have equated ‘near’ and ‘far’ (see above), then (but not till then)
your final choice is not affected by the question of proximity in time.
Theoretically, no doubt, this is right; but no man is so ἀγαθὸς
ἱστάναι as to weigh ἐγγύς
and πόρρω correctly; whence the saying
‘Let us eat and drink; for tomorrow we die’. ‘Near’ and ‘far’ can only be
weighed aright on the supposition that man is immortal and will live
hereafter under the same moral laws as rule us here: but of
immortality there is no hint in this dialogue.
47. ταῦτα
: i.e. τὰ ἡδέα .
51. ὅτε
: the notion of time
readily passes into that of cause, as in
quoniam and cum.
52. φαίνεται ὑμῖν κτλ.
Two examples are given: (1) size— of which παχέα and φωναὶ
μεγάλαι (according to the Greek and Roman way of viewing sound)
are special varieties, (2) number, i.e. τὰ πολλά
. The specific varieties παχέα and φωναὶ
μεγάλαι are not dealt with in the sequel. With what
follows compare (besides Rep. X. 602Dcited above) Euthyphr. 7Bff. and Alc. I,
126C ff., and with the present passage Phileb. 42A and Rep. VII. 523C524C. The resolution by the
intellect of such contradictory sense-perceptions is made the basis of
Plato's scheme of higher education in the Republic.
55. αἱ ἴσαι
is Heindorf's
correction for ἴσαι .
57. μήκη—πράττειν
:
as we ἡδέα
πράττομεν. πράττειν (with μήκη
) is explained by λαμβάνειν : see above on 314A
59. ἡ μετρητικὴ τέχνη
.
See Introduction, p. xxix.
60. ἢ ἡ τοῦ φαινομένου δύναμις.
ἤis omitted in B and T. ‘The power of
that which appears’ is its power to affect us.
61. ἐπλάνα καὶ ἐποίει κτλ.
ἄνis not to be supplied. Plato is
reverting to the illustration in C. The imperfect is idiomatic for ‘causes
us, as we saw, to wander’, etc. (viz. because τὰ
αὐτὰ
μεγέθη seem to us both μείζω
and ἐλάττω ): it is what Goodwin calls the
‘philosophic imperfect’: cf. Crito, 47Dδιαφθεροῦμεν
ἐκεῖνο καὶ λωβησόμεθα, ὃ τῷ μὲν δικαίῳ βέλτιον ἐγίγνετο(becomes as
we saw), τῶ? δὲ ἀδίκω? ἀπώλλυτο . By
adding καὶ ἐν ταῖς πράξεσιν
—σμικρῶν Plato treats his hypothesis that εὖ πράττειν is to select μεγάλα μήκη as a fact; he does so also in ἂν ἐποίησε κτλ. i.e. ‘would have made’,
viz. if we had made use of it, but we did not. If the hypothesis were still
treated as a hypothesis, we should have had ἂν
ἐποίει (and not ἂν
ἐποίησε ) to correspond to what would then have been ἂν (expressed or understood) ἐπλάνα καὶ
ἐποίει .
ἄνω τε καὶ κάτω.
ἄνω κάτω( Theaet. 195C) and ἄνω
καὶ κάτω ( Gorg. 495A) are other forms of this proverbial
phrase.
77. ἀριθμητική
. In Gorg. 451Bff.
ἀριθμητική is said to be a science concerned with τὸ ἄρτιόν τε καὶ περιττόν, ὅσα ἑκάτερα
τυγχάνει ὄντα , whereas the function which is here
assigned to ἀριθμητική is there given to λογιστική : τὰ
μὲν ἄλλα καθάπερ ἡ
ἀπιθμητικὴ ἡ λογιστικὴ ἔχει· ρεπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ γάπ ἐστιν τό τε ἄπτιον
καὶ τὸ ρεπιττόν· διαφέπει δὲ τοσοῦτον, ὅτι καὶ ρπὸς αὑτὰ καὶ ρπὸς
ἄλληλα πῶς ἔχει πλήθονς (cf. ll. 71 ff. τὸ
πλέον—τὸ ἔλαττον ἢ
αὐτὸ πρὸς ἑαυτὸ ἢ τὸ ἕτερον πρὸς τὸ ἕτερον ) ἐπισκοπεῖ τὸ περιττὸν καὶ
τὸ ἄρτιον ἡ λογιστική .
79. εἶεν—ἐπεὶ δὲ δή
.
The MSS. read ἐπειδὴ
δέ , but after εἶεν
Plato regularly uses δὲ δή in coming to
the
application of a train of reasoning or illustrations: cf. 312Eεἶεν· ὁ
δὲ
δὴ σοφιστὴς περὶ
τίνος δεινὸν ποιεῖ λέγειν; and 311Cεἶεν—παρὰ
δὲ
δὴ Πρωταγόραν
κτλ.
87. εἰσαῦθις σκεψόμεθα
. Siebeck, who asserts ( Zur
Chronologie der Platonischen Dialogen, pp. 121 ff.) that this and
similar formulas were intended by Plato to be a distinct promise of future
dialogues (if not a reference to a later part of the same dialogue), finds
here a reference to Politicus, 283D ff., where the ‘measuring
art’ is discussed and described as the βασιλικὴ
τέχνη .
90. ἡνίκα
ἡμεῖς—ὡμολογοῦμεν
:
352B ff.
93. ἔφατε
: in 352D The original ἤρεσθε has to be repeated in consequence of
the introduction of this independent clause.
95. ἤρεσθε
: in 353A
98. εἴπατε
: but εἴπατον in
353A otherwise there is no change in the quotation. B and T
have εἴπετε , but Stobaeus (who cites from τοσοῦτον in
357B to μεγίστη357E in his Florilegium )
reads εἴπατε . According to Rutherford ( New
Phrynichus, p. 219) εἴπετε is not
Attic, but this is doubtful, if any faith can be placed in MS. authority.
104. ἧς τὸ πρόσθεν
.
This—the reading of the best MSS.— has been unjustly rejected in favour of εἰς τὸ πρόσθεν ; but εἰς τὸ
πρόσθεν can hardly be justified here. Sauppe refers to 339Dὀλίγον
δὲ
τοῦ ποιήματος εἰς τὸ πρόσθεν προελθών , where, however, εἰς τὸ πρόσθεν goes with προελθών , and in all the cases which he
quotes there is a verb containing the idea of progress to go with the
phrase, and so in Ar. Knights.
751ἀλλ’ ἐς τὸ πρόσθε χρὴ
παρεῖν’ ἐς τὴν πύκνα(where probably we should read παριέν’ for
παρεῖν’ as in Ach. 43 πάριτ’
ἐς τὸ
πρόσθεν ). Where there is no such verb (which is very
rarely the case), the phrase means ‘with a view to what lies in front’, e.g. Alcib.
I, 132B οὐκοῦν τοσοῦτον
μὲν ἡμῖν εἰς τὸ πρόσθεν πεπέρανται . It need hardly be
said that the phrase cannot mean simply
ἔμπροσθεν . On the other hand ἧς
seems to be just what is needed: the construction in full would be καὶ οὐ μόνον ἐπιστήμης ( ἐνδείᾳ ), ἀλλὰ
καὶ ( ταύτης τῆς ἐπιστήμης
ἐνδείᾳ ) ἣν τὸ πρόσθεν ἔτι
ὡμολογήκατε ὅτι μετρητική (sc. ἐστι
: for the omission of ἐστί after ὅτι cf. below
359Dἀπεδείχθη ἄρτι ὅτι
ἀδύνατον ): ‘and from lack, not merely of knowledge, but
of the knowledge which you have further admitted above to be measuring
knowledge’. The attraction of the relative extends to μετρητική also in spite of ὅτι : cf. Apol. 37Bὧν εὖ
οἶδ’
ὅτι κακῶν
ὄντωνfor τούτων ἃ εὖ οἶδ’ ὅτι
κακὰ
ὄντα ( ὅτι being used
with the participle as in Gorg. 481E: see note on Apol. loc.
cit. ).
110. οὔτε αὐτοί
: the
verb hangs fire: we should expect Plato to continue οὔτε
οἱ ὑμέτεροι παῖδες ἔρχονται κτλ. Stephanus thought προσέρχεσθε had fallen out after αὐτοί , Madvig ἴτε
, while Kroschel suggests οὔτ’ ἐφοιτᾶτε αὐτοί
. It seems probable that the text is corrupt; at all events no parallel has
yet been adduced. The two cases quoted by Sauppe (Dem. πρὸς
Ἄφοβον , § 54, and pseudo-Dem. πρὸς
Τιμόθεον , § 52) are more than doubtful in respect of their text,
which (as Sauppe quotes it) is not according to the MSS. Madvig's ἴτε is simplest, but the future seems out
of place: perhaps ᾖτε should be read.
Socrates begins to apply the results of the previous discussion to
the subject of his dispute with Protagoras.
Pleasure is good and pain evil, and no one willingly encounters
what he believes to be evil. But fear is the expectation of evil:
therefore no one will willingly encounter what he fears.
3. ὦ Ἱππία τε καὶ Πρόδικε
. Here and in
358E and 359Aὦ has dropped out in the MSS. after
preceding ‐ω . The effect of its omission
would be to render the address unduly abrupt.
3. ὑμῖν
. So the MSS.
Sauppe's ἡμῖν is not necessary. ὑμῖν means all three sophists: and ὁ λόγος is not the discussion as a whole,
but the speaking, viz. in answer (cf. δοῦναι
καὶ δέξασθαι
λόγον ). Throughout this chapter all the sophists reply:
in the next Socrates makes use of their united admissions to destroy
Protagoras alone.
7. διαἰρεσιν τῶν ὀνομάτων
: see note on 314C
9. εἴτε ὁπόθεν καὶ
ὅπως—ὀνομάζων
. This mode of address insinuates that
Prodicus was a θεῖος ἀνήρ , since a god
was addressed in a similar way. See Crat. 400Eὥσπερ ἐν
ταῖς
εὐχαῖς νόμος ἐστὶν ἡμῖν εὔχεσθαι, οἵτινές τε καὶ ὁρόθεν
χαίπουσιν
ὀνομαζόμενοιand cf. Euthyd. 288Aθαυμάσιά
γε λέγετ’, ὦ ἄνδρες
Θούριοι, εἴτε Χῖοι εἴθ’ ὁπόθεν καὶ ὅπῃ χαίρετον ὀνομαζόμενοι
and Symp. 212Cὅ τι καὶ
ὅπῃ
χαίρεις ὀνομάζων, τοῦτο ὀνόμαζε. A similar effect is
produced in Symp. 176Cby the words Σωκράτη
δ’ ἐξαιρῶ λόγου , since there was a proverb τὸ θεῖον ἐξαιρῶ λόγου : cf. Rep. VI. 492Eθεῖον
μέντοι κατὰ τὴν παροιμίαν ἐξαιρῶμεν λόγου. The multitude of
epithets given to gods is best illustrated by such a hymn as the Homeric
Hymn to Ares, ll. 1 ff. Ἆρες
ὑρεπμενέτα, βπισάπματε, χπυσεορήληξ, ὀβπιμόθυμε, φέπασρι.
πολισσόε, χαλκοκορυστὰ κτλ. In the multitude of names the
suppliant hopes to include the acceptable one.
11. πρὸς ὃ βούλομαι
:
emphatic, ‘with a view to my meaning’ )( πρὸς ὃ
ὀνομάζω .
13. ἐπὶ τούτου
. This
usage can only be on the analogy of ἡ
ἐπὶ Σάρδεων ὁδός and the like: actions are looked on as
ways leading to a goal or destination or
τέλος : cf. above 354C
and D. To take the words (with Sauppe) as ‘in the case of
this’, ‘in this domain’, would give a wrong meaning; the moral character of
an act being determined by its end, it is
καλόν only if its end is καλόν
. The expression is however very curious, and perhaps unique. I once thought
that ἅπασαι might conceal some present
participle such as ἄγουσαι —agreeing with πράξεις : but the occurrence of ἁπάσας below in
359E shows ἅπασαι to be probably
genuine here. The reasoning is this. Pleasure, the end, is good, pain evil;
consequently all actions aiming at the end are καλαί
, and therefore good (as usual ὠφέλιμος is
but a synonym for ‘good’); therefore— as no one willingly selects evil
rather than good—no one willingly does the worse (i.e. selects evil actions)
when he might act better. As it is with πράξεις
that bravery and cowardice are concerned, it is necessary for Plato to
establish that ‘no one willingly seeks the worse’ is true of individual acts
as well as of ultimate ends.
14. ἆρ’ οὐ καλαί
. The
words καὶ ὠφέλιμοι which follow οὐ
καλαί in the MSS. are rightly rejected because they
anticipate the identification in the next line.
17. ἢ ἃ ποιεῖ, καὶ δυνατά
is
Heindorf's emendation of the corrupt ἢ ἃ ἐποίει
καὶ δύναται of the MSS.
18. ἥττω εἶναι αὑτοῦ κτλ.
The
phrases ἥττων
αὑτοῦ and κρείττων ἑαυτοῦ
are here substituted for ἥττων τῆς ἡδονῆς
and κρείττων τῆς ἡδονῆς . Cf. the
discussions in Rep. IV. 430Eff. and Laws, I. 626Eff., where κρείττω and ἥττω
εἶναι ἑαυτοῦ are interpreted as the victory of the better part in
us over the worse and conversely. As the worse part is the part which seeks ἡδονή , i.e. τὸ
ἐπιθυμητικόν , the identification is just.
30. καλεῖτέ τι δέος
.
Heindorf's emendation for καλεῖτε δέος of
the MSS. See note on 330C above.
31. προσδοκίαντινὰ—κακοῦ
: a common definition; cf.
Lach. 198B δέος γὰρ εἶναι προσδοκίαν
μέλλοντος κακοῦ. φόβος in Laws, 1. 644C is defined
as ‘expectation before pain’ ( πρὸ λύπης
ἐλπίς ).
46. δέος, φόβος δ’ οὔ
.
Prodicus' distinction is just, though often dropped in
practice: in φόβος ‘the physical agitation
due to present danger ( ἡ
παραυτίκα πτόησις , says Ammonius) is the leading idea’, in δέος the apprehension of evil to come ( κακοῦ
ὑπόνοια ). See note on Euthyphr. 12B, where Plato implicitly
recognises the difference.
35. ἀλλὰ τόδε
: sc. διαφέρει. οὐδὲν διαφέρει does not of course
mean ‘there is no difference’, but ‘it doesn't matter’.
CHAPTER XXXIX
It is here proved that courage is wisdom.
Socrates first reverts to the point at which the discussion on ἡδονῆς ἡττᾶσθαι began (
359A C): next, Protagoras asserts that ἀνδρεῖοι
and δειλοί are willing to encounter opposite
things, but Socrates shows that both encounter what they take to be θαρραλέα , i.e., so far, the same things ( 359C E). Protagoras thereupon objects that ἀνδρεῖοι will encounter e.g. war, while δειλοί will not. Socrates replies by showing that
if cowards do not willingly enter upon war, the reason is their ignorance ( 359E 60A). In general, while brave men fear and
feel courage honourably, i.e. well, the reverse is true of cowards, owing to
their ignorance ( 360A360B . And since it is through δειλία that men are δειλοί
, and we have shown that men are δειλοί
through ἀμαθία
τῶν δεινῶν καὶ μὴ δεινῶν , cowardice is ignorance, and
consequently bravery is wisdom, viz. δεινῶν τε καὶ
μὴ δεινῶν ( 360C360E .
4. τότε
: 330A ff.
7. τὸ ὕστερον
: 349D ff.
17. ἠρόμην
: 349E
18. καὶ ἴτας γ’, ἔφη
. The
recapitulation stops here. ἔφην
ἐγώ two lines below is the usual ‘said I’ of narrated
dialogue.
20. ἐπὶ τί
: so MSS.: the
second hand in B reads ἐπὶ τίνα , but cf.
below, l. 26, where the question is repeated with ἐπὶ
τί . For the common passage from singular to plural the editors
compare Phaedo, 58Cτί ἦν
τὰ
λεχθέντα καὶ πραχθέντα;
24. δεινά
: the MSS. read δειλά by mistake, and so in 360C below
δειλῶν three times for δεινῶν .
28. ἐν οἷς σὺ ἔλεγες τοῖς λόγοις
: see on 342B
31. ἐπειδὴ τὸ ἥττω—ἀμαθία οὖσα
. The only proof given that we ‘encounter
evils believing them to be evils’ was the phrase ἤττω
εἶναι ἡδονῆς (for which ἥττω εἶναι
ἑαυτοῦ is here substituted: see on
358C . We have demolished this proof by showing that the
phrase means ἀμαθία , and we therefore
infer that ἐπὶ ἃ δεινὰ ἡγεῖται εἶναι οὐδεὶς ἔρχεται
( δεινά being a subdivision of κακά ).
32. ηὑρέθη
. The MSS. have εὑρέθη : but see on 315B
37. αὐτίκα
:
‘veluti, ne longe hinc abeam’ (Kroschel) and so ‘for example’: a
very
frequent use in Plato.
38. πότερον—καλὸν ὂν κτλ.
Cf. 349E
41. ἔμπροσθεν
: 358B
51. κάλλιόν τε
. The
MSS. read καλόν τε . Stephanus made the
necessary change.
56. καὶ οἱ δειλοὶ καὶ οἱ θρασεῖς
καὶ οἱ μαινόμενοι
. In 350B ff. those who are θαρραλέοι without
ἐπιστήμη are called μαινόμενοι
by an expressive metaphor. Here the μαινόμενοι
— which is suggested, but no more—by the μαινόμενοι in
350B mdash; are treated as a distinct class: the word is to be
understood of literal madmen like Ajax in the play of Sophocles. The word θρασεῖς has an evil connotation as in Laws, I. 630Bθρασεῖς
καὶ
ἄδικοι καὶ ὑβρισταὶ καὶ ἀφρονέστατοι σχεδὸν ἁπάντων: Plato
could not have said θαρραλέοι here since θαρραλέοι throughout the dialogue is
applied also to ἀνδρεῖοι . It would be
better to reject (with Kral) both καὶ
οἱ θρασεῖς and καὶ οἱ μαινόμενοι
than only καὶ οἱ θρασεῖς with Sauppe and
Schanz; we should then—as throughout this chapter—have only one negative to ἀνδρεῖοι , viz.
δειλοί , but we may allow some latitude of expression to Socrates,
and καί after
οὐκοῦν is slightly in favour of supposing that other classes
follow οἱ δειλοί , though it may go with the whole sentence.
67. ἐπένευσεν
:
Protagoras dies hard: see on Euthyphr. 8A.
78. φιλονικεῖν—τὸ ἐμὲ εἶναι
. For the orthography of φιλονικεῖν see note on 336E above. Apparently φιλονικεῖν is not elsewhere used in Plato
with the accusative, but the construction is a natural one and occurs in
Thucydides: in Rep. I. 338Awe have προσεποιεῖτο
δὲ φιλονικεῖν πρὸς τὸ ἐμὲ εἶναι τὸν ἀποκρινόμενον .
CHAPTER XL
Socrates points out that while Protagoras' theory would point to
the conclusion that virtue is not teachable, he himself in trying
to prove that virtue is knowledge goes near to maintaining that
it is. Thus the interlocutors have as it were changed places. The
dialogue ends with mutual compliments.
3. αὐτὸ ἡ ἀρετή
: ‘virtue
itself’, literally ‘virtue, the thing itself’. Cf. Crat. 411Dεἰ δὲ
βούλει,
αὐτὸ ἡ νόησις τοῦ νέου ἐστὶν
ἕσις, Theaet. 146Eγνῶναι
ἐπιστήμην αὐτὸ ὅ τί ποτ’ ἐστίν: ‘ αὐτό
( per se ) substantivis et adiectivis adiunctum rei
alicuius naturam acvim per se et universe spectatam significat’, says Ast. This
use of αὐτός furnished Plato (as in αὐτοάνθρωπος and the like) with a convenient
way of denoting his Ideas, but here of course αὐτό
does not denote the Idea but is ipsum as opposed to τὰ περὶ
τῆς
ἀρετῆς .
13. πάντα χρήματα
:
exaggeration—as if Socrates held ἐπιστήμη
to be the ἀρχή of the universe and said ἐπιστήμη πάντα as Heraclitus might say πῦρ πάντα .
18. ὅλον
: i.e. ἡ ἀρετή —the gender is like αὐτό in line 3. Sauppe cites Meno, 79Bἐμοῦ
δεηθέντος ὅλον εἰπεῖν τὴν ἀρετήν.
21. ἔοικεν σπεύδοντι
: a frequent usage in Plato; see on Apol. 27Aἔοικεν
γὰρ—διαπειρωμένῳ.
23. ἄνω κάτω
: see on 356D above.
26. ἐξελθεῖν—ἐπὶ
.
There is a slight hint of military metaphor: ‘fare forth against virtue also
to see what she is’, ‘also attack the question what is virtue’: cf. Rep. II. 374Aὃ
( στρατόπεδον ) ἐξελθὸν—διαμαχεῖται
τοῖς ἐπιοῦσιν : cf. the similar use of ἰέναι
ἐπί in
Rep. v. 473C ἐπ’ αὐτὸ δή, ἧν δ’ ἐγώ,
εἶμι ὃ τῷ μεγίστῳ
προσεικάζομεν κύματι . Here
ἐξ‐ is appropriate, because the first campaign is as it
were ended ( ταῦτα διεξελθόντας ): it is
moreover natural to retain it, on account of the tendency noted on 311A A later hand in T has ἐλθεῖν , but the MSS. reading is
unobjectionable, nor is there any need to read
διελθεῖν or διεξελθεῖν
τὴν ἀρετήν as Kroschel suggests. For the sentiment cf.
Meno, 100B τὸ δὲ σαφὲς περὶ αὐτοῦ
εἰσόμεθα τότε, ὅταν πρὶν ᾥτινι τρόπῳ
τοῖς ἀνθπώροις ραπαγίγνεται ἀπετή, ρπότεπον ἐριχειπήσωμεν αὐτὸ
καθ’
αὑτὸ ζητεῖν τί ποτ’ ἕστιν ἀρετή .
27. ἐπισκέψασθαι περὶ αὐτοῦ
: Siebeck (in the treatise cited on p.
203) here and in 361E
εἰσαῦθις—διέξιμεν finds a promise of the Meno
and the Gorgias.
28. μἡ πολλάκις
: ne forte, as often in Plato. What often happens may
happen in a future case: so Lucretius uses ‘saepe’ for ‘ut saepe fit’.
31.
Προμηθεὺς—προμηθούμενος
. Puns on proper names are frequent
in Plato: see Riddell's Digest
of Idioms, § 323.
34. κατ’ ἀρχάς
, viz. 348C ff.,
320B
37. οὔτε—τε
: see on 309B
40. ώ=ν ἐντυγχάνω
: a
somewhat rare attraction, since in the unattracted form the relative would
be in the dative and not in the accusative case: cf. Theaet. 144Aὧν δὴ
πώποτε ἐνέτυχον—
καὶ πάνυ πολλοῖς πεπλησίακα—οὐδένα πω ἠ?σθόμην κτλ., where
Wohlrab cites also Gorg. 509A.
41. τηλικούτων
:
Socrates was about 36 at the date of action of the Protagoras.
46. ἔφην
:
335C
Καλλίᾳ τῷ καλῷ
: see on 336B above. For
καλῷ cf. Symp. 174A ταῦτα
δὴ ἐκαλλωπισάμην ἵνα καλὸς παρὰ καλὸν (viz. Agathon) ἴω . Sauppe reminds us of the use of καλός on vases, and also cites Ar. Ach. 143ἐν τοῖσι τοίχοις ἔγραφ’ Ἀθηναῖοι
καλοί(of Sitalces) and the famous Κριτίᾳ
τοῦτ’ ἔστω τῷ
καλῷ of the dying Theramenes (Xen. Hell.
II. 3. 56).
APPENDIX I - THE POEM OF SIMONIDES
The difficulties of this poem are well known, and have called forth many pages of
comment. On p. 20 of his fourth edition of the
Protagoras, Sauppe enumerates the discussions on the subject down to
1884. The most important contribution since that year is Das
Gedicht des Simonides
in Platons Protagoras, von J. Aars (Christiania, 1888). Aars's
restoration has received the approval of Peppmüller (in the Berliner
Philologische Wochenschrift for 1899, pp. 174 ff.) and others; and there
now seems to be some prospect of finality in the criticism of the poem. In his
programme ( Das Simonideische Gedicht in
Platons Protagoras und die
Versuche dasselbe zu reconstruiren, Graz, 1889) Schwenk follows
Aars in every essential point.The restoration proposed by Schneidewin has
met with most favour, and is printed in most texts of the
Protagoras, not because it is thought to be certain, but as the
nearest approach to certainty of which the case admits. It may be at once
allowed that no restoration can claim to represent with certainty just what
Simonides wrote in the order in which it was written. Plato is seldom careful to
make his quotations accurate, and the perverse exposition of the meaning of this
particular poem is hardly calculated to increase our confidence in his verbal
accuracy here. Nevertheless, Plato is our sole authority for the poem in
question, and consequently that restoration will be the most probable which,
while it satisfies every metrical requirement, involves the fewest changes in
the text and sequence of the poem as it stands in Plato.
The words apparently quoted from the poem, as they occur in
the Bodleian manuscript, are according to Schanz as follows
(we note obvious corrections at the foot of the page).
In 346D E part of the poem is paraphrased and
repeated in the words οὐ ζητῶ πανάμωμον ἄνθρωπον
εὐρυεδοῦς ὅσοι καρπὸν
αἰνύμεθα χθονός, ἔρειθ’ ὑμῖν εὑπὼν ἀραγγελέω· ὥστε τούτου γ’ ἕνεκα
οὐδένα ἐραινέσομαι, ἀλλά μοι ἐξαπκεῖ ἂν ᾖ μέσος καὶ μηδὲν κακὸν ροιῇ,
ὡς ἐγὼ πάντας φιλέω καὶ ἐπαίνημι ἑκὼν ὅστις ἕρδῃ μηδὲν αἰσχρόν .
The only words whose place in the poem is somewhat doubtful are ἔμοιγ’ ἐξαρκεῖ and οὐ
γάρ εἰμι φιλόμωμος . They are excluded both by Bergk and Blass,
but it is not likely that they come from Plato, since μοι
ἐξαρκεῖ occurs also in the final recapitulation, and οὐ διὰ ταῦτά σε ψέγω, ὅτι εἰμὶ
φιλόψογος is said ( 346C as well
as οὐ γάρ εἰμι φιλόμωμος . Bonghi (quoted by
Aars) p. 8, note 1. assigns the words οἶόν τε μέντοι ἐπί γε χρόνον τινά in 344B to a place in the poem after ἄνευ ψόγου τετυγμένον ; it is however tolerably
clear that they come from Socrates, who is merely developing the latent
antithesis in χαλεπόν .
Schneidewin's In his Delectus poesis Graecorum,
p. 379.restoration is as follows:
There is little probability in this arrangement. Schneidewin altogether neglects
the evident metrical resemblance between the words from ἔμοιγ’
ἐξαρκεῖ to τοῖσί
τ’ αἰσχρὰ μὴ μέμικταιSee the restoration below
on p. 216. and the other sections of the poem. But the obvious and indeed
fatal objection to Schneidewin's restoration is that he makes a wide departure
from the order of the words as they come in Plato, placing the ἔμοιγ’ ἐξαρκεῖ κτλ. of
346C before the τοὔνεκεν
οὔποτ’
ἐγώ of 345C That Socrates reverts in 346D to τοὔνεκεν οὔποτ’
ἐγὼ κτλ. is no reason for placing these words in the last part of
the poem, any more than we should place the words Ἄνδρ’
ἀγαθὸν μὲν ἀλαθέως κτλ. after ἄνδρα δ’ οὐκ
ἔστι κτλ. because Socrates reverts to them in 344E A man who professes to be
giving a continuous exposition of a poem may revert to the middle of it when he
has come to the end, in order to illustrate the sentiment with which the poem
concludes, but it would be the superfluity of naughtiness to put the end of the
poem into the middle, which is what Schneidewin makes Socrates do. If οὐ ζητῶ κτλ. in 346D
were in reality the conclusion of the poem, we ought to frame our Στροφὴ β’ out of these very words, and not from τοὔνεκεν οὕποτ’
ἐγὼ κτλ. We should then have to omit the words ἀνάγκᾳ δ’ οὐδὲ θεοὶ μάχονται , because they are not
found in 346D E, but it is beyond question
that these words are part of Simonides' poem. It is tolerably certain that in 346D we have but a recapitulation of part of the
argument, presented as a commentary on the concluding text πάντα τοι καλὰ κτλ. , which sums up the whole
ethical teaching of the poem. This is practically admitted by Schneidewin
himself when he writes his final strophe not as it appears in 346D but as it stands in 345C D.
Bergk Poetae Lyr. Graeci4 , III, 384 ff.arranges
the poem in three complete strophes. His restoration has the merit of
recognising the similarity in rhythm between Schneidewin's epode and the other
parts of the poem; several of his emendations are also in all probability right. See the footnotes on p. 213. It may, however, be doubted
whether he does well in altogether excluding from the poem the words ἔμοιγ’ ἐξαρκεῖ and οὐ γάρ
εἰμι φιλόμωμος , and he deserts the Platonic order even more
ruthlessly than Schneidewin when he places ὃς ἂν ᾖ Bergk's emendation for μή .κακὸς—μὴ
μέμικταιdirectly after ἄνευ ψόγου
τετυγμένον , besides that Plato clearly indicates by the words προιόντος τοῦ ᾄσματος (
339C , ὀλίγον—εἰς τὸ
πρόσθεν προελθών ( 339D , and ὀλίγα διελθών ( 344B
, that there is a lacuna after τετυγμένον .
Blass In the Rheinisches Museum for 1872, pp.
326 ff.agrees with Bergk in regarding the poem as a sequence of strophes,
but discovers four of these in place of three. In the first strophe Blass's
arrangement agrees with that of Schneidewin; in the second, he supposes the
first two verses to be lost, and the rest to contain ὃς
ἂν ᾖ κακὸς κτλ. down to τοῖσί τ’
αἰσχρὰ μὴ μέμικται ; the third consists of οὐδέ
μοι ἐμμελέως—τούς
κε θεοὶ φιλῶσιν ; the fourth and last extends from τοὔνεκεν οὔ
ποτ’ ἐγώ to ἀνάγκη? δ’ οὐδὲ θεοὶ
μάχονται . This arrangement (which further agrees with that of
Bergk in rejecting ἔμοιγ’
ἐξαρκεῖ and οὐ γάρ εἰμι φιλόμωμος
) upsets even more completely than either of the others the
sequence of the poem as it is given by Plato, and for that reason is most
unlikely to be right.
The only arrangement which faithfully adheres to the Platonic order of citation
is that of Aars, in the treatise referred to already. P. 212,
n. 1.
This restoration seems to us on the whole the most probable. In l. 4 of strophe 2
Plato no doubt wrote ὃν ἄν (the MSS. reading)
for ὅν , using the more common construction in
defiance of metre, just as in l. 5 γάρ after μέν is due to the desire to show the sequence of
thought. In ll. 6 and 7 of the same strophe Plato omits some monosyllable after
κακῶς , perhaps τις or τι or αὖ :
Hermann's view that καί of the next line
should be written in l. 6, and l. 7 be made into τοὐπίπλειστον
ἄριστοι κτλ. , is perhaps less probable. For l. 7 we should prefer as
nearer to the words of Plato κἀπὶ πλεῖστον
ἄριστοι κτλ. In the third strophe we prefer ἐπί τ’ ὔμμιν for the reasons given in the note upon
the passage on p. 180. In the last strophe ὃς
ἂν ᾖ κακός is Bergk's emendation for ὸς
ἂν
μὴ κακὸς ᾖ : here again Plato substitutes the commoner idiom for
the rarer and more poetic, with which we may compare Aristophanes,
Birds, 694 γῆ δ’ οὐδ’ ἀὴρ οὐδ’ οὐρανὸς ἦν
. It is, however, more likely that Simonides wrote ὃς
ἂν ᾖ κακὸς μήτ’
ἄγαν ἀπάλαμνος , i.e. μήτε κακὸς μήτε
κτλ. , for this idiom is seldom found with
μηδέ or οὐδέ : see Jebb on
Sophocles, Philoctetes, 771. To take
μηδέ for ἀλλὰ μή would give a
wrong meaning, as can be seen from the paraphrase in
346Dἀλλά μοι
ἐξαρκεῖ ἂν ᾖ μέσος καὶ μηδὲν κακὸν ποιῇ . It seems better too, in
this line, to take εἰδώς γ’ ὀνησίπολιν δίκαν
ὑγιὴς ἀνήρ (sc. ἐστιν )
together, and print colons before εἰδώς and
after ἀνήρ . In l. 4 οὐδὲ
μή μιν is Bergk's restoration for μήν
of the MSS. The position assigned by Aars to οὔκ εἰμ’
ἐγὼ φιλόμωμος (in l. 2) is only tentative, but it is slightly
supported by οὐ
διὰ ταῦτά σε
ψέγω ὅτι εἰμὶ φιλόψογος coming before ἔμοιγ’
ἐξαρκεῖ in 346C There is nothing in
Plato to indicate that the first line (with part of the second) is wanting in
strophe 4, but neither is there anything to prove the reverse, and (since the
poem is not in any case preserved entire, five verses being omitted in the first
strophe) it is much more reasonable to assume an omission here than violently to
distort the sequence of the poem as quoted by Plato.
Whether the poem is to be ranked as an ᾠδὴ ἐπίνικος
, an ἐγκώμιον , or a
σκόλιον is a question which should not be raised until the poem has
first been restored from the quotations in the
Protagoras. If the restoration given above is even approximately
correct, the poem cannot be classed as an epinikion; an encomium it is not
likely to be, since no one is praised. There is no reason whatever for
identifying it with the famous encomium referred to by Quintilian
(XI. 2. 11). Blass holds that the poem was a scolion, and this is by far the
most probable view, but no certainty is attainable on the point. With the
exception of the lacunae which we have noted, the poem is most probably
complete, for Socrates is trying to prove that Simonides attacks Pittacus
throughout the whole poem: see
345Dοὕτω σφόδρα καὶ
δῑ ὅλου τοῦ ᾄσματος ἐπεξέρχεται τῷ τοῦ Πιττακοῦ ῥήματι and 343C344B
We add a translation of the poem, incorporating the few
changes which we have made in Aars's restoration.
It is hard to quit you like a truly good man, in hands and feet
and mind foursquare, fashioned without blame.
(The five lost vv, may have further elaborated the meaning
of ‘truly good’.)
Nor do I deem the word of Pittacus well said, wise though he
was that spake it: ‘it is hard’ he said ‘to be noble.’ To a god
alone belongs that meed; a man cannot but prove evil, if hopeless calamity
overthrow him. Every man if he has fared well is
good, evil, if ill; and for the most part best are they whom the
gods love.
Therefore never will I cast away my portion of life vainly upon
a bootless hope, seeking what cannot come to be, an all-blameless man, of us
who take the fruit of the broad earth; when I find
him, look you, you shall hear. I praise and love all them that
willingly do nothing base; against necessity even gods do not
contend.
¯ ¯ ¯ [I love not fault-finding]; enough for me if one be not evi
nor exceeding violent: yea sound is the man who knoweth justice,
benefactress of cities; nor will I find fault with him; for the tribe
of fools is infinite. Surely all is fair wherein is no alloy of foul.
The easy-going morality of the poem is in harmony with what
we know both of the life and poetry of Simonides: he was ever ‘a
genial and courtly man’, anxious to make the most of life,
‘dwelling with flowers like the bee, seeking yellow honey’ (Sim.
Frag. 47).
APPENDIX II - PROTAGORAS' LIFE AND WORKS
We give the life of Protagoras as recorded by Diogenes Laertius (IX. 50-6) and
add the fragments of his works, according (in the main) to Frei's arrangement. Quaestiones Protagoreae, pp. 176 ff., where the references
are fully given.
The δίκη ὑπὲρ μισθοῦ (Diog. Laert. IX. 55) and
the ‘rerum illustrium disputationes, quae nunc communes appellantur loci’ (Cic.
Brut. 46) have apparently left no trace.
F.
Various
7. φύσεως καὶ ἀσκήσεως διδασκαλία δεῖται, καὶ ἀπὸ
vεότητος δὲ
ἀρξαμένους δεῖ μανθάνειν (from the μέγας
λόγος —probably identical with the
Προστακτικός : see Cramer,
Anecdot. Paris, 1, 171).
8. [Πρωταγόρας ἔλεγε] μηδὲν εἶναι μήτε τέχνην ἄνευ
μελέτης
μήτε μελέτην ἄνευ τέχνηςCf. Gomperz (cited
in the next note), p. 11. (perhaps from the same, ap.
Stob.
Flor. 29. 80).
Another fragment, probably from the same work, is quoted by J. Gildermeister and
F. Bücheler from a Syriac translation of Plutarch's περὶ
ἀσκήσεως (
Rhein. Mus. XXVII, 1872, 526). The original
perhaps ran:
Of the περὶ μαθημάτων , and the περὶ τεχνῶν (of which perhaps the περὶ πάλης was a part) nothing (so far as is
certainly known) survives. Gomperz's ingenious and learned attempt Reprinted from the Sitzungsberichte der
Kais. Akademie der
Wissenschaft in Wien: Philosophisch-Historische Classe, Band CXX.to
prove that the ‘Defence of Medicine’ which under the title of περὶ
τέχνης appears in the collection of Hippocratean works Littré, VI, 1-27. was written by Protagoras and belongs
to the treatise περὶ τεχνῶν has not, as yet,
commended itself to critics. See Wellmann in the Archiv
für Geschichte der Philosophie, V, 97 ff.